iit Mel Iaeabiniean eREN Hi } i 4 H i S } A (an sia Ni Basle pan bu nee ee Soe ae SS es * if 3 fit vii a = ea Pets ek ey i me ms ae ——s 'FOR THE PEOPLE| _FOR EDVCATION | FOR SCIENCE LIBRARY OF THE AMERICAN MUSEUM OF NATURAL HISTORY PROCEEDINGS OF THE ROYAL SOCIETY OF QUBENSLAND. VOLUME XIX. ~- PRINTED FOR THE SOCIETY BY H. POLE & CO., PRINTERS, ELIZABETH STREET, BRISBANE. 1907. INDEX, PAGE Acherontemys heckmani 11 Acrobasis inficita 44 Alligator, Terrapius, The 9 Ampycophora holophaea 42 ss meta nalenella 42 Ancylodes penicillata 46 Anerastria biseriella i a 8} = enervilla aie ae po As opificella 43 - plinthina 43 Ss rhodoneura aot AS Annual Meeting, Proceedings of 1 Aquatic Plants in Enoggera Res- voir, List of = .. 124 Argyria amoenalis 55 Banisia dohertyi 40 » elongata 40 » ypsilon 40 Bennett, F.: The Botany of Irvinebank and its immediate neighbourhood 65 Bombifrons : ae 4e 4 Bostra disticha s (ho) Botany of Invinebank and its im- inediate neighbourhood 65 Cameron J.: The Results of Science in the Development of Commerce — il Caouana caratta Pall Caretta atra ae ; 17 > caretta sce. iy A Carettochelys insculpta 2, 28 Bs insculptus 28 Catamola cannopis 60 of, fumerea 60 Chelodina expansa : 3 os lonvicollis .. GRE Bs nore @inewe. . ay PAB) bs oblonga 5 ous 3 Fe Tiebenrocki Shy 8}, 330) Chelone imbricata fe eon Col > mydas ae 20 Chelonia dussumieri hs oe ee » imbricata ss P mul > mydas aye een lilin 20 > marmorata is =. 20 Chelydra argillarum 11 so murehisoni .. Sp, ital a Terpentina .. eee ALO Chelymys Krefftii ae sa Gil - macquaria 25 Victorie 25, 31 C hilo ‘lativittalis 57 ,, ocellea ae se eG 5, ocelleus ne A 56 —VOLUME XIX, PAGE Chitra indica aS : Fa ae45) Citripestis sagittiferella. 50 Colpochelys anal See Conobathra automorpha me) 49 Coreyra cephalonica... 52 Cotachena aluensis oh a 09 “A histricalis .. Me 9 Crambus cuniferellus .. me 00 56 leptogrammellus yd) DO Crocodile, The Mstuarine ais 5 Crocodiles, The .. ont a Crocodilus johnsonii 2, 4, 5 ay porosus : 5D . palustris as i 0 Cryptoblabes adoceta.. See Ole bs dissolutella a5) Hail 5 euraphella Eye SOL oenobarella a at! Culladia admigratella .. em OO Curicta oppositalis ae 58 Dermochelys coriacea ES Devisia mythodes e 2, 35, LI Doloessa castanella fe oe OD Diadescia parodes the 2. 206 Diptychophora diargema Sa OU % ochracealis ween. Oe Diplopseustis perieresalis eu Dom Disease Garden, A we Lalit Education in Queensland Ree WS Elseya dentata .. ee aS Enimalocera longiramella oh? Aa Jmydosaurian and Testudinian Reptiles of New Guinea, Catalogue of ] Emys Macquaria 25 Emydura australis or ae “5 albertisit oe Soca) ad KKrefftil Baie ll latisternum .. 6% 3 mF, macquariz .. SD = macquaril Meee 55 novee-guineke .. sea 2 subglobosa .. nici eA Endotricha aglaspa st Saat OO, 4 caustopa .. ermoo FS dispurgens nL etats) se mesenterialis eh es 3 puncticostalis me. (Oo 33 pyrosalis .. 3S SRGTe Epicrocis sublignalis.. e= Ol Epipaschia cletolis oe a 16) us lygropa Br iene (62 Eretinochelys imbricata 3, 17, 2h Erythphlebia enervilla oe AB Eromene ocellea we oe INDEX-~-- Continued. PAGE Estuarine Crocodile, The 5 Etiella behri 52 _ melanella : 52 5 Walsinghan:ella 52 Eucailionyma 55 Eucampyla 44 Euchelys macropus 20 Euchelymys sulcifera 24 es subglobosa 26 Euchremius ocelleus 56 Euzophera thermochroa 46 Euzopherodes albicans 45 “ leptocosma 45 Fossifrontia leuconeurella 42 Gymnopus indicus "29 Harpagoneura hepialivora 54 Henderson, J. Brownlie : Education in Queensland v. Heosphora chlorogramma 4] ae euryzona 41 Heteromicta nigricostella 53 a ochraceela 53 Le pachytera 53 55 poeodes 54 Homoeosoma albocostalis Fi en far naria 44 = vagella 44 Hydraspis macquarii : res wae Hyphantidium albicostale 46, 47 a apodectum An hemibaphes 47 leucarmum 47 quadriguttellum +47 Hypoperyhia rufifasciella 48 Hypophana petalocosma 51 Hypsidia erythropsalis - 60 Hypolam prus marginepunctalis 39 5 leopardatus 40 subrosealis 40 Hypsotr opha chlorogramn a 41 25 euryzona 4] aS stereosticha 41 TIrvinebank, and its immediate neighbourhood, The Botany of 65 Lagoon, Description of a ‘typical Queensland 105 Lammoria oenochroa 55 Lamoria adeptella 55 5 pachylepidella 55 Luth, The 8 Macalla aeruginosa 60 es concisella 60 33 dochmoscia 6) mniarias 60 Macroclemys al Maliarpha minimella 42 Melissoblaptes cissinohaphes 90 3 hilaropis 53 “ homochroa 5S is sordidella 53 Ss unicolor 53 ” parasiticus 54 PAGE Meseiniadia infractalis 47 Mesopempta polyphoralis 4] Microsea marginepunctalis 39 % subrosealis 40 Myelois grossipunctella 48 Nephopteryx capnoessa 51 35 infractalis 47 3° nodicornella 50 euraphella 51 Nontark Hon. A. (M.L.C.): Notes of Travel 91 Nyctereutica ‘ 60 Ogilby, J. Douglas: Catalogue of Emydosaurian and ‘Testudinian Reptiles of New Guinea 1 Onvchochelys Kraussi 21 Ooplulis 2 4 Othaga mnesibrya 63 ss perenodes 63 Papua latilimbella 44 > longiramella 44 Parramatta 44 Paralipsa : x 53 Pelochelys e gntorid : 1.3529 i cantoris 29 Philas 4 Phycita auc =hmodes 50 a automorpha 49 op ceroprepiella 49 a corethropus 49 “0 eulepidella 49 Ae recondita 49 * sagittiferella . 49 Plants, common about Irvine bank, List of 70 Platemys novy® guinee 27 Poujadia erodella 43 56 infieita 44 55 opificella 43 Pound, C. J.: On Trypanosonia and their presence in the blood of Brisbane rats 33 Presidentia! Address : The Results of Science on the Development of Commerce . iil. Education in Guess: Vv. Pseudemydura um brina Ne ogee Ptyobathra hypolepidota 49 Pyralide and ‘Thyridide, A preliminary revision of the Australian 39 Pyralis semitessellaris 40 , bastialis 4] , manihotalis 59 », polygraphalis 4] poly phoralis 4] Rhodoneura. bastialis 4] = dissimulans 40 ~ dohertzi 40 ea elongata 40 INDEX—Continued. PAGE 5 furcifera 40 a loxomita 39 es melhilialis 4] a polygraphalis 4] BS scitaria 40 53 selmitessellata 40 3 stenosoma 40 5 Theorina 40 ypsilon 40 Salebria ceroprepiella 49 Sclerobia tritalis 52 Sedenia aspata 57 es cervalis 57 = leucopepla 57 a5 rupalis 57 Spatulipalpia dissolutella 51 = sophronica 51 Sphargio coriacea 8 Stenachroia myrmecophila 54 Stereobela leucomera 52 Strighina hyalospila 40 Syntypica aleurodes 45 Talis bivittella 58 ,, brunnea 58 ,, icelomorpha 90 ,, pedionoma - 90 Terrapin, The American Al- ligator ; 2 10 Terrapins, the Alligator : 9 and Enrydosaur- Testudinian ian Reptiles of New Guinea, Catalogue of, i Testudo coriacea : 8 7 caretta ae 17, 22 + imbricata 17,21 3 mydas 17,20 Thagora canstanella 53 Thalassochryels caretta 22 Thomson, John (M.B.)— A Disease Garden 3. Thyrididae and Pyralide: A preliminary revision of the Australian 39 Tirathaba acrocausta 54 SAE chlorosema 54 s parasitica o4 a rufivena 54 PAGE Titanoceros catanantha Bo” GO Tortoise, The Fly River ae). 28 i Cantor’s Soft- shelled. 29 53 Krefit’s Mud .. jee) Tortoises and Turtles, The ee 7 The Side-necked ae -» », Long-necked river.. 23 » New Guinea long- necked a Bi PPR} 57 vd mua, 24: 5 soft- shelled ey | Elephant .. se AE, Tra vel, Notes on Ee ae OL Trissonca capnoessa—.- ee Dh. = epiterpes ae e. 48 ianthemis nee 48 Trypanosoma and their presence on the blood of Brisbane rats, On : -- 33 Turner, A. Jefferis, M aie A Preliminary Revision of the Australian Te and Pyralida a2 39 Turtle, Bastard = ae ly » The green os, 20 F a Hawk’s Bill.. eee | ee ” Loggerheaded ee ge as , Leathery .. 9 # . New Guinea Snapping 11 Turtles, The By is Bt ab by Turtles and Tortoises, The Se | .. The Leathery xe on |S Tylochares cosmiella .. -. 48 - ianthemis =. 48 Ubida holomochla ots i 56 > vamostriella -. 320156 Unadilla apatelia Su -. 45 .. distichella a ae 5 Vitessa glaucoptera ae oy ae zalmira .. Se 2.) Se WwW asteneys, Hi; Description of a Tyee! Queens- land Lagoon - 105 Water, Methods of Beeriibeetrie Water Fit for a Town Supply 105 PROCEEDINGS ROYAL SOCIETY OF QA EadEIN ALIN DB: VOLUME XIX. PARE a4 PRINTED FOR THE SOCIETY BY H. Potz & Co., Printers, ExizaBeTH STREET, BrisBaNeE, 1905. ; at a try is pie rey. | at ¥ at i y 7 } | H he ; ¥ J ; fy) i} Re Z| yeaey) vase gt " C Te ee i Te trad DL 2 t-* : om ni peretves A j UAE. x eo hile po ap ER: ae: ot Rd ABSs EI sh Ropal Society of Queensland. OFFICERS, 1905. President: J. BROWNLIE HENDERSON, F.I.C, F.C.S. Vice-President: B. DUNSTAN, F.G.S. Hon. Treasurer : HON. A. NORTON, M.L.C. Hon. Secretary : J. F. BAILEY. Hon. Librarian: ROWLAND ILLIDGE. Members of Council: W. J. BYRAM. Cc. J. POUND, F.R.M.S. JOHN CAMERON, M.L.a. JOHN SHIRLEY, B.Sc. A. JEFFERIS TURNER, M.D. Trustees: Hon. A. NORTON, M.L.C. JOHN CAMERON, M.L.A. Hon. Auditor: GEORGE WATKINS. Hon. Lanternist: A. G. JACKSON, A.1.E.E. CONTENTS. CATALOGUE OF THE EMYDOSAURIAN AND TESTUDINIAN REPTILES OF NEW GUINEA —J. Douglas Ogilby, April 28rd, 1904 ON TRYPANOSOMA AND THEIR PRESENCE IN THE BLOOD OF BRISBANE RATS.— C. J. Pound, F'.R.M.S., September 3rd., 1904 ... A PRELIMINARY REVISION OF THE AUS- TRALIAN THYRIDIDAE AND PYRALIDAE (Part II).—A. Jefferis Turner, M.D., F.E.S., January 2nd., 1905 =a THE BOTANY OF IRVINEBANK AND ITS IMMEDIATE NEIGHBOURHOOD.—F. Ben- nett, November 19th, 1904.... PRESIDENTIAL ADDRESS PAGE 33 39) 65 CATALOGUK OF THE EMYDOSAURIAN AND TESTUDINIAN REPTILES OF NEW GUINEA. By J. DOUGLAS OGILBY. Read before the Royal Society of Queensland 23rd April, 1904. ArrHouen the diagnosis of a recent chelydroid tortoise, here for the first time described from a species indigenous to the eastern hemisphere. was primarily intended to be the full aim of this paper, and naturally is still its chief consideration, it has occurred to me that an analytical list of all the species at present known to inhabit New Guinea, written in a concise and intelligible form, would be of great advantage to zoologists and collectors in that country, where the opportunities of consulting works of reference are few and far between. A secondary object which I have in view in so greatly enlarging the scope of this paper is to stimulate local observation and encourage explorers and others—traders, miners, etc.— whose occupations bring them in touch with the inland dis- tricts, to make more careful inquiries concerning the testudinian fauna and more extensive collections of the various species, most of which are known to science from a few specimens only.* I would especially draw their attention to the two *The testudinian reptiles lend themselves beyond all other chordates to amateur collecting, since, though the entire animal is necessarily more valuable to the scientific student, the easily preserved shell {carapace and. plastron) is the most important factor in the differentiation of species. A 2 EMYDOSAURIAN AND TESTUDINIAN REPTILES large fresh water tortoises discovered in the Fly River by that indefatigable explorer, Sir William Macgregor, during his term of office as Lieutenant-Governor of British New Guinea. Of the first of these, Carettochelys insculpta, Ramsay (see p, 28), only the typical specimen and two imperfect skulls are known, while the second is represented by a single example in the collection of the Queensland Museum, described (see p. 11) below as Devisia mythodes. From the large size and remarkable appearance of these two species it is impossible but that they are well known to the natives ; and if they are, as from their apparent rarity seems probable, decadent forms, jt is all the more vitally necessary that the sum of the know- ledge possessed by the natives, both recent and legendary, of their habits, breeding, food, and other points of their domes- tic economy, should be collected and collated with the least possible delay. New Guinea has always been noted for the beauty, wealth, and singularity of its avifauna, and as far as my experience goes the fresh water fauna—reptilian batrachian, and ichthyic—is equally imteresting and remark- able. I am firmly of opinion that in these branches of zoo- logical science there lies in Papua a rich and prolific field of research as yet unexplored or merely touched. Before proceeding to the discussion of the various genera and species it will be interesting to contrast in parallel columns the forms which are respectively indigenous to Australia and Papua. The species which are preceded by an asterisk (*) are desiderata in the Queensland Museum. AUSTRALIAN, PApuan. Order J. Emydosauria. Familv Crocodilide. CROCODILUS. 1. Crocodilus johnstonii. Dy porosus. 1. Crocodilus porosus. Order II. Testudinata. Family [. Sphargidide. T. DERMOCHELYS. ” 1. Dernochelys coriacea. 1. Dermochelys corvacea. Family IJ, Chelydride. I]. Devista. 2. Devisia mythodes. Family IIL. Cheloniidee IIT. CrHenonta. 2. Chelonia mydas. 3. Chelonia mydas. BY J. DOUGLAS OGILBY. 2) IV. ER&ErMOcHELYS. pow) . Eretmochelys imbricata. 4. Bretmochelys imbricata. V. CARETTA. 4. Caretta caretta. 5. Caretta caretta. Family IV. Chelyide. VI. CHELODINA. . Chelodina longicollis. *6§. Chelodina nove-guince. 7s ‘ siebenrocki. Cr ¥*6. exrpansa. Se oblonga. VIT. J SEUDEMYDURA., *8, Pseudemydura umbrina. VIII. Emyovura. 9. Emydura macquarvi. 8. Emydura macquary. 10. 3 krefftit. 9: x krefftit. *1O: 55 albertisii. me ~ subglobosa. 1M. oo australis. 12. Ba latisternum. =] 2. . ) nove-quinee. IX. Eusrya. 13. Elseya dentata. Family V. Carettochelyide. X. CARETTOCHELYS. *13. Carettochelys inscul pta. Family VI. Trionychide. XI. PELOCHELYS. *14. Pelochelys cantorii. A glance over the right hand column will show that five species have been added to the list of Papuan tortoises since the publication in 1889 of the British Museum Catalogue of Chelonians ; these are the new chelydrid Devisia mythodes, the three chelyids Chelodina siebenrocki, Emydura mac- quarii, and Emydura krefftii, and the trionychid Pelochelys cantorii. It will also be seen that at the present time the number of species known to inhabit these two geographical areas is equal; all the indications, however, poimt tc an ultimate preponderance of species in the Papuan subregion, when that subregion shall have been thoroughly explored, over its more extensive southern neighbour. For instance the discoveries in the Fly River country of Hmydura mac- quarii, a typical tortoise of the southern districts of Australia, and in Dutch New Guinea of Emydura krefftii, a typical Queensland form, suggest the probability of such North Aus- tralian species as Chelodina expansa, Chelodina oblonga, Emydura 4 EMYDOSAURIAN ANI) TESTUDINIAN REPTILES latisternum, and Elseya dentata being also natives of the depend- ency ; furthermore no part of the subregion, except that under British rule, has been more than superficially examined, and even that portion by no means thoroughly. ORDER I. EMYDOSAURIA. THE CROCODILES. Body lacertiform, depressed, protected by regular series of quadrangular horny scutes of varying size. Teeth present in the jaws, implanted in distinct sockets. Sternum present. (€uvs, a fresh water tortoise ; cavpa, a lizard.) Family CROCODILID2. Nostrils opening at the extremity of the snout. Pupil vertical. Ears with mobile lds. Fore limb with five, hind limb with four well developed digits, the three inner clawed. Fresh waters of tropical and subtropical regions, at least one species entering the sea. Genera six. Genus CROCODILUS. THE TRUE CROCODILES. Crocodilus, Laurenti, Synops. Rept., p. 53, 1768 (niloticus): Boulenger, Catal. Chelon., etc., p. 277, 1889. Oiphilis, Gray, Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist., (3) x. 1862, p. 267 (porosus), Bombifrons, Gray, \.c., p. 269 (trigonops=palustris). Philas, Gray, Proc. Zool. Soc., 1874, p. 177 (johnstonii). Snout more or less elongate. Seventeen to nineteen upper and fifteen lower teeth on each side; fifth maxillary tooth largest ; fourth mandibular tooth usually fitting into. a notch in the upper jaw* ; mandibular symphysis not extend- ing beyond the eighth tooth. A dorsal shield formed of four or more longitudinal series of juxtaposed, keeled, bony scutes. (xpoxddeAos, the name of the crocodile of the Nile among the Ionians.) Northern Australia, Western Polynesia, Southern Asia, Africa, and the warmer parts of America. Only one species of crocodile has as yet been proved to- inhabit New Guinea, but since two others—Crocodilus john- stonii, Krefft, from the northern half of Australia, and *Specimens of Crocodilus palustris sometimes occur in which this tooth. fits into a pit as in Alligator. BY J. DOUGLAS OGILBY. 5 Crocodilus palustris, Lesson, from the Malay Archipelago westward to the Indian peninsula—may occur there, I have included them in the following synopsis. a. Snout very slender, the width of its base about 4 of its length, without distinct ridges; dorsal shield subcontinuous with the nuchal; limb-scales keeled 1. johnstonit- aa. Snout wide and rather short; dorsal shield well separated from the nuchal b. Width of snout at base 2 to $ of its length; a longi- tudinal ridge in front of the eye; limb-scales smooth or nearly so .. .. 2. porosus. bb. Width of snout at base } to 3 oe its iepattis ; no pre- orbital ridge ; limb- Wikies keeled sc .. 3. palustris. CROCODILUS POROSUS. Crocodilus porosus, Schneider, Hist. Amph., ii. p. 159, 1801: Boulenger, Catal. Chelon., etc., p. 284, 1889. Crocodilus pondicerianus, Giinther, Rept. Brit. Ind., p. 62, pl. vii, 1864, Pondicherry. THE ESTUARINE CROCODILE. Head rough, about twice as long as wide at the base, with a more or less strong ridge on each side in front of the eye, the pair slightly converging anteriorly ; mandibular symphysis extending to the fifth tooth. Four large nucha scutes forming a square, with one or two smaller ones on each side ; postoccipital scutes usually absent. Dorsal shield formed of sixteen or seventeen transverse and four to eight longitudinal series of scutes. Limbs smooth or nearly so, Adult dark olive above ; young pale olive, with large dark spots on the body and tail and dots on the head, (porosus, pitted.) Length to 25 feet. A skull in the South Kensington Museum belonged to an individual said to have been no less than 33 feet in length; it was obtained at Bawisaul in the Bengal Presidency in 1840. Distribution :—From India, Ceylon, and southern China through Malaysia to North Australia, New Guinea, the Solomon and Fiji Islands. This crocodile habitually enters salt water and is often seen at a considerable distance from the shore. In addition to being the largest it is also as might be expected, one of the most dangerous of all the crocodiles, freely attacking human beings. 6 EMYDOSAURIAN AND TESTUDINIAN REPTILES Note :—In my paper on “‘ Australian Crocodiles ” published in the Society’s “‘ Proceedings” for the current year,* I make mention, when referring to the size to which this species attains, of a well authenticated example, captured in the Bengal Presidency, “‘ which measured no less than thirty-three feet.” (p. 208.) That this exceptional size may, perhaps, in some rare instances be approximated in our own waters, the following statement, which is vouched for by a gentleman in whose integrity I place the most implicit con- fidence, would seem to show. He assures me that he has on several occasions heard from the lips of an old identity of the Mackay district, who had had from forty to fifty years’ experience in the middle and northern zones of the State, the story of the death of a crocodile, shot on the Pioneer River, which, when brought ashore, was found to measure thirty-two feet; even allowing for a little exaggeration this individual must have been greatly above the average of the Queensland type, which would barely if at all exceed the half of that length. My informant indeed states that of the scores of “alligators” which he has caught or seen caught, not one exceeded eighteen feet in length. Personally I have seen a mounted specimen that measured twenty-three feet. As indicative of the strength and ferocity possessed by these reptiles and the indomitable tenacity of purpose by which they are animated, the following anecdote, related to me by the same gentleman from his personal experience, should be of absorbing interest. It appears that he had the rare good fortune of being an eye-witness, at within but a few yards’ distance, of one of those nameless and unnoted tragedies, which are doubtless of frequent occurrence in the ceaseless drama for ever unfolding itself amid the pregnant solitudes of our vast northern wilderness—a duel 4 outrance between a full-grown bull and one of these reptiles about six- teen feet long—between the lord of the forest and pasture and the lord of the river and lagune. His story was that while he and some friends were fishing in the Pioneer River, some miles above Mackay, a bull came down to drink within a short distance of the place where they were sitting ; while in the act of quenching its thirst the crocodile seized it by the *Proc. Roy. Soc. Queensland, XVIII., 1904, pp. 208 et seg. BY J. DOUGLAS OGILBY. 7 snout, and then began one of the most awful struggles for supremacy between beast and reptile, which it is possible for the mind of man to conceive. At the outset the bull by sheer strength dragged its adversary from the water, but failed utter- ly in its attempt to shake off the tenacious grip of its stub- born foe; meanwhile, however, the agonized bellowings of the tortured brute had brought to its assistance all the cattle in the neighbourhood ; these at once intrepidly attacked the common enemy, but without in the slightest degree causing it to relax its hold upon its helpless victim. So the terrible struggle raged backwards and forwards for a full half hour, until at length another bull by chance struck the crocodile under the forearm, and the horn entering deeply, enabled it to toss the reptile, which in falling broke its back, and was easily despatched by the infuriated cattle. By this time, however, as may be supposed, very little of the face of the victimized bull remained, and as it had also one of its fore legs broken, the poor suffering brute had to be killed. As- suredly such a Homeric struggle must have been worth going a long way to witness; beside its tragedy how pitiful and degrading appears the tinsel pomp of the arena! Mr. Milroy, to whom I am indebted for the above graphic description, believes that if they had been left alone to fight out their battle, victory would ultimately have declared itself on the side of the reptile. For further information regarding its, habits, breeding, ete., see my paper on * Australian Crocodiles ”’ above referred to. Orper II. TESTUDINATA.* THE TORTOISES AND TURTLES. Body more or less fully encased in a bony shell, which consists of an upper piece, the carapace, and a lower, the plastron. Jaws without teeth, covered with a horny sheath so as to form a entting edge. Sternum wanting. (T'estudo, gen. testudinis, a tortoise.) *I would greatly have preferred using the title Chelonia for this order of reptiles, but since that name properly belongs to the genus of which the green turtle is the tyre, it is inadmissable as an ordinal name. 8 EMYDOSAURIAN AND TESTUDINIAN REPTILES SUBORDER I. ATHEC. Vertebre and ribs free, separated from a bony exo- skeleton. Skull without descending processes of the parietal bones. —Boulenger—(a, priv. ; @yxyn, a box.) Family A. SPHARGIDID.* THe LEATHERY TURTLES. Shell without epidermal shields, the exoskeleton consist- ing of numerous small bony plates arranged like mosaic. Limbs paddle-shaped and clawless, the phalanges without condyles. Marine. Monotypic. Genus 1. DERMOCHELYS. Dermochelys, Blainville, Journ. Phys., Ixxxiii. 1816, p. 259 (cortacea) ; Boulenger, Catal. Chelon., p. 7, 1889. Sphargis, Merrem, Tent., p. 19, 1829 (mercurialis=cortacea). Dorsal shield completely, ventral incompletely ossified in the adult, the former with seven, the latter with five keels. Head covered with smal] shields. Upper jaw anteriorly with two triangular cusps situated between three deep notches ; lower jaw with a single cusp, which fits in between the upper pair, when the mouth is closed. (d€pya, skin; xXéAus, a tortoise.) All tropical seas. 1. DERMOCHELYS CORIACEA. | Testudo coriacea, Linneus, Syst. Nat., i. p. 350. 1766. Sphargis coriacea, Gray, Synops. Rept., i. p. 51, 1731: McCoy, Prodr. Zool. Vict., ii. dec. 11, pl. ci, 1885. Dermochelys coriacea, Boulenger, Catal. Chelon., p. 10, 1889. THE LOUTH. Carapace broad in front, acutely pointed behind. Fore limbs narrow and falcate, as long as the dorsal shield in the young, shorter in the adult ; hind limbs short and truncated. Dark brown to purplish black above, uniform or spotted with yellow ; under surface of limbs and sometimes of throat pinkish or yellowish. (coriacea, leathery.) *The Century Dictionary derives the generic name Sphargis from the latin Sphargis (gen. Sphargidis) ; if this be correct the family name should be Sphargidide. The word, however, is constructed more on a Greek than a Latin model, but no such word occurs in the dictionaries of either language to which I have access. BY J. DOUGLAS OGILBY. 9 Length to at least 8-feet. (Nine feet fide McCoy.) The mounted example in the Queensland Museum measures 7 feet 8 inches. Although typically belonging to the fauna of the tropics this turtle straggles far into temperate seas; it has been recorded from both sides of the English Channel, from the Cape of Good Hope, etc., and nearer home from the coasts of Victoria and New Zealand. The specific name and the colloquial names “‘ Leathery Turtle ” or “ Leather-back ” have been given to this species because the body is covered with a thick leathery skin which completely envelopes the bony exoskeleton. Its food consists principally of fishes, mollusks, and crustaceans. The flesh of this turtle is not eaten. Sup-orDER II. THECOPHORA. Dorsai vertebre and ribs immovably united and expanded into bony plates forming a carapace. Parietals prolonged downwards. forming a suture with the pterygoids or separated from the latter by the interposition of the epipterygoid— Boulenge:—. (@yjxy a box ; dopéw, I carry.) Superfamily a. CRYPTODIRA. Neck bending by a sigmoid curve in a vertical plane. Pelvis not ankylosed to the carapace and plastron. Digits with not more than three phalanges. A complete series of marginal bones connected with the ribs. (xpumros, hidden ; Seon, neck.) Family B. CHELYDRID®. THE ALLIGATOR TERRAPINS. Shell covered with epidermal horny shields ; carapace comparatively small, with serrated posterior border ; plastron small and cruciform; pectoral shields widely separated from the marginals ; abdominal shields not in contact on the median line, separated from the marginals, which are twenty- three in number, by a series of inframarginals. Chin with one or more pair of small dermal appendages. Digits moderately elongate, webbed; phalanges with condyles; claws four’ Tail long, crested above. Fluviatile and palustrine. (xéAvs, a tortoise ; vdpa, a water-snake.) North America, east of Rocky Mountains, ranging southward into Ecuador ; New Guinea; ? Australia. 10 EMYDOSAURIAN AND TESTUDINIAN REPTILES The discovery of a fresh-water tortoise, referable to a family which has hitherto been regarded as exclusively con- fined to the northern and middle portion of the American continent, in an island so far removed from its present centre of distribution, is most remarkable, and cannot fail to be of great interest to all herpetologists. With regard to the geographicial distribution of the family it is noteworthy that the common American Alligator Terrapin (Chelydra serpentina) ranges southward to Ecuador,* which State les within about the same parallels of latitude as New Guinea. North America being now the acknowledged metropolis of the chelydrids, it is interesting to consider by what route’ this neogean family travelled round to south- eastern New Guinea; and since it has never, so far as I am aware, been suggested that there was, at any bygone era of the earth’s existence, land communication betwen Papuasia and the north-eastern regions of South America, similar to that which at two distinct periods undoubtedly existed between south-western America, south-eastern Australia, and South Africa, the conclusion is irresistibly forced upon us that the migration, if migration there were, must have been through eastern Asia, though even here we are confronted with the problem of its passage from island to island. Al- ternatively it may be held that the Old World was the original birthplace of the chelydrids, from whence they spread to the New World, and there, having multiplied under the favourable conditions of huge marshes and rivers and a scanty and nomadic population, exist in numbers even to the presert day though practically annihilated elsewhere. And this again gives rise to another interesting speculation—whether similar or closely related genera may not still survive in the great marshes and river systems of the interior of the Chinese Empire, a vast territory the biology of which is but little understood. This is of course purely conjectural, but many important discoveries have had their origin in as small a basis of fact, and this suggestion may also be worth investiga- tion. But we cannot dismiss the subject of distribution without some inquiry into the extinct forms. Like the recent *It is also worth mentioning that Mr. Boulenger has recently described from Mount Victoria, New Guinea, a frog whose only congener is an indigene of Eeuador. .BY J. DOUGLAS OGILB). 11k species these are few in number, two or at most three having been recognised. Two of these which have been unhesi- tatingly referred to the genus Chelydra* belong to the Tertiary formations of Central Europe, while the third,f about the authenticity of which there is some doubt, the plastron being still unknown, comes from the Tertiary of Washington Territory. Genus IJ. DEvisra, gen. nov. Orbit lateral. No supramarginal shields. Tail with irregular shields of variable size inferiorly.f (Named _ for Charles Walter de Vis, Director of the Queensland Museum, and author of many valuable papers on Australian zoology and paleontology.) New Guinea; ? Queensland. 2. DEVISIA MYTHODES, sp. nov.§ THE NEw GUINEA SNAPPING TURTLE. Head large and triangular, depressed, with two pair of parietal ridges, the inner pair converging and uniting to form a prominent point in the middle of the posterior border of the occiput ; the outer pair parallel, each terminating in a point, which is situated further back than the mesial point. Diameter of orbit equal to the length of the snout and to the width of the concave interorbital space, and two thirds of the length of the mandibular symphysis. Nostrils small and _ circular, pierced in a single depressed vertical plate, which is wider than deep, is bordered on the sides and below by the maxillary sheath, and above by two small supranasal shields ; a pair of large preoculars meeting on the median line, as also do the *Chelydra murchisoni : Miocene Rocks of Baden, and Chelydra argidiarum, Laube, Abhand]. Verein. Totos, ii. 1900, p. 47, pl. ii. fig. 7. Brown Coal of Bavaria. + Acherontemys heckmant, Hay, Proc. U.is. Nat. Mus., xxii. 1899, p. 238, pl. vi. Miocene of Washington Territory. tOwing to the taxidermist having opened the lower surface instead of one of the sides of the tail when mounting the specimen, it is difficult to see the exact arrangement of the lepidosis, but to all appearance it is as described above. In any case it approaches in this character nearer to Macroclemys than to Chelydra, between which it appears to form a con- necting !ink, possessing characters otherwise confined to one or the other genus. §The species is remarkable as being the on!y cryptodirous tortoise as yet discovered in the Australasian region. 12 EMYDOSAURIAN AND TESTUDINIAN. REPTILES supraoculars ; a single postocular on each side ; frontal shield strongly rugose, sublanceolate, its point wedged between the convergent parietal ridges ; parietal shields broken up into numerous squamiform plates, the largest of which form a series along the external slope of the inner ridge ; temporal shields two, the lower lateral and very large, the upper superior and much smaller. Cleft of mouth a little less than half the length of the head, the postrictal groove half the length of the lower jaw. A pair of small mental barbels. Neck wrinkled and vermiculated, 12 time the length of the head, the anterior half with a few scattered erect tubercles above. Carapace ovate, its greatest width above the inguinal region ; its longitudinal diameter rather gently arched to the last vertebral shield, the posterior portion of which bends abruptly downwards to join the horizontal supracaudals ; its transverse diameter is strongly arched laterally, depressed and almost flattened mesially ; anteriorly it is feebly emargin- ate, the outer borders of the nuchal and margino-nuchal shields forming together a scarcely perceptible incurvature ; posteriorly it is rather weakly serrated.* Nuchal shield crescentic, its anterior border expanded laterally in front of the margino-nuchals as narrow spiniform processes, the width between the posterior angles 33 times its mesial length. Inner border of margino-nuchal 1} time the outer border and 24 times the greatest width ;—of first margino-brachial + of the outer and a little more than twice the width ; of second subequal to and more than thrice ;—of first-margino-lateral a little less than outer and 2? times the width, of second } Jess than and 1? time, of third a little less than and 14 time, of fourth a little more than and 1} time, of fifth subequal to and 1? time :—of first margino-femoral % less than the outer and 14 time the width, of second + less and 14 time, of third a little less and a little more ; supracaudals pentagonal, strongly angulated posteriorly, the suture between them reduced to a blunt point ; all the other marginal shields are quadrilateral, with the exception of the second and fourth marginolaterals and the first marginofemoral which are pentagonal, being angulated on their inner facies at their junction with the intercostal sutures. First vertebral shield tetragonal, with *In comparison with the figures given by Duméril and Bibron and Lydekker. BY J. DOUGLAS OGILBY. 13 its anterior border feebly emarginate, its lateral and posterior borders and all the angles broadly rounded, prominently arched behind, and like all the marginal shields, smooth ; its mesial length is 7 of its greatest width, which is a little behind the middle of the shield: second vertebral shield similarly shaped, but with the posterior border straighter and mesially emarginate, smooth, with two low wide convergent ridges running from the first costal sulture to the emargination, immediately in front of which the ridges are highest and bear a few coarse striz ; between the bases of the ridges the shield is markedly depressed, and there is a narrow border of fine strize at the front and sides ; its mesial !ength is 2 of its greatest width, whichisat the intersection of the first and second costals : third vertebra! shield similar in size and shape to the second, but with the basai depression vestigial and crossed by broad transverse strie, which beyond the ridges become longitudinal : fourth much smaller, but with the posterior knob stronger, and a median groove anteriorly, otherwise as third; its mesial length % of its width at the junction of the third and fourth costals : fifth vertebral shield pentagonal, the anterior border straight, the outer borders sigmoidal, the posterior borders emarginate and meeting at a moderately obtuse angle, which almost separates the supracaudals ; the prominence is a little behind the middle of the shield, and is well developed ; from its front margin two shallow divergent grooves extend forwards to the outer ends of the anterior border ; its mesial length 3 of its greatest width at the inter- section of the fourth costal and third marginofemoral shields. First costal shield triangular, with the outer border arcuate, the upper concave in front straight behind, and the posterior straight, smooth, with scarcely a trace of prominence at the. postero-superior angle; its greatest length % of its depth: second costal largest, tetragonal, with the outside border undulating. the upper feebly convex, and the laterals straight ; the postero-superior angle is somewhat prominent and strongly rugose, the prominence curving downwards to the middle of the lower border as a low wide ridge, the anterior slope of which is much more gentle than the posterior ; the anterior and outer borders have a narrow marginal band of fine strie, inside which are a few very faint coarser striz ; its width 2 of its depth: third costal similar to the second, but with the 14 EMYDOSAURIAN AND TESTUDINIAN REPTILES prominence more accentuated—though not even here rising above the level of the vertebrals—and the coarser vertical strie much more pronounced; its width 4 of its depth: fourth costal pentagonal, owing to the acutely angular point which projects backwards and is inserted for some distance between the fifth vertebral and third marginofemoral shields ; the knob is prominent, but small, and is situated some distance below the upper angle ; the striz are moderately developed ; its length is 3 of its depth. > each with the outer border strongly convex, the posterior concave, and the basal width rather less than the length ; humeral shield tetragonal, with the outer border feebly, the anterior strongly convex, the posterior irregularly concave, its greatest width 4 of its length ; from the outer front margin of the median vacuity a deep narrow groove extends outwards and backwards, and, crossing the humero-pectoral suture, is lost near the middle of the outer border of the pectoral | shield : pectoral shield subtetragonal, the outer border slightly concave, the posterior widely angulated, its greatest width near the posterior border equal to its length on the median line : abdominal shield hexagonal, the anterior and posterior borders concave ; inner borders straight, forming together a rectangle, the anterior limb of which is twice as long as the posterior : outer borders also meeting at a right angle, the anterior limb strongly concave and 1? time the length of the posterior, which is sigmoidal : width of bridge 144 in length of plastron: anterior inframarginal shield half-moon Plastron smooth ; gular shields small and triangular ; shaped, its length twice its median width: posterior infra- marginal much larger, triagonal, the anterior border convex, the posterior concave, its greatest width 4 of its length : femoral shield pentagonal, a little wider anteriorly than long : anal shield acutely triangular, its width 2 of its length. Upper surface of fore limbs anteriorly with several series of narrow elongate scale-like plates arranged obliquely ; outer edge with three large free foliaceous tubercles, below which are a pair of large flat unguiform plates ; lower surface finely reticulate, with scattered scale-like tubercles of various sizes ; upper surface posteriorly rugose, with small round tubercles ; claws very strong and curved, especially the three inner, the middle one of which is the longest, as long as the space BY J. DOUGLAS OGILBY. 15 between the tip of the snout and the posterior border of the orbit. Hind limbs similar, but without the three latera] tubercles, and with an additional stout, horn-like plate at the base of the outer toe. Tail rugose, with fine vermiculations between ; its upper surface with seven stout dermal serrz, which are preceded by two, and succeeded by several finer graduated serre ; sides with isolated scale-like plates; lower surface covered with scales of irregular shape and size. MEASUREMENTS IN MILLIMETRES. Total length ae ai Ee Js a3 “is 860 Length of head mesially .. xe ac 3 5. 90 Length of snout .. they were collected by Signor D’ Albertis. 10. EMYDURA SUBGLBOSA. Euchelymys subglobosa, Krefit, Ann. Mus. Genov., viii. 1876, p. 390,. Naiahui; Peters and Doria, Ann. Mus. Genov., xiii. 1878, p. 328. Emydura subglobosa, Boulenger, Ann. Mus. Gencv., (2) vi. 1888, p. 450+ and Catal. Chelon., p. 232, 1889. ; Hump-BACKED Mup ToRTOISE. Carapace very convex, not or but feebly serrated post- eriorly, rugose, with a linear vertebral groove ; intergular shield large, a little longer than wide, much larger than the gulars. Carapace brown ; plastron yellow ; soft parts brown ; a yellow band from the end of the snout to above the ear, passing through the eye; a yellow band on the upper jaw and another on the lower. (Subglobosa, nearly spherical.) Length of carapace to 94 inches. South-eastern New Guinea. Type in the Genoa Museum of Natural History ; collected by D’Albertis on the Amama River. BY J. DOUGLAS OGILBY. 27 The Queensland Museum possesses a fine pair of this tortoise, presented by Anthony Musgrave, Esq., who obtained them in the vicinity of Port Moresby. In one of these the nuchal shield is present. in the other absent. ll. EMYDURA NOVA-GUINES. Platemys novee-quinee, Meyer, Mon. Berl. Ac., 1874, p. 128, Passim. Emydwra nove-guinee, Boulenger, Ann. Mus. Genoy., (2) vi. 1888, p. 450; and Catal. Chelon., p. 233, 1889. BLACK-SPOTTED Mup TormTorse. Carapace depressed, serrated posteriorly, keeled, and slightly rugose. Intergular shield very narrow, thrice as long as wide. much smaller than the gulars. Carapace brown; plastron yellowish; soft parts brown; a_ small blackish spot on each vertebra] and costal shield. Length of carapace in type 5 3-5 inches. New Guinea ({Passim, Meyer; Katow, D’Albertis. Superfamily y. | TRIONYCHOIDEA. THE SOFT-SHELL TORTOISES. Neck bending by a sigmoid curve in a vertical plane. Pelvis not ankyvlosed to the carapace and plastron. Fourth digit with four or more phalanges. Marginal bones absent or forming an incomplete series, not connected with the ribs. (T'rionyx ——— from ‘pets, three and ovv€, gen ovuyos, a claw—the typical genus ; éd0s, resemblance.) Family E. CARETTOCHELYID. THe TurTLE TorRrTo!rsEs. Shell without epidermal shields. Neck not retractile. Limbs paddle-shaped ; digits much elongate ; only the inner two clawed. Monotypic. In the British Museum Catalogue of Chelonians (1889) this family is placed at the end of the Pleurodira and therefore next to the Trionychoidea. In the following year, however: Dr. Baur (American Naturalist, xxii, 1890, p. 1017) expressed his doubts as to the correctness of this position; and sub- sequently (op. cit., xxv, 1891, pp. 631, 639, and Science, xvi. 1891, p. 190) gave it as his opinion that the Carettochely- ide were probably very close to the ancestors of the T'riony- choidea. From an examination of the photographs of the 28 EMYDOSAURIAN AND TESTUDINIAN REPTILES ce skull he considers (Science, loc. cit.) Carettochelys to be “ an ancestral form of the T'rionychia, which still preserves the peripheral bones, and which has the carapace and plastron completely closed.” He concludes—* Carettochelys cannot be placed in any group of living tortoises ; it has to be con- sidered as the representative of a peculiar gronp ancestral to the Trionychia, and in relation probably to the Amphichelydia. This group I propose to call Carettochelydes.” Nothing further was learnt about this species until 1898 (Proc. Zod]. Soc., p. 851), when Boulenger exhibited, at a meeting of the London ZoGlogical Society, a dancing- stick from Dameracura, mouth of the Fly River, New Guinea, to which two imperfect skulls of Carettochelys were attached as ornaments or charms. As Boulenger considered that these ‘“‘ specimens confirmed the account given by Baur in 1891] ” I have removed the family from the Pleurodira and placed it among the Trionychoidea. The above is all that is known of this remarkable tortoise, and in view of the extraordinary interest which attaches to it, it 1s to be hoped that the naturalists of New Guinea will shortly find means to collect other specimens both of adults and young, and put us in possession of some authentic data both as to its habits and mode of life. Genus VII. CARETTOCHELYS. Carettochelys, Ramsay, Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S. Wales, xi. 1886, p. 158 (insculpta): Boulenger, Catal. Cheion., p. 236, 1889. “Six neural plates, all separated from one another by the costals, which meet on the median line ’—Boulenger. (Caretta, a turtle ; xéAvs, a tortoise.) New Guinea. 12. CARETTOCHELYS INSCULPTA. Carettochelys insculptus, Ramsay, Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S. Wales, xi. 1886, p. 158, pls. iii-vi, Fly River. Carettochelys inscul sta, Boulenger, Catal. Chelon, p. 236, 1889. Tue Fry River ToRTOISE. ‘““Carapace subcordiform, elevated and rounded in front, laterally flattened behind and strongly keeled, sides shelving, with the marginal plates expanding, densely rugose. Twenty-one marginals (including the pygo-marginal). The whole of the plates of the carapace and plastron are covered with small, round, raised rugations or wavy irregular raised BY J. DOUGLAS OGILBY. 29: lines between shallow sculptures ; towards the lower borders. on the sides these take an elongated form sometimes parallel to the sutures. Head large, with five to seven shields, the anterior and median pairs coalesced, lower jaw strong. An- terior margin of forelegs covered with from seven to ten narrow, band-like, unequal shields. ‘Tail short, with from fourteen to sixteen narrow curved shields on the upper surface” —Boulenger. (insculpta, engraved.) Length of carapace 18 inches. Fly River. Tvpe in the Australian Museum, Sydney. Family F. TRIONYCHID. THE EnerpHant TorTO!sEsS. Shell without epidermal shields. Jaws concealed under fleshy lips; snout ending in a proboscis. Head and neck completely retractile. Ear hidden. Only the three inner digits clawed.—Boulenger. (7px, three ; dvv€, a claw.) Rivers of Africa, Asia, New Guinea, and North America. Genus VIII. PELOCHELYS. Pelochelys, Gray, Proc. Zool. Soc., 1864, p. 89 (cantoriz) ; Boulenger, Catal. Chelon., p. 262, 1889. Jaws weak. Orbit nearer the nasal than the temporal fossa; bony choanz between the orbits; postorbital arch as wide as the diameter of the orbit. (7mAds, clay, mud; xeAvs, a tortoise.) Eastern India to New Guinea. 13. PELOCHELYS CANTORII. Chitra indica, part., Gray, Catal, Tort., p. 49, 1844 ; Giinther, Pept. Brit. Ind., p. 59, pl. vi. 1896; fig, C, L864. Gymnopus indicus, Cantor, Catal, Malay, Rept’, p. 10, 1847. Pelochelys cantorii, Gray, Proc. Zodl, Soc. 1864, p. 90, Malacea ; Lydekker, Roy. Nat. Hist., v. p. 100, fig., 1896. Pelochelys cantoris. Boulenger, Catal. Chelon., p. 263, 1889; Waite, Rec. Austr. Mus. v. 1903, p. 50. CANTOR’S SOFT-SHELL TORTOISE. Costal plates in eight pairs, the last well developed and forming a median suture; a single neural between the first pair of costals; plates coarsely pitted and vermiculate. Head moderate ; snout short and broad ; proboscis very short; interorbital space broader than the greatest diameter of the 30 EMYDOSAURIAN AND TESTUDINIAN REPTILES orbit ; mandible narrowest at the symphysis.. Olive above, uniform or spotted with darker. Length of carapace 24 inches. Laloki River, B.N.G.; Philippines: Borneo; Malay Peninsula; Burma; Gange-. Type in the South Kensington Museum. APPENDIX. On an earlier page of the present paper I referred to the species described below, and remarked that I only knew of its existence through the medium of the ** Zodlogical Record ” for 1901; since then, I have, however, received a complimentary copy of the paper in which it is described, from its author, to whom I take this opportunity of returning my grateful thanks, By his courtesy I am not only able to add to the description of this new species, but also to add Emydura Kreffii to the fauna, and so complete the list of New Guinea chelonians to date. Appended is a translation of Dr. Werner’s original description. CHELODINA SIEBENROCKI. Chelodina. sicbenrocki, Werner, Verh. z06l].-hot. Ges. Wien, 1901, p. 602, Dutch New Guinea. Intergular shield 14 time as long as the suture between the pectorals, twice as long as wide. Plastron somewhat less than twice as long as wide. Pectoral shields much longer than any single median suture of the plastron, 14 time as long as the femoral suture, and 24 times as long as that of the abdominals : anal suture somewhat shorter than the femoral shield. Head very long. nearly twice as long as wide, little shorter than half of the plastron. Skin behind the eyes tesselated, but smooth along the median line, the spaces mostly longer than wide. Lower jaw, especially at the symphysis, much more feeble than in Chelodina nove-guinee, only one third as wide as the diameter of the eye ; on one side two very small barbels are present. Seven or eight wide, band-lke lamellze on the front of each fore leg. Above black, below dark brown. Hinder costal and vertebral shields longitudin- ally striated nearly to the border of the carapace. Nuchal shield rectangular, 1} time longer than wide. First vertebral shield the largest, fifth the smallest, six present, as in Chelodina nove-guinee. (Named for Dr. Friedrich Sieben- rock). BY J. DOUGLAS OGILBY. 81 MEASUREMENTS IN MILLIMETERS. Width of carapace ue ue ots ¥. an 160 Length of plastron ate os - ae ss 165 Width of plastron x6 se Ns ie Si 85 Length of head .. ye a sii = =e 78 Width of head a - 5 vs on 43 In addition to the shortness of the symphysis of the lower jaw referred to by Dr. Werner, it should be noted that while in Chelodina nove-guinee the intergular shield is three times as long as the suture between the pectoral shields, in this species it is only 14 time as long as the same. 8a. EMYDURA KREFFTII. Chelymys krefftii, Gray, Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist., (5) viii. 1871, p. 366, Burnett River, Queen-lend. and Proc. ZoGl. Svc., 1872, p. 5°G. pl. xxvis'. Ohelymys victorie, part., Gray, Proc. Zool. Soc., 1872, p. 596, fig. 2 (woodcut on p. 507). Emudira kreffii, Boulenger, Catal. Chelon., p. 230, 1889; Werner, Verh. Zéol.-bot. Ges. Wien, 1901, p. 603. KREFFv’s Mun Torrotse. Carapace more or less depressed, the depth of the shell 2? to 3 in its length, little expanded and not or but feebly serrated posteriorly, the sculpture and vertebral groove similar to that of Hmydura macquari, as also are the shape and size of the intergular shield. No mental barbels. Car- apace olive or olive brown, plastron yellowish green ; a yel- low band from the eye to the ear. (Named for Gerald Krefft, then Curator of the Australian Museum, Sydney). Length to 10 inches. Queensland ; Dutch New Guinea. Type in the South Kensington Museum. ‘| ‘ my My *ere) i? Ane * rh teats Aiht TLL yy eh tt L * a val t , ‘ 4 i? ie Pa) ‘ a 7 ~*~ i i, > ‘ (oy . # itt ’ . AGhh « Gots cet foe “Yr: ! 2a ,* i) we aut “ih at h ah) : vw nd a E Ds.) ee eb ri he : oa ( ; iy yi MILA ia uel Seal: ‘ Pe he 4 Ahi if, Ss 4 ‘ “z ee | canlangribi O re ¢ s t ae 1) hf ON TRYPANOSOMA AND THEIR PRESENCE IN THE BLOOD OF BRISBANE RATS. By C. J. POUND, F.R.M.S. (Govt. Bacteriologist) (Read before the Royal Society of Queensland, 3rd Sept., 1904) Dvrine the past four years I have examined large numbers of rats of different species for plague, and occasionally in the systemic blood of some of the rats I detected the pre- sence of those peculiarly interesting micro-parasites. the Try- panosomas. These organisms were first discovered by T. R. Lewis in India in 1879. He describes them as occurring in the blood of rats and hamsters which were apparently healthy. At first he thought they were spinila, but on closer examin- ation he found they possessed a distinct body outline, with at one end a flagellum. Lewis’s original drawings of these organisms, which appear in the Quarterly Journal of Micro- scopical Science for that year, are somewhat primitive, com- pared with the same organisms seen with present day instru- ments. Lewis depicts them as having cylindrical or bi- tapering bodies. one end of which continued into a long lash- like thread. They were detected in twenty-nine per cent. of the species of rats Mus decumanus and Mus rufescens, and although from their movements and general appearance they resembled organisms of bacterial origin, Lewis considered they were more closely related to the Protozoa. In 1880, Dr. G. Evans, of the Army Veterinary Depart- ment in India, discovered the presence of a Trypanosoma c 34 TRYPANOSOMA parasite in the blood of horses, mules and camels which were suffermg from a disease known as Surra, and which was extremely fatal to these animals in the Punjaub and British Brumah. In 1885, Veterinary Surgeon Steele further investi- gated the same disease and found the parasites in all cases, moreover both Evans and Steele proved by numerous experi- ments, that by means of subcetaneous inoculation and by the introduction into the stomach of blood containing the para- sites the disease was transmitted to healthy animals. In 1882 Certes demonstrated the presence of Trypanosomas in body fluids of certain oysters. In 1883 micro-organisms similar to those found in the rat were observed by Mitrophanow as occurring in the blood of mud fish and the German carp. In 1885 B. Danilewsky discovered Trypanosoma in the blood of birds, including ducks, geese, and fowls. In 1886 Professor E. M. Crookshank very materially added to our knowledge of these organisms by investigating the morphology and life history of the Trypanosoma which he discovered in about 24 per cent. of the London sewer rats, and in the following year he succeeded in producing some excellent photo-micrographs, which clearly showed the pre- sence of the flagellum, the dorsal undulating membrane, and the pulsating vacuole. In 1895 Dr. David Bruce an- nounced the very important discovery that the tsetse fly disease, or Nagana, in Zululand was caused by a Trypanosoma, For over three years Bruce very closely studied the disease and conducted a series of interesting investigations, in which he not only brought to light many new morphological char- acters of the organism, but demonstrated its presence in the blood of horses, mules, asses, cattle, buffaloes, antelopes, camels, hyenas, and dogs; moreover from all these animals the organisms were transmissible to such experimental animals as the cat, rat, mouse, rabbit, hedgehog. donkey, bosch-bok, hybrid of zebra, gumea pig, goat, sheep, monkey, and weasel. He also proved that under natural conditions, the disease was transmitted from animal to animal solely by the tsetse fly (glossina moritans). After Bruce’s researches the subject of Trypanosomiasis was taken up and studied in various parts of the world, but BY C. J. POUND, F.R.M.S. Dd more particularly tropical countries, by many competent observers, notably Laveran, Koch, Lingard, Plimmer, Brad- ford, Theiler, Allen Smith, Voges, and Vsigburg. The combined labours of these investigators have con- firmed the researches of the more early workers on the subject, and have published much valuable information concerning the hfe histroy of the different species of Trypanosoma, tech- nique of the methods for the detection, influence of sex. age and breed of the many species of animals that are subject to Trypanosomiasis, and also the questions of treatment of the disease and immunity. In 1902 considerable interest was aroused in the medical profession by what may be taken to be a newly discovered disease in the human subject, for Dr. J. E. Dutton, of the School of Tropical Medicine in Liverpool, demonstrated the trypanosoma parasites in the blood of a man who had been living in the Gambia colony on the West Coast of Africa. Dutton mentions in his report that this patient was first seen by Dr. Forde in the Gambia colony in May, 1901, and in his blood he found small worm-like extremely active parasites, which was subsequently recognised by Dutton as trypanosoma. The symptoms presented by the patient were: Irregularly intermittent jtebrile attacks, the temperature remaining above normal (2 or 3 degrees) for a few days. and then falling below normal for a few days; the skin dry, with irregular patches of a congested or cyanosed character ; puffy «edema of the face, and slightly around and above the ankles, res- pirations and pulse altered, being rapid and variable ; heart sounds pecuharly muffled: urme and bowel excretions practically normal. In the later stages of the complaint both hver and spleen were found enlarged. Loss of weight and considerable debility, wasting, and lassitude were marked during the progress of the case. Dutton also found the para- site in the blood of a child, three years old, a native of the Gambia, but in whom no symptoms of illness were present. A little later Manson met with a patient in London whose svmptoms were so suspicious that on examining his blood trypanosomas were detected, and thereby a_ significant advance in the clinical recognition of the disease was made. 36 TRYPANOSOMA Coming to a still more recent date, Aldo Castellani, in June, 1903, discovered an entirely new form of trypanosoma in the blood and cerebro-spinal fluid of patients suffering from sleeping sickness in Uganda on the shores of the lake Victoria Nyanza, in Central Africa. So far in Queensland and possibly Australia Trypanosoma have only been demonstrated in the blood of rats, but I have proved their existence in at least three distinct species, viz., mus decumanus, the common brown rat: mus rattus, the old English black rat, which has very large, thin round ears, and a somewhat long, tapering tail; and mus Alex- andrinus rufus, which is probably a hybrid between the brown and the black rat possessing all the morphological characters of the latter, but having a reddish-brown coat. My observations are confirmatory of Crookshank’s, in that rats having these parasites in their blood are appar- ently healthy. EXAMINATION OF FRESH AND STAINED SPECIMENS. If a drop of blood from a surra rat be examined under the microscope with } objective it appears to quiver with life, and even with an oilimmersion lense the parasites-are extremely difficult to examine until their movement is arrested for a moment or they are imprisoned in the serum areas. As they are so actively motile they form very fascinating objects for the microscopist. A single organism will lash its flagellum in all directions as though endeavouring to free itself from its environment of red and white blood corpuscles. The body readily twists upon itself or from side to side with great ac- tivity. It can turn completely round with lightning rapidity | so that the flagellum will be lashing the blood cells for a mo- ment in one direction, and then suddenly lash them in the opposite direction. Sometimes it will spin round on its long axis and then at an incline on its short axis. Occasionally it appears as if attached by means of the spine-like process to a corpuscle, remaining stationary or lashing its flagellum. At first sight they appear to wriggle along either backwards or forwards, but the general mode of progression is by means of the fla- BY C. J. POUND, F.R.M.S. 37 gellum threading its way between the corpuscles, drawing the body of the organism after it, thus, as Crookshank states, the flagellum acts as a tractellum and not as a pulsellum. This feature of the movement cf the flagellum in front drawing the body of the organism behind is almost a distinct peculiarity of such low types of animal life as the Protozoa. All the trvpanosoma are decidedly polymorphic, but as a rule they have slightly taperig bodies which terminate at one end with a stiff acutely pomted process, while the opposite end is provided sith a long flagellum, which 1s a really « con- tinuation of a delicate fin-like membrane attached to nearly two-thirds of the back of the organism. When carefully examined under a critical high power objective, the body substance is seen in parts to be distinctly granular and possess- ed of two or more highly refractive spherules ; the one in the centre of the body being the nucleus, while at the posterior end there are usually two, one of which is the centrosome, and the other the pulsating vacuole. The average size of the body of a trypanosoma is about 20 to 30 micro-millimetres long, and from 0.8 to 1 micro- millimetres broad ; while the flagellum is about as long as the body, so that the total length of the organisms would be about 50 micro-millimetres, in fact many of them are in length from six to eight times the diameter of a red blood corpuscle, or roughly speaking the 5), of an inch. Nothwithstanding that trypanosoma may be detected in the blood in the living condition it is a very distinct advan- tage to be able to examine them after they have been fixed and stained and permanently mounted. For this purpose | have been extremely successful in staiming them with methylene blue, gentian violet, and Bismarck brown, in either of which watery solutions the coverglass smears after fixing with absolute alcohol should be left for at least from 12 to 24 hours ; they are then washed im water and mounted in Xylol Balsam. One of the best and most permanent stains I find is carbol fuchsin: a little of this stain is placed in a watch glass, and the green metallic looking scum removed by the addition of two or three drops of alcohol. The coverglass smear is then floated, prepared 38 TRYPANOSOMA side down, and the whole gently heated over a spirit lamp or bunsen flame until the steam rises, when the green scum is about to make its re-appearance, remove the coverglass with a pair of forceps, wash in water and afterwards in very dilute alcohol; finally dry and mount in Xylol Balsam. In specimens so prepared all the morphological characters of the organisms are very clearly demonstrated. As to their permanency I have some preparations which I made in 1886 in London and which still show all the peculiar features of this organism. The above stains are admirably adapted for photo- micrographic purposes, but for studying the structure of such delicate organisms I find the recently introduced blood staining methods of Romanowsky, Leishman and Jenner to give the most satisfactory results. By either of these methods, in which eosin and methylene blue dissolved in pure methyl alcohol are employed, different parts of the organism have an affinity for selecting in varying degrees one or other of the combined stains. Of the three methods I prefer Romanowsky’s: the blood to be examined is spread in a very thin film on a cover-glass, and allowed to dry spontaneously, which is sufficient to fix the specimen without passing through the flame, allow a few drops of stain to remain on the film for five minutes, then add an equal quantity of freshly distilled water, mixing gently for another three minutes, wash thoroughly in distilled water, dry in the air, and mount in xylol balsam. A PRELIMINARY REVISION OF THE AUSTRALIAN THYRIDIDAE AND PYRALIDAE. Parr IL. By A. JEFFERIS TURNER, M.D., F.E.S. (Read at Annual Meeting, 25th January, 1905) THE present contribution consists of new genera and species, additional localities, and notes on the synonymy of the groups treated of in Part I. The new species have come into my hands since I examined the Brit’sh Museum types, and I am much indebted to S' George Hampson, who has examined most of them, not only comparing or identifying them with described species, but advising me as to their generic location. Though I have not felt bound to follow his advice in every instance, it has been of the greatest assistance. To him J am also indebted for a number of references which I was not able to give last year. The following of Sir George Hampson’s names were unpublished last October :— Anerastria metamelanella Chilostrigatellus Eucallionyma mediozonalis Platytes latifasciella Balaenifrons haematographa Talis brunnea Balaenifrons phoenicozona Endotricha lobibasilis Gen. Galleristhenia Vitessa glaucoptera Galleristhenia mellonidiella = Orthaga rubridiscalis Crambus medioradellus Fam. THYRIDIDAE. HYPOLAMPRUS MARGINEPUNCTALIS. Microsca marqinepunctalis, Leech, Entom, 1889., p. 66., Bev. 1. 10: 40 AUSTRALIAN THYRIDIDAE AND PYRALIDAE HYPOLAMPRUS SUBROSEALIS. Microsca subrosealis, Leech, Entom, 1889., p. 66, Pl. IV., f. 14. Hypolamprus subrosealis, Hmps., Moths Ind. 1., p. 366. N. Q., Thursday Island. Also from Borneo, China, Ceylon and India. tT? HYPOLAMPRUS LEOPARDATUS. Hypolamprus leopardata, Warr., Nov. Zool. 1897. p. 380. N.Q., Cooktown. RHODONEURA SCITARIA. N.Q., Kuranda. RHODONEURA SEMITESSELLATA. Pyralis ? semitessellalis, Wlk., Brit. Mus. Cat. xxxiv., p. 1246. Striglina hyalospila, Low., Tr. R.S.8.A., 1894, p. 87. I take this synonymy from Mr. Warren (Nov. Zool. 1898, p. 223), who has examined Lower’s type. No doubt this species is variable, like others of the genus. N.Q., Townsville. RHODONEURA THEORINA. N.Q., Cairns. RHODONEURA DISSIMULANS. Q., Stradbroke Island, in January. 7? RHODONEURA YPSILON. Banisia ypsilon, Warr., Nov. Zool., 1899, p. 316. Q., Gayndah. Also from Dammer Island. +7 RHODONEURA ELONGATA. Banisia elongata, Warr., Nov. Zool, 1896, p. 340. N.Q., Cooktown. +} RHODONEURA DOHERTYI. Banisia dohertyi, Warr., Nov. Zool., 1897, p. 196. Pl. ‘v., 46 028: Rhodoneura stenosoma, Hmps., P.Z.8., 1897. p. 617. Rhodoneura dohertyi, Hmps., J. Bomb. Soc., 1897, p. 291. Queensland (Hampson). Also from Bali, Malay Peninsula, and Ceylon. RHODONEURA FURCIFERA. Rhodoneura furcifer, Hmps., J. Bomb. Soe., xu., p. 230. BY A. JEFFERIS TURNER, M.D., F-E-S.__ 4] RHODONEURA BASTIALIS. Pyralis bastialis, W\k., Brit. Mus. Cat. xix., p. 902. Rhodoneura bastialis, Hmps., Moths Ind. i., p. 357. N.Q.. Geraldton. Townsville. Also from Solomons, Ceylon and India. RHODONEURA POLYGRAPHALIS. N.Q.. Thursday Island, Herberton. 77 RHODONEURA MELILIALIS. Rhodoneura melilialis, Swin., A.M.N.H. (7) vi., p. 312 (1900). Q., Duaringa. ADDAEA POLYPHORALIS. Pyralis ? polygraphalis, Wik., Brit. Mus. Cat. xxxiv., p. 1245, praeoce. Pyralis polyphoralis, W\k., Brit. Mus. Cat. xxxv., p. 1977+ Mesopempta polyphoralis, Meyr., Tr. E.S., 1887, p. 202. I unfortunately overlooked Mr. Meyrick’s description: in which attention is called to Walker’s second name. My suggested name. being a nomen undum, need not be retained in the synonymy. N.Q., Kuranda. Q., Duaringa. Fam. PYRALIDAE. Sus-Fam. PHYCITINAE. HYPSOTROPHA EURYZONA. Heosphora euryzona, Meyr., Ent. Mo. Mag. xix., p. 256. Rag., Rom. Mem. vii. Pl. 39., f. 13. I was mistaken in citing this as euryzonella. S.A.. Wirrabara. TT HYPSOTROPHA CHLOROGRAMMA. Heosphora chlorogramma, Meyr.. P.L.S.N.S.W., 1889, p. 1116. I suspect that H. rhodosticha, Turn., may be a synonym of this speices. ~~ Q., Duaringa. Brisbane. Rosewood. HYPSOTROPHA STEREOSTICHA, 2. Sp. otepeootixos, Straight-lined. 3 17 mm. (Head broken). Thorax whitish, irrorated with fuscous anteriorly. Abdomen pale ochreous; tuft whitish. Legs fuscous. Forewings elongate, costa nearly straight, apex rounded, termen obliquely rounded ; whitish 42 , AUSTRALIAN THYRIDIDAE AND PYRALIDAE with fuscous irroration ; base of costa dark fuscous ; a whitish costal streak almost free from irroration from base to near apex ; sharply bordered by a fuscous median streak from base to apex, ill-defined dorsally ; cilia whitish, with fuscous irroration. Hindwings whitish-grey ; cilia whitish. Type (headless) in Coll. Turner. I should not have described this imperfect example, if Sir Geo. Hampson had not suggested a name for it. N.Q., Thursday Island. Gen. FOSSIFRONTIA. Fossifrontia, Himps., Rom. Mem. vii., p. 338 (1901). T FOSSIFRONTIA LEUCONEURELLA. Fossifrontia leuconeurella, Hmps., Rom. Mem. vin., p. 339, Plla2er., a9: AMPYCOPHORA METAMELANELLA. Q.. Brisbane ; one specimen which Sir Geo. Hampson identifies with his unpublished species. In Part I it is referred to Anerastria. AMPYCOPHORA HOLOPHAEA, 2. Sp. oAopavos, wholly dusky. f 16 TLL. Head and thorax fuscous. Palpi (14), upturned, not reaching vertex. fuscous. Antennae fuscous, in g with basal joint dilated, beyond this strongly dilated anteroposteriorly, then simple, shortly ciliated (4). Abdomen pale fuscous. Legs fuscous ; posterior pair ochreous-whitish above. Forewings narrow-elongate, costa gently arched, apex rounded, termen obliquely rounded; uniformly — fuscous, somewhat darker towards base; cilia fuscous. Hindwings with termen rounded ; whitish, towards apex greyish-tinged 5 cilia whitish, on costa and apex grey. Type in Coll. Turner. Q., Brisbane ; one specimon. Gen. MALIARPHA. Agrees in neuration with Anerastria, but the palpi, though porrect, are shorter, and with the terminal joint distinct, not hidden in the long hairs springing from the second joint. I cannot give the reference. MALIARPHA MINIMELLA. Maliarpha minimella, Amps. N.Q., Thursday Island ; one specimen. BY A. JEFFERIS TURNER, M.D., F.E.S. 43, ANERASTRIA ENERVELLA. Erythphlebia enervella, Rag., Rom. Mem. vii., p. 394. Pl. 39, f. 24. ANERASTRIA BISERIELLA. Anerastria biseriella, Hmps., Rom. Mem. vii., p. 397. Bh, be; £18: ANERASTRIA PLINTHINA, 1. SP. zuw6.ves, brick-coloured. 2 17-19 mm. Head and thorax dull reddish. Palpi long (34), porrect, terminal joint down-curved ; dull reddish. Antennae dull-reddish, towards apices ochreous—whitish. Abdomen pale ochreous, with reddish lateral patches near apex. Legs fuscous; posterior pair whitish above. Forewings elongate, costa moderately arched, apex rounded. termen obliquely rounded ; uniform dull reddish with a few fuscous scales towards costa; cilia pale reddish. Hindwings with termen rounded; whitish; cilia whitish. Type in Coll. Turner. N.A., Port Darwin ; one specimen in Coll. Lyell. N.Q., Townsville, in January; one specimen received from Mr. F. P. Dodd. ANERASTRIA RHODONEURA, ”. Sp. podoveupos, with rosy nerves. ? 25-27 mm. Head whitish: frons with an acute projecting tuft of hairs. Palpi moderate (24), porrect, terminal joint down-curved ; whitish. Thorax whitish, sometimes rosy-tinged. Abdomen whitish ochreous. Legs whitish. Forewings elongate, posteriorly dilated, costa rather strongly arched, apex rounded, termen obliquely rounded ; whitish ; costa, termen, and veins of costal and terminal portions of disc rosy ; cilia rosy. Hindwings with termen slightly sigmoid; whitish ; cilia whitish. Type in Coll. Turner. N.Q., Thursday Island; Kuranda, in April: two speci- mens. POUJADIA ERODELLA. Poujadia erodella. Rag., Nouv. Gen., p. 42., Rom. Mem. LN Samael ot Blass 7 el es POUJADIA OPIFICELLA. Anerastria opijicella, Zel., Stett. Ent. Zeit, 1867, p. 406., Rag., Rom. Mem. vin. PI. 44, f. 16. 44 AUSTRALIAN THYRIDIDAE AND PYRALIDAE POUJADIA INFICITA. Acrobasis inficita, Wik., Brit. Mus. Cat. xxvun, p. 30. Powadia inficitta, Hmps., Moths Ind. iv., p. 58. Identified by Sir Geo. Hampson from a single ? example in poor condition, so t think some doubt is permissable. Q., Dalby. Also from Ceylon and India. Gen. PARRAMATTA. Parramatta, Rag., Rom, Mem. vii, p. 366. Gen. Papua Papua, Rag., Bull. Soc. Ent. Fr., 1889, p. 220. PAPUA LATILIMBELLA. Papua latilimbella, Rag., Bull. Soc. Ent. Fr., 1889, p. 220. Rom. Mem. vin. Pl. 36, f. 7. PAPUA LONGIRAMELLA. Emmatlocera longiramella, Hmps., Rom. Mem. vui., p. 315. Bi 2st ale: HOMOEOSOMA VAGELLA. V. Birchip (Goudie), Gisborne (Lyell). HOMOEOSOMA FARINARIA. N.S.W., Sydney ; one ? example with the posterior line completely obsolete, and the anterior ill-marked. Otherwise it agrees with the type. Gen. EUCAMPYLA. [have not been able to examine an example of this genus, but Mr. Meyrick states that the forewings have eleven veins, and it is therefore wrongly placed in my tabulation. Perhaps it should be referred to the neighbourhood of Euzophera. Gen. SYNTYPICA, nov. ouvtumucos, Similarly stamped, of similar structure. Face flat. Tongue present. Palpi long, porrect ; terminal joint distinct, somewhat down-curved. Maxillary palpi well-developed, filiform. Antennae of 9? simple, minutely ciliated. Forewings with 4 and 5 stalked, 8 absent. Hindwings with 3 and 4 separate, 5 absent, 7 anastomosing with 8 to near apex. In neuration this genus agrees with Homoeosoma, but the palpi are very different. In my tabulation it should be placed in the position wrongly occupied by Eucampyla. BY A. JEFFERIS TURNER, M.D., F.E.S. 45 SYNTPYICA ALEURODES, 2. sp. GXevpwdys, floury. g¢ 26 mm. Head whitish. Palpi long (34), grey, internal surface whitish. Antennae pale ochreous. Thorax pale grey. Abdomen pale ochreous, postmedian half except tuft fuscous-tinged. Legs grey, mixed with whitish ; posterior pair whitish. Forewings elongate, costa gently arched, apex rounded, termen obliquely rounded ; grey densely irrorated with whitish ; an ill-defined whitish median streak occupying cell; two grey dots, one at each angle of cell; a terminal series of faint grey dots; cilia whitish. Hindwings with termen rounded ; grey-whitish ; cilia whitish. Type in Coll, Lyell. V. Birchip, in November; one specimen received from Mr. D. Goudie. Gen. KUZOPHERODES. Euzopherodes, Hmps., J. Bomb. Soc., 1897, p. 475. Rom. Mem. viu., p. 79. EUZOPHERODES ALBICANS. Euzopherodes albicans, AHmps., J. Bomb. Soc. 1897, p. fio, som. Mem. vill, p. 79., Phas, £.°23. Also from Ceylon and India. EUZOPHERODES LEPTOCOSMA. V., Birchip, in April (Goudie). Gen. UNADILLA. Unadilla, Hulst., Trans. Am. Ent. Soc. xvii, p. 197 (1890). UNADILLA DISTICHELLA. Q., Helidon; T., Hobart (Lea). UNADILLA APATELIA, 7. Sp. amatn\wos, deceitful. 9. 17 mm. Head and thorax pale fuscous. Palpi fuscous, towards base whitish. Antennae ochreous-whitish. Abdomen grey-whitish ; dorsum of basal segments and tuft ochreous. Legs whitish, irrorated with fuscous; tarsi fus- cous with whitish annulations. Forewings elongate, costa slightly arched, apex round-pointed, termen obliquely rounded; fuscous ; costa from + to near apex broadly white ; a fuscous dot beneath 2 costa; cilia pale fuscous. Hindwings with termen rounded, slightly sinuate beneath apex ; grey-whitish ; clia grey with a whitish basal line, at tornus whitish. 46 AUSTRALIAN THYRIDIDAE AND PYRALIDAE Type in Coll. Turner is rather wasted and very closely resembles Hyphantidium albicostale, with which I formerly confused it. Apart from the absence of vein 5 of forewings, the ochreous abdomen appears to be a good distinguishing point. Q., Brisbane, in November, one specimen. Gen. ANCYLODES. Ancylodes, Rag., Ann. Soc. Ent. Fr. 1887, p. 250. Neuration as in Crocydopora, but differmg in the palpi and antennae as described below. Sir Geo. Hampson refers the following species to this genus, which is inconsistent with a note in J. Bomb. Soc. 1897, p. 314. Unfortunately IT am unable to consult Ragonot’s diagnosis. ANCYLODES PENICILLATA, 2: Sp. Penicillum, a fine brush (in allusion to the maxillary palpi). g¢ 18 mm. Head and thorax grey. Palpi in ¢ strongly ascending, not recurved, exceeding vertex, second and terminal joints strongly dilated, the latter obtuse ; grey. Maxillary palpi in g ending in a pencil of very long whitish hairs. Antennae grey; m ¢ with basal joint dilated, shaft beyond this very strongly dilated anteroposteriorly, then simple, minutely ciliated. Abdomen grey, towards base ochreous-tinged. Legs grey mixed with whitish ; pos- terior pair mostly whitish. Forewings elongate, costa gently arched, apex rounded, termen obliquely rounded ; pale grey with a few scattered fuscous scales; a fine sharply dentate broken dark fuscous line from 4 costa to + dorsum ; two dark fuscous discal dots placed transversely at 2; some fuscous streaks on veins at + representing a posterior line; followed by a fine dentate obscure whitish Ime; and this again by some streaks representing a sub-terminal line; two or three fuscous terminal dots ; cilia grey with whitish points. Hind- wings with termen rather sinuate ; pale grey ; cilia pale grey with a faintly darker basal line. Type in Coll. Lyell. V., Murtoa, in February, one specimen. EUZOPHERA THERMOCHROA. Q., Brisbane. “I BY A. JEFFERIS TURNER, M.D., F.E.S. 4 HYPHANTIDIUM ALBICOSTALE. Homoeosoma ? alhocostalis, Luc., P.R.S.Q. 1891, p. 93. As noted above I was in error in referring this species to Unadilla. N.Q, Kuranda, Townsville; Q., Bundaberg, Brisbane, Stradbroke Island. HYPHANTIDIUM QUADRIGUTTELLUM. Q. Brisbane. HYPHANTIDIUM LEUCARMUM. V., Birchip (Goudie). HYPHANTIDIUM APODECTUM. N.S.W., Sydney (Lyell). HYPHANTIDIUM HEMIBAPHES, 2. Sp. 7piBadys, half-dyved. g 24 mn. Head, palpi, thorax, and abdomen pale ochreous. Antennae fuscous; in ¢g simple, non-ciliated. Legs dark fuscous ; posterior pair whitish-ochreous on inner aspect. Forewings strongly dilated posteriorly, costa moder- ately arched, apex round-pointed, termen obliquely rounded ; fuscous with dull purplish reflections ; basal 2 except towards costa pale ochreous with a few reddish and fuscous scales, posterior edge of basal patch sharply defined, from 2? costa outwardly curved, then straight to mid-dorsum ; costal ir- roration forming an ill-defined triangle encroaching on basal patch ; a reddish-brown apical blotch extending to mid- termen ; cilia grey with a whitish basal line. Hindwings with termen rounded, shghtly sinuate beneath apex; pale grey ; cilia pale grey : underside in f with a patch of long ochreous hairs in disc. Type in Coll. Lyell. T. Hobart, in February, one specimen. Gen. MESEINIADIA. Hindwings with vei 5 absent. Forewings with 2 and 3 stalked, 5 present, 8, 9, 10 stalked. Palpi recurved, ascending, These characters suffice to distinguish the genus from any in my tabulation. [ cannot give a reference for the name, which is given me by Sir Geo. Hampson. MESEINIADIA INFRACTALIS. Nephopteryx infractalis, Wlk., Brt. Mus. Cat. xxx, p. 958. N.Q., Geraldton, in November; one specimen. Also from Borneo. 48 AUSTRALIAN THYRIDIDAE AND PYRALIDAE Gen. TYLOCHARES. Tylochares, Meyr., Ent. Mo. Mag. xix, p. 256 (1883). TYLOCHARES COSMIELLA. S.A., Wirrabara (Meyrick). TRISSONCA IANTHEMIS. Tylochares ? ianthemis, Meyr., Tr.E.S., 1887, p. 260. Trissonca epiterpes, Turn., P.R.S.Q. 1903, p. 132. In one of my examples veins 4 and 5 of forewings are shortly stalked. N.Q., Kuranda, Townsville, in January, February, and March ; three 2 specimens received from Mr. F. P. Dodd. Gen. HyPOGRYPHIA. Hypogryphia, Rag., Bull. Soc. Ent. Fr. 1890, p. 119. HPYOGRYPHIA RUFIFASCIELLA. Hypogryphia rufifasciella, Hmps., Rom. Mem. vii, py 193, Pl 48, h.24, Gen. MYELOIs. Myelois, Hb., Verz., p. 371. Hmps., Moths Ind. iv, p. 88. Distinguished from Phycita and Hypargyria by the cell of hindwings being relatively longer (4), whereas in the former genera it does not exceed 4. In the forewings, 4 and 5 are typically stalked, but in the solitary specimen examined of the following species, they are short-stalked on one side, separate but approximate on the other. From Odontarthria it is distinguished by the large maxillary palpi dilated with scales at their apices. Sir Geo. Hampson dowever describes the maxillary palpi (loc. cit.) as filiform, which makes me doubt whether the following species is correctly referred. MYELOIS GROSSIPUNCTELLA. Myelois qrossipunctella, Rag. V., Gisborne, in November, one specimen in Coll. Lyell. PTYOBATHRA, Nn. (7. zrvoBabpos, with fan-like base; in allusion to the basal joint of antennae. Tongue well developed. Palpi ascending, second joint closely appressed to frons and reaching vertex, terminal joint minute, porrect, bent at right angles to second joint. Max- illary palpi in g with a terminal pencil of long hairs. Anten- nae with a large fan-lhke appendage projecting backwards from end of basal joint ; shaft in g with a fusiform thickening BY A JEFFERIS TURNER, M.D., F.E.S. 49 at about }, very minutely ciliated. Forewings with 4 and 5 approximated at base, 8 and 9 stalked. Hindwings with cell about +. 2 from before angle. 3 closely appressed to 4 for some distance, 4 and 5 stalked, 7 anastomosing with 8. One of the Phycita group, The terminal joint of the palpi is bent forward as in T'ephris, but vein 2 of hindwings is from well before angle. The antennal structure is peculiar. PTYOBATHRA HYPOLEPIDOTA, 2. Sp. broXeriootos, scaled beneath; in allusion to the dark scales on under surface of forewings. f 227M 8©Head, thorax, palpi, and antennae ochreous- brown with a few fuscous scales. Abdomen ochreous-brown with three pairs of large squarish black spots on basal seg-— ments. Legs ochreous- brown mixed with dark fuscous, Forewings elongate, posteriorly dilated, costa moderately and evenly arched, apex rounded rectangular, termen first straight and then obliquely rounded ; ochreous-brown with some fuscous scales ; a fuscous irroration of costal area from base to 4: a dot in cell and two others at end of cell with scattered fuscous scales in cell and on veins, these form an interrupted subterminal line; a terminal series of dots be- tween veins; cilia ochreous-brown. Hindwings with termen rounded ; translucent white: a fuscous terminal line obso- lete towards tornus: cilia white with a fuscous basal line obsolete towards tornus. Under side densely irrorated with black scales along costal veins to 3. Obscurely coloured above but easily recognised by the black irroration beneath. Type in Coll. Lyell. N.W.A., Roeburne, one specimen. PHYCITA EULEPIDELLA. Phycita eulepidella, Hmps., Moths Ind. iv. p. 94. Phycita recondita, Turn., P.R.S.Q., 1903, p. 143. N.Q., Townsville (Dodd). Also from Ceylon. PHYCITA CEROPREPIELLA. Salebria ceroprepiella, Hmps., Rom. Mem. vii, p. 550, ei ey en ine 0 PHYCITA AUTOMORPHA. Conobathra automorpha, Meyr., Tr. E. 8. 1886, p. 271. Phycita corethropus, Turn., P.R.S.Q. 1903, p. 136. D 50 AUSTRALIAN THYRIDIDAE AND PYRALIDAE Veins 4 and 5 of forewings may be either stalked or approximated at base Iam disposed to recognise Mr. Mey- rick’s genus as valid, but postpone the subdivision of Phycita for the present. N.Q., Townsville. Also from New Guinea. PHYCITA SAGITTIFERELLA. Vitripestis sagittiferella, Moore. Q@., Brisbane ; one ¢ in Coll. Lyell. PHYCITA AUCHMODES, 2. Sp. auxpodns, squalid. ¢ 18 mm. Head fuscous. Palpifuscous, in ¢ dilated, exceeding vertex, closely appressed to frons, and recurved at apices. Antennae fuscous; in f notched internally at 3, thickened before and after notch, very minutely cihated. Thorax grey. Abdomen pale grey. Legs fuscous with some whitish scales ; middle tibiae in f dilated ; posterior tibiae in g with a pencil of long hairs from base and a shorter tuft at apex. Forewings elongate-triangular. costa moderately arched, apex rounded, termen rounded, oblique ; grev mixed with fuscous and white ; a whitish line with a posterior denta- tion in mid-dise from } costa to ; dorsum; two fuscous discai dots placed transversely beneath mid-costa ; a fine whitish dentate sub-terminai line ; an obscure series of dark fuscous terminal dots; cilia whitish grey. Hindwings with termen slightly sinuate ; dorsal margin turned over beneath in g ; pale grey; cilia whitish-grey. This species appears to be referable to Thylacoptila, Meyr. Type in Coll. Turner. Q., Brisbane, in April; one specimen. There 1s also an example in the British Museum from the Malay Peninsula. NEPHOPTERYX NODICORNELLA. Nephopteryx nodicornella, Rag., Nouv. Gen. p. 21,. Mon. Phye., p. 386, Pl. 43, f. 14. Hmps., Moths Ind., iv, p. 84. I took six examples showing considerable variation among mangrove below high water mark, and would like to be in a position to confirm Sir Geo. Hampson’s indentification. Q.. Burpengary near Brisbane, in April. Also from India. BY A. JEFFERIS TURNER, M.D., F.E.S. 51 NEPHOPTERYX CAPNO€SSA. Trissonca capnoéssa, Turn., P.R.S.Q. 1903, p. 133. IT assigned this species to T'rissonca by an error of obser- vation. EPICROCIS SUBLIGNALIS. N.Q., Geraldton. Gen. HYPOPHANA. Hypophana, Meyr., P.L.S.N.S.W. 1882, p. 159. Differs from Phycita in the extremely short cell of hind- wings, not exceeding §. In this it agrees with Spatulipalpia, but veins 4 and 5 are long-stalked. This note refers only to the following species, as I have not been able to examine the others referred to the genus. HYPOPHANA PETALOCOSMA. Hypophana petalocosma, Meyr., P.L.S.N.S.W. 1882, p. 169. Spatulipalpia sophronica, Turn., P.R.S.Q. 1903, p. 149. In my ¢ example the pectoral appendages are well- developed. N.Q., Townsville (Dodd). N.S.W., Sydney. SPATULIPALPIA DISSOLUTELLA. dissolutella, Snel.. Midd. Sum. Lep. p. 81. Cryptoblabes dissolutella, Hmps., Moths Ind. iv, p. 105. Q., Brisbane, in May, one g. Also from Celebes and India. CRYPTOBLABES OENOBARELLA. V., Birchip (Goudie), Gisborne (Lyell). CRYPTOBLABES ADOCETA. N.Q., Kuranda (Dodd). CRYPTOBLABES EURAPHELLA. Nephopteryx euraphella, Meyr., P.L.S.N.S.W. 1879, Pe2E7: Q., Brisbane. N.S.W., Wollongong. Gen. STEREOBELA, 70v. stepeoBedos, with straight weapons, 7.e., palpi. Frons flat. Tongue obsolete (7). Palpi long, straight, porrect or drooping; terminal joint short, obtuse. Max- Wary palpi more than half labial in length, stout throughout, obtuse. Antennae in ¢ thickened, simple, ciliated. Fore- wings with 4 and 5 connate, 8 and 9 stalked. Hindwings with cell long (nearly 3), 3 from angle well separated from 4 and 5 which are short stalked. 52 AUSTRALIAN THYRIDIDAE AND PYRALIDAE STEREOBELA LEUCOMERA. AevKopepos, partly white. g 15 mm. Head whitish. Palpi fuscous. Antennae ochreous-whitish ; ciliations in g 1. Thorax pale fuscous. Abdomen ochreous-whitish. Legs whitish with fuscous irroration, Forewines elongate-triangular, costa straight, apex rounded, termen slightly rounded, oblique; pale fus- cous-grey, towards termen suffused with white ; a broad out- wardly oblique white fascia from } costa, barely reaching fold, and becoming suffused in disc; a broad suffused white triangular patch on costa from shortly beyond fascia to near apex ; a short dark triangular streak at apex; a fine dark terminal line ; cilia pale grey with white points. Hindwings with termen slightly wavy, scarcely rounded; whitish, with grey irroration, most marked on apex and termen ; eiha whitish. Type in Coll. Turner. N.Q., Townsville, in December, one specimen received from Mr. F, P. Dodd. Gen. SCLEROBIA Sclerobia, Rag., Rom. Mem. vu, p. 528 (1893). SCLEROBIA TRITALIS. Q., Nanango. T., Swansea (Lea). W.A., Bridgetown (Coll. Lyell). ETIELLA BEHRI. Q., Nanango, Cunnamulla. V., Birehip. T., Strahan. ETIELLA WALSINGHAMELLA. Ktiella walsinghamella, Rag., Nouv. Gen., p. 27. Mem. vi, p. o77b 21 4. ETIELLA MELANELLA. Etiella melanella, Himps., Rom. Mem. vit, p. 558, Pl. 57, f. 24. Rom. Sus. rAM. GALLERIANAE. Gen. CORCYRA. Corcyra, Rag., Ent. Mo. Mag. xxu, p. 23 (1885). CORCYRA CEPHALONICA. Corcyra cephalonica, Rag., Meyr., Brit, Lep., p. 384. I have bred this species in Brisbane from larvae feeding in the bodies of large moths received from Thursday Island. N.Q., Kuranda, Townsville. Q., Brisbane. Also from Europe. BY A. JEFFERIS TURNER, M.D., F.E.S. 53 Gen. PARALIPSA. Paralipsa, But)., A.M.N.H. (5) iv, py 454 (1879). Gen. MELISSOBLAPTES. Melissoblaptes. Zel., Isis, 1839, p. 180. MELISSOBLAPTES SORDIDELLA. N.S.W., Sydney, in April, one ¢ in Coll. Lyell. MELISSOBLAPTES UNICOLOR. unicolor, Ster. I do not know the reference. N.Q., Townsville, in September, one specimen received from Mr. F. P. Dodd. MELISSOBLAPTES HOMOCHROA, 72. Sp. dpoxpoos, of one color. ? 26mm. Head and palpi whitish grey. Antennae grey. Thorax, abdomen, and legs whitish-grey. Forewings oval, costa moderately arched, apex rounded, termen obliquely rounded ; whitish-grey ; cilia whitish-grey. Hindwings with termen rounded, shghtly sinuate beneath apex ; whitish- grey: cilia whitish-grey. Type in Coll. Turner. Q., Brisbane, one specimen. (en. DOLOESSA. Doloéssa, Zel., Isis, 1848, p. 860. DOLOESSA CASTANELLA. Thajora castanella, Hmps.. Moths Ind iv, p. 4 (1896). Melissoblaptes hilaropis, Meyr., Tr.E.S. 1897, p. 378. In my example, which was identified by Sir Geo. Hamp- son with castanella, the lines on forewing are very obscure, but can just be traced. In Part I hilaropis is erroneously quoted twice. Gen. HETEROMICTA. Heteromicta, Meyr., Tr.E..S. 1886, p. 273. HETEROMICTA PACHYTERA. Q., Toowoomba. + HETEROMICTA OCHRACEELLA Heteromicta ochraceella, Hmps., Rom. Mem. viii, p. 455, B54, 6.1 7? HETEROMICTA NIGRICOSTELLA. Heteromicta nigricostella, Hmps., Rom. Mem. vii, p. 455, Pi. 54, f. 3. 54 AUSTRALIAN THYRIDIDAE AND PYRALIDAE HETEROMICTA POEODES, 71. Sp. Towwoys, Zrass green. g 16 NLM. Head and palpi greenish-grey. Antennae whitish. Thorax green. Abdomen whitish. Legs whitish. irrorated and annulated with fuscous. Forewings elongate- triangular, costa gently arched, apex rounded, termen rounded, oblique ; bright green with a very few fuscous scales; an irregularly shaped dark-fuscous discal spot at $; a series of dark-fuscous dots on apical third of costa continued round apex and termen; cilia greenish-grey. Hindwings with ter- men sinuate ; whitish-grey ; cilia whitish. Veins 4 and 5 of forewings are stalked. Type in Coll. Turner. N.Q.. Kuranda, in May, one specimen received from Mr. F. P. Dodd. TIRATHABA RUFIVENA. N.Q., Kuranda. TIRATHABA ACROCAUSTA. acrocausta, Meyr., Tr. E.S., 1899, p. 79. 7? TIRATHABA CHLOROSEMA. Tirathaba chlorosema, Low., Tr.R.S.8S.A. 1903, p. 219. N.Q., Mackay ?. Probably a synonym of T. rufivena. TIRATHABA PARASITICA. Melissoblaptes parasiticus, Luc., P.R.S.Q. 1898, p. 85. Harpagoneura hepialivora, Hmps., Rom. Mem. vii, p. 466, Pl. 53, f. 19 (1901). N.Q., Townsville. Q. Brisbane. N.S.W., Sydney (Lyell). Gen. STENACHROIA. This genus agrees with Meliphora in neuration, but is distinguished by having a long pointed frontal tuft and longer palpi. I cannot give a reference for the name. STENACHROIA MYRMECOPHILA, 2. Sp. puppnxodiros, ant-loving. @ 18-22 mm. Head, palpi, antennae, thorax and abdomen fuscous. Legs fuscous with obscure whitish annula- tions. Forewings elongate-oval, costa strongly arched, apex rounded, termen obliquely rounded; grey, irrorated with dark fuscous, cilia grey. Hindwings with termen strongly sinuate ; grey ; cilia pale grey. or Or BY A. JEFFERIS TURNER M.D., F.E.S. Type in Coll. Turner. N.Q... Townsville, in November and December: three specimens bred by Mr. F. P. Dodd, who states that “ the larva is very dark, active, and more hairy than pvyrales usually are; it may be found moving about quite freely with the ants. and pupates in the main or side galleries, the cocoon is oval and covered with tiny bark fragments, grass, etc.” The species of ant alluded to builds its galleries in trees. LAMORIA ADAPTELLA. N.Q.. Kuranda: Q.. Mount Tambourine. 7 LAMORIA PACHYLEPIDELLA. Lamoria pachylepidella, Hmps., Rom. Mem. viu., p. 441. Bas f.e3: LAMMORIA OENOCHROA, 2. Sp. otvoxpoos, wine-coloured. ft 28mm. Head, thorax and palpi pale reddish-purple. Antennae, dull ochreous. Abdomen whitish. Legs whitish ; anterior pair tinged with reddish-purple. Forewings oval, costa strongly arched, apex rounded. termen obliquely rounded ; pale reddish-purple ; cia (rubbed). Hindwings with termen rounded; ochreous-whitish ; apex tinged with fuscous ; cilia pale fuscous, on tornus and dorsum whitish. Type (rather wasted) in Coll. Turner. I should have doubted whether this were distinguishable from adaptella, but for a difference in the neuration ; veins 4 and 5 of forewings are widely separate at base, not connate as in that species. Q.. Nambour, in September ; one specimen. Gen. KUCALLIONYMA. Eucalliionyma, Rag., Rom. Mem. vui., p. 480 (1901). Sus-Fam. CRAMBINAE. CULLADIA ADMIGRATELLA. N.Q., Kuranda. CRAMBUS LEPTOGRAMMELLUS. V. Birchip. CRAMBUS CUNIFERELLUS. Q., Nanango, Toowoomba. ARGYRIA AMOENALIS. amoenalis, Suel., Tijd. v. Ent. 1880, p. 247. 1883, Pl. v., i, 9: N.Q., Cairns. 56 AUSTRALIAN THYRIDIDAE AND PYRALIDAE UBIDA RAMOSTRIELLA. Q.. Nambour. UBIDA HOLOMOCHLA. N.Q., Thursday Island. Gen. DIADEXIA, nov. diadeevos, Of good omen. Frons with a pointed conical projection. Tongue weakly developed. Labial palpi long, drooping. Maxillary palpi triangularly dilated. Antennae of g¢ with a single outer row of pectinations, apical fourth — serrate. Forewings with veins 5 and 7 absent, 8 and 9 stalked, Ll free. Hindwings with 5 absent, 6 from upper angle of cell, 7 anastomosing -strongly with 8. In my tabulation this falls with Culladia, from which it is distinguished by the projecting frons, and the highly peculiar unipectinate antennae of the g | think, however, its natural affinities are rather with Chilo. DIADEXIA PARODES, 2. Sp. mapwons, reddish-brown. g 20 mm. Head and palpi pale ochreous-brown. Antennae ochreous-brown, towards apex fuscons ; pectina- tions ir g 24. Thorax ochreous-brown, irrorated with reddish-brown. Abdomen whitish-ochreous. Legs whitish- ochreous. Forewings elongate ; ochreous-brown, irrorated with reddish-brown; a suffused median reddish-brown fascia containing some blackish scales; a blackish streak on vein 1] in and beyond fascia ; a pale dentate line from 4 costa to $ dorsum, preceded and followed by some fine short longitudinal blackish streaks ; cilia brown-whitish. Hindwings with ter- men rounded ; whitish ; cilia whitish. Type in Coll. Lyell. N.W.A., Roeburne ; one specimen. CHILO OCELLEUS. ocellea, Haw., Brit. Lep. p. 486. Euchromius ocelleus. Meyr., Brit. Lep., p. 396. Eromene ocellea, Hmps., Moths Ind. iv., p. 24. I see no sufficient reason for separating this species from Chilo. In the only example I have examined, vein 11 of fore- wings is bent and approximated to 12, and 4 and 5 of hind- wings are stalked ; no doubt these points are subject to varia- tion. ~ BY A. JEFFERIS TURNER M.D., F,E.S. 57 N.S.W., Broken Hill (Lower); S.A., Mount Lofty (Meyrick, Tr. E.S., 1887, p. 251); N.W.A.,-Roeburne ; one specimen in Coll. Lyell. Also from India and Europe. CHILO LATIVITTALIS. T. Strahan. SEDENIA CERVALIS. N.S.W., Glen Innes, Cooma (Meyrick). SEDENIA RUPALIS. N.S.W., Glen Innes, Bathurst, Cooma; T., Launceston ; S.A., Mount Lofty ; W.A., Carnarvon (Meyrick). +f SEDENIA ASPASTA. Sedenia aspasta, Meyr., Tr. E.S., 1887, p. 244. W.A., Carnarvon. SEDENIA LEUCOPEPLA, 7. sp. ANevxoretAos, white-cloaked. ft 16-19 mm. Head, palpi, thorax and abdomen ochreous-whitish. Antennae ochreous-whitish; in jg with short ciliations (4). Legs ochreous-whitish. Forewings elongate-triangular, costa scarcely arched, apex rounded, termen very obliquely rounded ; ochreous-whitish sparsely irrorated with pale brownish-fuscous, and with suffused markings of this colour; a line from } costa to } dorsum; a discal spot beneath mid-costa ; an inwardly oblique line from # costa strongly bent inwards at 2 to before discal spot, then bent again to reach dorsum at 3; cilia whitish. Hindwings with termen rounded ; whitish ; a fuscous line from # costa not reaching middle; traces of a similar line from dorsum above tornus; cilia whitish. Underside similar. Type in Coll. Lyell. N.W.A., Roeburne ; two specimens received from Mr. ° G. Lyell. DIPTYCHOPHORA OCHRACEALIS. N.Q., Kuranda (Dodd). DIPTYCHOPHORA DIARGEMA, it. Sp. dvapyenos, flecked with white. @ 12 mm. Head ,antennae, thorax and abdomen whitish. Palpi. long (43); pale fuscous. Legs whitish ; apical joint of posterior tarsi fuscous. Forewings triangular, costa nearly straight, apex rounded, termen oblique, nearly straight, but incised beneath apex ; whitish with some greyish irroration ; a fine straight grey line from } costa to + dorsum : 55 AUSTRALIAN THYRIDIDAE AND PYRALIDAE a transverse linear grey median discal mark; a second fine line from 2 costa, outwardly curved, then bent strongly inward beneath discal mark, to end in % dorsum ; terminal area of dise suffused with grey and ochreous ; a short white longitudinal streak beneath apex bounded above and beneath by ochreous; a short white streak at incision continued through cilia ; a similar streak at mid-termen ; three blackish dots in a small ochreous suffusion on lower part of termen ; cilia leaden-fuscous with a whitish median line, interrupted by clear white at incision and mid-termen. Hindwings with termen rounded; whitish; termen greyish, cilia whitish, with a leaden-fuscous basal line at apex. Type in Coll. Turner. N.Q., Kuranda; in June; one specimen received from Mr. F. P. Dodd. TALIS BRUNNEA. N.W.A., Roeburne ; one example in Coll. Lyell. TALIS BIVITTELLA. T., Hobart. Sup-Fam. CHRYSAUGINAE. CURICTA OPPOSITALIS. N.Q., Kuranda ; in October ; one specimen received from Mr. F. P. Dodd. Sus-Fam. PYRALINAE. ENDOTRICHA DISPERGENS. N.Q., Kuranda. ; ENDOTRICHA MESENTERIALIS. N.Q., Atherton. ENDOTRICHA PYROSALIS. Q., Warwick. ENDOTRICHA PUNCTICOSTALIS. @., Cunnamulla. N.S.W., Sydney. ENDOTRICHA AGLAOPA. V., Gisborne, in November; one g taken by Mr. G. Lyell. ENDOTRICHA CAUSTOPA, ”. Sp. KAVOTWTOS, scorched. fg 24 mm. Head and thorax reddish-brown. (Palpi broken). Antennae reddish-brown ; in g with long ciliations (4). Abdomen reddish-brown; a broad streak on dorsum BY A. JEFFERIS TURNER M.D., F.E.S. 59 dark-fuscous ; tuft fuscous. Legs purplsh-brown : posterior pair pale ochreous; anterior coxae ochreous with a few purplish scales ; tarsi annulated with pale ochreous. Fore- wings triangular, costa straight except towards apex, apex round-pomted, termen bowed, oblique; dull reddish-brown sparsely irrorated with fuscous ; lines fuscous ; first straight, somewhat suffused, from +4 costa to } dorsum; a minute fuscous discal dot beneath mid-costa ; second line finer from 2 costa, straight to near dorsum, then bent outwards to tornus, followed by a dark brown suffusion ; a terminal series of minute fuscous dots; cilia pale reddish. Hindwings with termen sheghtly sinuate; colour as forewings, but suffused with fuscous before first and between first and second lines ; a third line near and parallel to first ; cilia as forewings, but on tornus and dorsum ochreous. Underside as upper, but with less fuscous suffusion, and first lines obscure. Type in Coll. Lyell. N.Q., Kuranda, in September; one specimen received from Mr. F. P. Dodd. DIPLOPSEUSTIS PERIERESALIS. V., Birchip. COTACHENA HISTRICALIS. N.Q., Cairns, Kuranda. COTACHENA ALUENSIS N.Q., Kuranda. PYRALIS MANTHOTALIS. V., Birchip (Goudie). VITESSA ZALMIRA. zalmira, Cram., Pap. Exot. iv., p. 149. Pl. 367, f. 2. N.Q., Kuranda, in April; one specimen received from Mr. Rowland Turner. Also from New Hebrides and Amboyna. VITESSA GLAUCOPTERA. N.Q., Atherton (Coll. Lyell); Kuranda, in March and September ; two specimens received from Mr. F. P. Dodd. Gen. HYPSIDIA. Hypsidia, Roths., Nov. Zool. 11., p. 602 (1896). From the definition given of this genus it appears to be allied to Vitessa and Cardamyla, but may be readily distin- guished by vein 10 of forewings being stalked with 8 and 9. 60 AUSTRALIAN THYRIDIDAE AND PYRALIDAK 7 HPYSIDIA ERYTHROPSALIS. Hypsidia erythropsalis Roths., Nov. Zool. 1t., p. 603. BOSTRA DISTICHA, N.Q., Cairns, Kuranda. TITANOCEROS CATAXANTHA. Q., Nanango. Gen. CATAMOLA. Catamola, Meyr., Tr.E.S. 1884, p. 178. Nyctereutica, Turn., P.R.S.Q. 1903, p. 192. Type C. funerea, Wik. Mr. Meyrick subsequently sank his genus in H'pipaschia from which it is distinguished by the long anastomosis of veins 7 and 8 of hindwings: in Epi- paschia these veins are either separate or anastomose very shortly. The genus is a natural one; all the species are dark-fuscous or blackish. CATAMOLA FUNEREA. I previously overlooked the fact that this common species is certainly referable to my genus Nyctereutica of which Cata- mola, Meyr., is an older name. N.Q., Townsville. CATAMOLA CAPNOPIS. V., Gisborne (Lyell). MACALLA CONCISELLA. N.Q., Kuranda. MACALLA AERUGINOSA. Q., Nambour. MACALLA MNIARIAS, 2. sp. pvtapos, MOSSY. 3 24 mm. Head and palpi greenish. Antennae ochreous-fuscous; in g ciliated im tufts (2): processes green, posteriorily brownish. Thorax brownish with some green scales and a posterior blackish spot ; basal } of patagia green. Abdomen pale reddish-brown ; a transverse blackish line on second segment ; tuft greenish tinged. Legs whitish mixed with brownish and dark-fuscous ; anterior and middle tarsi dark -fuscous with whitish annulations. Forewings triangular, costa straight, towards apex slightly arched, apex rounded, termen bowed, oblique; green; markings pale reddish-brown irrorated sparsely with blackish scales ; BY A. JEFFERIS TURNER M.D., F.E.S. 61 a spot on base of dorsum; a transverse fascia at 4; suc- ceeded by a parallel line, obsolete towards costa, where it 1s represented by a blackish dot ; a broader fascia beyond middle; and a subterminal fascia interrupted in mud-dise ; some fuscous terminal dots: cilia whitish tinged with reddish and obscurely barred with fuscous. Hindwings with termen rounded ; pale fuscous ; termen reddish tinged ; cilia pale reddish. Type in Coll. Turner. N.Q.. Kuranda, in October; one specimen received from Mr. F. P. Dodd. MACALLA DOCHMOSCTIA, 2. Sp. BOX [LOWKLOS, obliquely shaded. 3 28 TM. Head, palpi, thorax, and antennal processes fuscous irrorated with white. Antennae pale fuscous ; in 3g shghtly pectinate (1). Abdomen — ochreous-whitish. Legs dark-fuscous irrorated and annulated with whitish ; posterior tibiae whitish, towards apex pale reddish with some dark-fuscous scales. Forewings triangular, costa straight for 3, then moderately arched, apex rounded, termen bowed, oblique ; white irrorated with brownish and dark-fuscous ; a pale-grey spot on dorsum near base ; a broad oblique dark shade from 4 costa to tornus ; a dark-fuscous spot on mid- costa, and another at %; a fine, indistinct, sharply dentate subterminal line, obsolete towards costa; followed by a brownish shade more or less interrupted ; a terminal series of dark-fuscous wedge-shaped dots; cilia white barred with pale reddish, the bases of bars fuscous. Hindwings with ter- men rounded ; towards base and dorsum whitish, towards apex and termen fuscous ; cilia pale reddish, with a whitish basal line. followed by an interrupted fuscous line obsolete towards tornus. Type in Coll. Turner. N.Q.. Kuranda, in March; one specimen received from Mr. F. P. Dodd. EPIPASCHIA CLETOLIS, 7”. sp. KAytoAts, worth choosing. g 30 mm. Head whitish. Palpi brownish suffused with whitish anteriorly. Antennae whitish-ochreous ; in $ with short processes not reaching middle of tegulae, towards base shghtly serrate, moderately ciliated (1) Thorax 62 AUSTRALIAN THYRIDIDAE AND PYRALIDAE whitish-brown mixed with darker brown and fuscous. Ab- domen whitish irrorated with brown, especially towards base ; apices of middle and posterior segments edged with blackish. Legs brown, tarsi annulated with ochreous-whitish ; posterior pair reddish-tinged. Forewings triangular, costa straight, towards apex slightly arched; apex rounded, ter- men bowed, oblique ; whitish ; a reddish-brown basal patch to 4, towards dorsum suffused with dull greenish, posterior edge straight ; a greenish line from middle of posterior edge and parallel with it to dorsum ; a reddish-brown spot on mid- costa, followed by two similar spots; between these and dorsum is some brownish and greenish irroration ; a larger spot on costa before apex giving off a fine obscure sharply dentate line to tornus; a fine dark-fuscous terminal line ; cilia whitish obscurely barred with brownish. Hindwings with termen rounded; whitish, veins slenderly fuscous ; towards apex and tornus reddish-tinged ; a fine dark-fuscous terminal line; cilia whitish, with a dull reddish median line from apex. Type in Coil. Turner. N.Q., Kuranda; in March; one specimen received from Mr. F. P. Dodd. EPIPASCHIA LYGROPA, 7. Sp. Avypwros, gloomy-iooking. fg 30 mm. Head ochreous-whitish. Palpi, dark- fuscous. Antennae dark fuscous; in ¢ slightly dentate, shortly ciliated (4). Thorax and abdomen ochreous-whitish, mixed with dark-fuscous. Legs dark-fuscous irrorated and tarsi annulated with ochreous-whitish. Forewimgs narrow triangular, costa gently arched, apex rounded, termen bowed, oblique; ochreous-whitish densely irrorated with dark- fuscous ; darker at base costa, and towards apex; a dark- fuscous sharply dentate line from } costa obliquely outwards to mid-disc, then bent inwards and continued obscurely towards mid-dorsum ; a terminal series of ochreous-whitish dots: cilia ochreous-whitish barred with dark-fuscous. Hind- wings with termen rounded ; ochreous-whitish with a broad fuscous terminal band; cilia ochreous-whitish, with a dark- fuscous median line obselete towards tornus. Underside with broad fuscous terminal band on both wings. BY A. JEFFERIS TURNER M.D., F.E.S. 63 Type in Coll. Turner. Q., Toowoomba, in November; one specimen. ORTHAGA MNESIBRYA. Q., Stradbroke Island, in December ; one specimen. ORTHAGA PERCNODES, 7. Sp. mepxvwons, dark, dusky. . g 33 mm. Head and palpi brown. Antennae brown ; in 3 with fine ciliations (1). Thorax brown; patagia except apices blackish. Abdomen blackish above with reddish brown irroration. Legs reddish-brown, mixed with whitish and dark fuscous ; anterior pair darker. Forewings triangular, costa at first straight, rather strongly arched towards apex, apex rounded, termen bowed, oblique; glossy brown with some dark-fuscous scales; a large blackish spot on base of dorsum ; an interrupted blackish line at } dilated on dorsum ; two raised dark-fuscous dots in disc beneath costa before and after middle ; a fuscous dot on 3 costa, followed by a whitish dot, and giving off a slender fuscous line at first outwardly and then inwardly curved, but indistinct towards dorsum ; cilia brownish obscurely barred with fuscous. Hindwings with termen rounded ; fuscous ; cilia pale brownish obscurely barred with fuscous. Type in Coll. Lyell. N.Q., Kuranda, in May ; one specimen received from Mr FB, P. Dodd. ee rT }, ret 4 THE BOTANY OF IRVINEBANK AND ITS IMMEDIATE NEIGHBOURHOOD. By F. BENNETT. Read before the Royal Society of Queenslaud, 19th November, 1904. BEARING in mind the latitude, the elevation, the mineral nature of the rocks, and the heavy tropical wet season, the botanist can guess the effect on the vegetation of the place. The country as a whole is rugged and mountainous. There is little good soil, except in the clefts and hollows on the hill sides. Even the flats along the creeks have a sub- stratum of weathered and water worn stones and pebbles. From December to May, owing to the heavy wet season, vegetation thrives especially where any soil is found, but with the cessation of the rains and the approach of winter with a subsequent 3 months of hot, dry weather, the herbage and grass die off and the hare, brown rocky hills have little about them picturesque or beautiful. The lush grass forced by the wet season is deficient in solid nutriment or fattening quahties and when dead and dry does not offer through the winter that sustenance afforded to stock in West Queens- land by the drvest of dead grass and herbage. This with the rocky nature of the land makes it no place for the farmer or the squatter. The vegetation is not so tropical as the latitude might lead one to suppose. This elevated and rocky region does not favour the growth of the screw pines so common on north- ern waiters, nor are there the thick scrubs, palms, ferns, orchids, climbers, and epiphytes of the coastal ranges. The local flora presents in no respect a tropical appearance. z 66 THE BOTANY OF IRVINEBANK I shall refrain from repeating a long and uninteresting list of names, but shall content myself with naming the prevalent and interesting plants. For the last seven years I have been forwarding to our estimable Colonal Botanist, Mr. F. M. Bailey, such plants as from time to time I have thought judicious. I must here express my thanks to him for his unfailing courtesy, help, and forbearance, even under circumstances somewhat discouraging and trying. The district on the whole does not present much variety, most of the plants belonging to relatively few species. Panicum nematostachyum, Bazl., is a new grass discovered by myself, and Hibbertia Bennettu, Bail., was named after the writer, who was first to bring this dangerous plant to the notice of scientists. The fact that only 2 new plants have rewarded 7 vears of work is significant. The tropical coast scrubs would probably yield the collector more new species in a single month, but when the climatic conditions are considered this is hardly to be wondered at. The general nature of the trees at least seems to vary . with the soil. The stanniferous chlorite rock produces a red soil, which, where sufficiently deep and weathered down, is favourable to vegetation producing trees of great size. The bloodwood, the spotted gum, an unnamed Eucalypt and Grevillea gibbosa grow freely. The bloodwood here is of a large size and very solid. Owing to its plentiful sap it is very useful in “ wet ground,” where no great cross-strain is probable. The spotted gum is undoubtedly the monarch of the ranges so far as size is concerned. It is of the citron-scented variety, and that oil could be extracted from it at a commercial profit. The tree is very tall, straight, clean-barked and solid. The foliage is not dense, and the leaves being narrow and long, the whole tree has a light, airy, elegant appearance. Being very strong, it is excellent for timbering shafts, drives, etc. The stringy bark, though not so large, is plentiful and strong, though more apt to be hollow. The unnamed Eucalypt is locally misnamed ‘ Dead Finish,”’ but the true Dead Finish is an Abbizzia, a small tree. This Eucalypt has a wood like yellow-box, hard, brittle, and good for firewood. The tree has the general appearance of gum-topped box, from which it differs in growing on ranges, BY F. BENNETT. 67 not on wet land. Being usually hollow when large, this tree is not so useful for timbering mimes. The Eucalypts. Wattles and Beefwoods (Proteaceae) are well represented. The stringybark seems to select the bighest peaks only, as its haunt. The other Eucalypts can descend lower. Granite ridges, on the other hand, vield a barren soil, and do not favour herbage or trees. A worthless stunted broad-leaved iron bark grows on these hills. It is generally dead at the extremities of the branches. The difference in vegetation between the iarge trees of the chlorite country and the stunted trees and scanty herbage of the bare granite ridges can be seen miles away, and is very useful to the pros- pector. On the ridges we find Polycarpcea spirostyles, Gastro- lobium grandiflorum, Helichrysum collinum and H. apicu- latum, Hibbertia Bennettii, Hamadorum coccineum, Dianella levis, Dianella cerulea, the lovely Thysanotus tuberosus or Pride of Australa, and among grasses—Arundinella nepalensis, Andropogon bombycinus and Anthistiria ciliata. The first-named is the prevailing grass on the ridges. Acacia humifusa, Zamias and grass trees also grow on the ridges. Such grasses as Anthistiria ciliata, Andropogon bomby. cinus, Heteropogon contortus grow somewhat more luxuriantly in the clefts on the hill-sides, but Arundinella nepalensis asks less soil than these. These hill-side gullies show also Lam- prolobium fruticosum, Ccelospermum reticulatum and the lovely little grass Perotis rara. The creek-beds show white gum, the Shea-oak, Tristania suaveolens (blooming a month earlier than further south) Acacia Simsu and the characteristic Timonius Rumphii. Tagetes patula grows wild here, as an escaped stray. The narrow alluvial flats along the creeks show the elegant Bursaria spinosa (prickly box), Careya australis with its singular long. styled sappy fruit, Dodonza triquetra (a hop-bush), Eryth- rophleeum Laboucherii (i1ronwood), Acacia Bidwilli, Persoonia falcata (geebung), Grevillea striata, Hakea Persiehana (very like the western needlewood), Petalostigma quadriloculare, Xerotes, and among other grasses Setaria glauca (Foxtail grass), the fragrant Klonurus citreus, and Eragrostis Brownii, Euphorbia pilulifera (useful for asthma) may be seen, and as 68 THE BOTANY OF IRVINEBANK will be noticed, the Beefwoods (Proteace) are well represented. On the small open plain near the Picnic Hotel. 24 miles west of Irvinebank, are a few of Spondias pleiogyna (Burdekin plum), Santalum, Erythrophloeum Laboucheru, and among grasses Setaria glauca and Klionurus citreus. On the Bedlog gully are Careya australis, Acacia trmeura, Acacia aulacocarpa, and Heteropogon contortus. The district has rather more than the usual share of poisonous plants, and it is a matter for congratulation that, owing to the nature of the district, stock is not plentiful. Gastrolobium grandiflorum, so prevalent in Western Australia, is found here, and is very poisonous. It grows even on the sides of the more barren ridges. Lamprolobium fruticosum, which frequents the mountain gullies, is poisonous, though it is not so notorious. Erythrophleeum Laboucheri, the ironwood, is so called from the excessively hard nature of its wood, which blunts the sharpest axe. It has proved most disastrous to the camels, which were imported here to carry copper matte from Mt. Garnett. The tree, when well grown, is often over 15 inches in diameter. Last comes Hibbertia Bennettii, which is named after the writer, who first brought it into the notice, at least of the scientific world. How it had escaped notice before is remark- able, as it is both wide-spread and notorious in the North. Though its poisonous properties are matters of common knowledge among the residents, nc one seems to have drawn the attention of the scientific world to it before. It is a yellow flower like a buttercup, and grows on a low herb. Stock eat it with the grass it grows amongst. It is said to be the most rapid and fatal of all local poisonous plants, and, though, from humanitarian motives, I have been loth to test it on any herbivorous animal, there seems, from the unanimity of the residents, little doubt that it is highly toxic. The principal climbers are Tecoma australis (said to poison stock, but this is doubtful) and Loranthi of several species, Loranthus longifolus, var. amplexifolius being very beautiful when in full bloom. The prevalent grass is Arundinella nepalensis. The Blue and Mitchell grasses are absent, and the grasses, as a BY F. BENNETT. 69 whole, are not of much value as fodder, being of a poor class and lush in growth. A new grass Panicum nematostachyum has been discovered by myself. * The native names of plants differ from those given else- where—some dialects more resembling that of the distant Warrego district rather than that of tribes only 20 miles away on the eastern watershed. Capparis spinosa is Ah dum’. Careya australis is Yuh ces’ lah. Persoonia falcata (geebung) is Aal por’ah. Breynia oblongifolia is ’Nyell’um. Petalostigma quadriloculare is Pwee. With regard to the so-called ** Copper plant,” Polycarpcea spirostyles. brought into scientific prominence by Mr. Skert- chley, where there is copper, there may be this plant, but the converse is most certainly not true. / On a ridge to the east of the Main Range, I was one day surprised to discover a hill-side clothed with Syncarpias. I have seen them, so far, nowhere else. The ridge lies open to the east winds from the coast, but I could find none on any other ridge opening in any eastern or other direction. The find is not far from the Dargwi mine. Passiflora feetida, judging bv local indications is indigenious, not intro- duced. I have seen one Moreton Bay Ash, and only one, here. To sum up briefly. The flora of the district can be at once distinguished from that of Southern Queensland by the presence of such plants as Careya australis. This, with Grevillea gibbosa would at once attract notice, but apart from this, there are few plants specially local or tropical, and, with the exceptions named, the botanist, beholding the shea-oak, the spotted gum and the bloodwood in such abund- ance, would not be struck by anything novel. There are no scrubs of thickly clustered low-set trees like the brigalow of the Dawson and the Moonie, the mulga of the Warrego, or the gidya of the Diamantina. The ‘“ sandalwood,” so cos- mopolitan in its nature, is absent. The ridges, even when heavily timbered with big trees, are never thickly timbered, and never approach to true mountain scrub, nor ever show the dense vegetation so characteristic of the ranges nearer the coast, though the rainfall is almost as copious, and the 70 THE BOTANY OF IRVINEBANK chlorite soil fairly rich. Nothing, however, is to be seen like the Kuranda scrubs, or the timber on the Atherton basalt, and cedar on the ranges is unknown. I append, in botanical order, a list of some of the plants more common here. Capparidez Capparis spinosa Violariez Tonidium sufiruticosum Carycphytlez Polyearpza spirostyles Tiliaceze Grewia latifolia Burseracee Canarium australasicum Celastrinex Celastrus Cunninghamii Siphonodon pendulum Sapindacee Atalaya variifolia Dodonza triquetra Anacardiaceze Euroschinus falcatus var. angustifolius Spondias pleiogyna Leguminosex Gastcolobium grandiflorum Bossizea phylloclada Crotalaria calycina Crotalaria trifoliastrum Indigofera pratensis Lamprolobium fruticosum Atylosia pluriflora Erythrophlceum Laboucherii Acacia Simsii holosericea ;» humifusa aulaccearpa spondylophylla » Bidwilli Myrtaceze Eucalyptus acmenioides ae maculata var. citrio dora Tristania suaveolens Careya australis Onagrariez Epilobium junceum Passifloreee Passiflora foetida Rubiacez Timonius Rumphii Ceelospermum reticulatum Com posite Pluchea. indica Helichrysum collinum a apiculatum Tagetes patula Emilia purpurea Apocynaceze Alyxia spicata Loganiacex Mitrasacme polymorpha fe elata Serophularinee Buchnera linearis Bignoniaceze Tecoma australis Acanthacez Justicia notha Proteaceze Persoonia falcata Grevillea longistyla - striata os gibbosa = mimosoides xe oleoides Hakea Persiehana Thymelzacez Pimelea punicea Loranthacez Loranthus linearifolius Santalacez Santalum lanceolatum Euphorbiace Euphorbia pilulifera Phylianthus minutiflorus Breyniz. oblongifolia Petalostigma quadriloculare Hemodoracee Hemadorum coccineum if} BY Liliacexe Dianella levis 5 cerulea Thvsanotus tuberosus Commelynacez Cartonema brachyantherum Graminez Paspalum scrobiculatum Panicum divaricatissimum p sanguinale 0 leucopheum bs semialatum » argenteum as melananthum er effusum 35 trachyrhachis Setaria glauca Arundinella nepalensis Perotis rara Imperata arundinacea Pollinia articulata os irritans ss fulva Elionurus citreus BENNETT. Fuh Rottboellia formosa “ ophiuroides Heteropogon contortus 5 insignis Andropogon sericeus 93 pertusus “ intermedius “0 bombycinus ~ sch enanthus x nardus var. grandis Sorghum plumosum Anthistiria ciliata Aristida stipoides 35 ramosa Cynodon dactylon Chloris pectinata a divaricata Triraphis mollis Eragrostis Brownii os % var. inter- rupta Eetrosia ‘!eporina var. mi- crantha qa 5 - - ¢ Af. Veet MAR heh) 4 me A rey ah we eh Tein i SWWiday her a4) vege pr ite Piairyt § eve phy fre bth italy ‘ oe ( > nd . : } 4 re Wilvile ¢ > s . { on ah p= ma (4g PROCEEDINGS OF THE Annual Meeting of Members, HELD ON SATURDAY, 28th JANUARY, 1905. The Annual Meeting of the Society was held on Saturday, 28th January, 1905. The President (Mr. John Cameron, M.L.A.) occupied the ‘chair. The Minutes of the previous Annual Meeting were read and confirmed. A Paper, entitled : ‘*‘ A Preliminary Revision of the Austra- lian Thyridide and Pyralidw,” by Dr. A. Jefferis Turner, was laid upon the table. The President then delivered the following Address :— LADIES AND GENTLEMEN.— On annual occasions such as this, it is usual that the re- tiring President should first place before you a brief resumé of the general directions in which, during the year, science has extended her marvellous conquests. J purpose, briefly, to group, under the various heads, what has been accomplished an these directions. GEOGRAPHY. Central Asia. Sven Hedin has proved the extraordinary fact that the great inland lake, Lob Nor, has vanished, and the waters that filled it have percolated and worked their way to a new area where a lake, Kara Koshum, has formed. ASTRONOMY. The number of planets has been brought up to 481, a remarkable ilustration of the futility of looking upon the li PRESIDENTIAL ADDRESS number seven as the perfect number of the old mystics. The strange nebula round the last new star is definitely shown to be the play of light travelling across misty space. ZOOLOGY. The Arab steed is proved not to be of Arabian but of North African descent, and the types of domestic horses are shown to be of several sources, mostly local in Europe. Dr. B. A. Brusky, of Toronto, has determined to his own satisfaction, that the imtroduction of marsupials into Aus- tralia took place not earlier than the Tertiary period, either by way of Malaya and New Guinea, or by the hypothetic Antarctic land. He admits a difficulty in the case of carnivore marsupials. His conclusion is based on geological evidence— marsupial remains are found in Europe and America in older deposits than in Australia, but surely, till Australian deposits have been thoroughly searched, it would seem plausible that Australia was the centre from which the few outlying marsu- pials known elsewhere, were disseminated. ARCHAEOLOGY. It has been reported that the inscriptions of the early Empires of Central America are entirely chronological, and not historical, which is disappointing, if true. Recent researches seem to confirm the idea, long in the air, that the most ancient civilisation known—that of Baby- lonia, was brought in a rough state from the north east, from that little known region of the Hindoo Koosh, long since called the “ officina gentium,” the original of nations. GEOLOGY. In practical science the demonstration of the possibility of detecting the presence of ore bodies by electro magnetic waves, has been proved. Wherever an interruption of an electric current takes place a sound is produced, which can be picked up by the telephone and this principle is utilised in the method adopted, and any large body of ore can be located by the character of the sound, but it is not by this means possible to determine such minute disturbances as to show where payable gold exists in quartz reefs. For massive minerals, such as iron and lead, it is of great value. Mr. Ball, of the Geological Survey, has confirmed the existence,of true rubies in Queensland. As no single stone of BY JOHN CAMERON, M.L.A. lil the true pigeon’s blood tint, of ten carats weight, has been found in the last 20 years, this discovery suggests great possibilities. PHYSICS. The utilisation of the Hertz waves for so-called wireless telegraphy has received much attention in the Russo-Jap- anese War. What seems to be the most important result is the impossibility of preventing the messages being read by opponents. Scientifically the discovery of the spectrum of the radium emanation by Sir Wm. Ramsay, and the continued researches of Prof. Rutherford—a _ colonial—in radio-activity, have overshadowed all the work of physicists during the year. In accordance with the announcement made, I now pro- pose briefly to consider the results of science on the develop- ment of Commerce. Doubtless, all of you, in one way or another, have noticed that, amongst ordinary individuals, because of habitual loose methods of thought and non-con- centration of observation. those individuals fail to cultivate the mental power of looking through the phenomena which make up human communal existence, and, therefore, of accur- ately estimating the relativity and proportion of those phenom- ena. In the service of general mankind this power has per- formed what really are miracles, but only unflagging industry in the service of science can develop it. How many persons have even the remotest conception of the tremendous part which science thus plays in the affairs of every day life. What are the affairs of every day life? To the serious part of the community, they consist of those doings, near and remote, which make up what we term ‘‘ commerce,” that is the inter-business relations, local or exterior, by which one and all are enabled to satisfy the demands and wants of existence, Hardly need I dwell upon the complexity of these operations ; for, in speaking of commerce, I mean not merely the restless activity of the world’s great markets in which the whole human race are buyers and sellers, I mean to include the myriad spheres in which human energy is everlastingly seeking for fresh conquests over time, space, and matter. If we consider the effects of science in their relation to what ordinarily we esteem to be time, we will find that human life, by aid of science, has been tremendously length- iv PRESIDENTIAL ADDRESS ened. Authoritative statistics, as compiled for life insurance societies set the limits of human existence at an average age of 42 years. We were told in the Good Book that man’s hfe extends over three score years and ten. Consider the problem. By the time a human being is fifteen he has just begun dimly to take notice of his surroundings. On gaining his majority, he is supposed to be a man, but how many, before the age of 35, have learned to observe correctly, or to think clearly 4 Therefore, all that is left, according to the figures above set down, is a period of seven years, in which the greatest power of activity can be demonstrated. The French have a very trite saying that at forty a man is either a fool or a seer. This dictum was formulated in the days when science was as yet in its infancy. The effect of modern magnificent scientific achievement has been to condense into a short span of statis- tical existence al] the possibilities of the biblical length of life. Naturally, foremost in the category comes the develop- ment in our educational system. Formerly we were told that we went to school to learn ow to learn. Now our children go to school to learn once and for all. In a few years they are carried through a curriculum which, half a century ago, would have qualified them for some of the highest professions of the time. Now, before a youth is 16 years of age, he must display signs of capacity for higher realms of educational advancement, or else he must fall into the sphere of manual industry. This, you will all agree, is an excellent economy, because it is a saving both to the individual and to the State. The world cannot wait. The rising generation must quickly display its capacity to keep up in the great race of existence, or else it must fall back into the less rapid avenues in which moderate ability only is required. The same thing is observable in industrial avenues. No longer are years wasted in boys’ apprenticeships. Youths are sent into factories, where Titanic agents, called steam. and electricity, do all the hard work, and in one thousandth of the time. In this way artisans become mere feeders, and where, jn olden times, they would turn out only so much product, that is, capital, now they are able to turn out a correspondingly increased amount. Suppose that fifty years ago, a quiet- going bootmaker had been told that the time was coming when BY JOHN CAMERON, M.L.A. Vv one man would be able to turn out as many as fifty pairs of boots a day. he would have called for the nearest sherift to have the informant located either in goal, or in a lunatic asylum. I might multiply ilustrations of this sort ad »auseam, but T feel constrained to mention the tremendous lengthening of time, that is, of course, of human existence, implied in our achievements through scientific development in travelling from place to place. Many here present can remember the day when a voyage to the old country was looked upon as a very extensive inroad on the span of existence. Now it is a mere excursion. When Puck said he would place a girdle round the earth in forty minutes, the expression was considered to be a mere fanciful flight of imagination. Yet if an ordinary busi- ness house to-day were not able to communicate with any part of the world and get a reply in somewhere about the time mentioned. there would be serious deputations to the Post- master-General. Even in ordinary civic and domestic rela- tions this same thing manifests itself. We'must needs fly on the wings of the wind in electric trams, in rapid running sub- urban irains, we cannot wait for a pot of beef tea to be boiled, we have a herd of bullocks stored in our pantry in small pots : indeed, when we come to think of it, the only marvel is that our watches and clocks have not informed the sun, to use an expression of vulgarism. “that he is too slow to get out the road of his own shadow.” Philosophically, these deveiop- ments are merely manifestations of the subjugation of natural forces, consequent on man’s restless activity to overcome the most occult secrets of nature. Te the extent above hinted, man, by the aid of science, has subjugated those forces and whilst individual researchers have emblazoned their names on the scroll of fame by their contributions to the general fund, the human race as a whole has been so much benefitted. Therefore, ladies and gentlemen, all honour to societies such as that which I now have the honour of addressing. To these pioneers in the great revolution which is bloodless, superb, and everlasting in its beneficial efiects upon humanity as a whole, from the highest to the lowest in the scale of existence. Already { have outlined some of the more important achievements which science has made in regard to space, per- haps the most important of later developments in regard to the vi PRESIDENTIAL ADDRESS annihilation of space is the rapid perfection to which wireless telegraphy is being brought. When we consider that space is of no importance in commercial relations excepting in so far as it separates communication, the tremendous importance of wireless telegraphy becomes apparent. Under the old system of sending electrical messages by wire, the undertaking. was one of extreme difficulty, not to mention the expense incidental. By the system of wireless transmission, the ends of the earth will be brought cheek by jowl, so that the furthest parts of the world will be nearest to whomsoever desires to have it brought on to his own office table. Hardly at this stage can we fully estimate, much less appreciate, the tremen- dous change which this scientific developement will bring about. It was thought when steam practically reduced miles to inches, and when later, to that swift fellow, electricity was given a position in our post offices, that the end of possibility had been reached. If we are to believe aright, the end of that possibility now is farther off than ever it was. Aerial loco- motion will be an‘accomplished fact doubtless in our time. In a thousand cities, in obscure laboratories the midnight oil is burning, ardent devotees at the shrine of science are at this very moment, patiently, indefatigably, restlessly, and un- ostentatiously pursuing their worship. The reward they may never reach. They are doing it in the great cause of a great power, yet one and all are contributing to the more effective carrying out of this tremendously complex system which we call commerce. By their efforts they are cheapening the food for the poor, the advantages of education, the extent of human enjoyment ; they are making easier the way towards that high ideality, that Utopia, of which the world’s most en- thusiastic philanthropists have reverently dreamed. But marvellous as have been the conquests of science over time and space, they fade almost into insignificance in com- parison with her conquests over that most stubborn of all elements, matter. Hardly need I dwell at any length on this particular portion of my subject. It is well known that in the largest paper factories of the continent, a tree trunk enters a machine at one end and comes out rolls of paper at the other. Look at the almost incredible advancement made in other processes of manufacture ; in every department of industry, primary and secondary ; in the treatment of ores; in the JOHN CAMERON, M.L.a. vil treatment of all those commodities which are the primary base of the secondary manufactures. The application of science to these things has made the output so enormous that the incredible labour said to have been incurred in the erection of the Pyramids, if conducted under modern scientific conditions, could have effected the same object in a few paltry weeks. The more we consider this thing, and the more we go into details, the more astounded do we become at the results revealed, but I do not intend to take you over the whole field of scientific achievements as embodied in modern com- mercial developments. I have endeavoured merely to give you some brief outline of results to date, of their incalculable effects on human progress and happiness, and their still further incalculable aid in developing the human race. That develop- ment is covered by the generic term commerce. Our social existence 1s very bare, very meagre, it is a mere cornice round the great temple of commerce. Yet it is true that even in our social relation, this pert miss, science, will poke her busybody nose. She is ready to help us all; the palace and the mansion are literal repositories of her gallant doings. In every direction she puts nature to confusion, not only can she imitate, but she can even outdo her natural mother. Little indeed do the gay denizens of the fashionable ballroom understand to what extent the laborious researches of unos- tentatious students have contributed, and still are contributing to their life and enjoyment. From the perfume which exhales from the handkerchief of the coquette, to the silent electric fan which is agitating the bosom of the atmosphere, causing mimic gales to flood the room, all is the result of science. You will agree that I have taken you over a fairly com- prehensive field, yet all the matters upon which I have touched really go to make up that great thing which we call commerce. Ordinarily, we are disposed to consider commerce as the mere huxtering which goes on between buyer and seller, without any relation to the tremendous forces which enable those two interesting individuals to carry on their operations. In the lengthening of time, and, as we all know, time is money, science by so much has added to the potentiality of that jnvaluable element. Therefore it has enabled the science of commerce to be carried on in a much more effective and compre- $ Vili PRESIDENTIAL ADDRESS hensive manner, lessening difficulties, and in every way, con- tributing to the smoothness of the operation. In the com- parative annihiliation of space, science has brought the tropics within the arctic zone, and has transferred the arctic zone into the tropics. Little do we, on a sweltering summer day, appreciate the blessing of having portion of a southern iceberg stowed in our ice chests, with which to cool ourselves ; and whilst we are cooling ourselves, science, like a naughty little child is poking out its tongue at nature, and at her imperious limitations. In short, the more we consider all those things which make up the sum of communal modern existence, the more we perceive that it is a junction of indescribable forces with science at the head. Science, it is, therefore, which has brought our commerce to its present almost incredible condition of development. Yet I regret to sav, that in the science of Government we have not gone ahead so rapidly as we might wish. As one whose tife has been passed amid the hurly burly of strenuous intercommercial existence, hardly need I say that my appreciation of the quiet achievements of a Society such as this is most keen. There are hundreds, nay, thousands of such Societies throughout the civilised world. Everyone of them, like ourselves, is steadily working towards the one great end in the service of universal mankind. Little drops of water, Little grains of sand, Make the mighty ocean, And the wondrous land. Science despises not the smallest contribution. The meanest rivulet that brings down a few golden grains to her profound ocean of knowledge is ever welcome. Had it not been for societies of this description I had not been able to make a review such as that which to-night [ have feebly attempted to place before you. In retirmg from the Presidency of this Society, I am relinquishing what to me has been a labour of love, I trust that the future of this Society will be one of widely extended influence, leading up to the development of our national genius, in the direction of furthering the exploiting of the inexhaustible secrets with science still holds for the daring and the ambitious , and thereby perfecting the methods by which mankind carry on this wondrous complexity called commerce. BY JOHN CAMERON, M.L.A. 1x And in this connection I would like to say that I con- sider the Government of this State is adopting a very short- sighted policy in the retrenchment of Mr. De Vis. It is largely owing to his patieut, unostentatious assiduity that Brisbane to-day possesses a Museum. of which it will always be proud, and while it may be true that Mr. De Vis has passed the age limit of usefulness generally recognised by the Government, yet there are exceptions to every rule and this is one of them, because in scientific knowledge of the nature possessed by Mr. De Vis it is age and experience that 1s required, and I am sure I am expressing the feelings of the members of this Society when I say I trust the Government will seriously consider their decision on the matter. A vote of thanks to the retiring President for his Address was carried by acclamation. The election of Oflice-bearers for the year 1905 then took place, with the following result :— President, J. Brownlie Henderson, F.1.C ; Vice-President, B. Dunstan, F.G.8.; Hon. Treasurer, Hon. A. Norton, M.LiC. ; Hon. Secretary, J. F. Bailey ; Hon. Librarian, Rowland Illidge ; Members of Council: W. J. Byram, J. Cameron, M.L.A., C. J. Pound, J. Shirley, B.Se., John Thomson, M.B.; Hon. Auditor, George Watkins. The proceedings then teriminated, STATEMENT. FINANCIAL ‘“GO6GI ‘havnune 446 ‘aungsieg OoppNP CA WT qT ‘AINUOy, “¢ ‘xa1y "MOMNSVIALT, “UOT ‘NOIMON *V ‘yo0r100 punoy puB pouTMEXT "pg “Se TF ‘Suryyurtg—soyyiquyy mS oo lT=T_T_lo—™E—>—SSSSSESSSES eee ee nn eae nmRmaRe__e_eeeee OL TL. S9ts IT 2 8% °° yoog-ssed red ‘yurg qv souvleg 0 OT O a ie asiByO YUV_ (Ne Ge i (xoquaeoaq) aanqyoory SuLyBAQSNI|T 9 Lor i. oi sis UI9VUVT OO} Gr ; “ es quay 926 Sc aa “eg ** 90UBINSUT 8 9 18 oe s BUIQUIAG 9 STS +. sia SUIST}IOAPY L LI 66 a .s dINIVIOVT DYIUIIOG JO onsolvyvg [RUOTwUIEJUT k 0 ro ta puvy ut ysvo Gee eee yseg Ayogq puv asvysog “SENGNASY OAS “1 OL IT SOLF Oe Gllae ; ‘+ ssuTpaa00rg ,, JO a[Bg 0--9T- 9 oF. 9 suolydiiasqueg 5 © Epp so sae ytodaryT ASB] WOA oOUR] BE ‘PISeew, *SLALHOMYy “1k ‘pOGI] aveX P49 FO} TNAWALWLS TWIONWNIA -ANWISNAANS AO ALAIOOS IT1WAOU FHL LAY. oat TOU Nats Sova] | ROYAL SOCIETY OF QU REN SiAND. VOLUME XIX. PART ILI. | ————— PRINTED FOR THE SOCIETY BY H. Pore & Co., Printers, Exvizasera Street, Brispane. 1906. PROCEEDINGS OF THE ROYAL SOCIETY OF GU es NS es AN VOLUME XIX. PART II. PRINTED FOR THE SOCIETY BY H. Potr & Co., Printers, EnizasetnH Street, Brissanr. 1906. SMuUIoOY 1 any. Tenor tae hal Ln met foie ah te Ha re) Og: Abo Shah Ropal Society of Queensland. Patron: HIS EXCELLENCY MAJOR-GENERAL SIR HERBERT C. CHERMSIDE, G.C.M.G., C.B. OFFICERS, 1905. President: J. BROWNLIE HENDERSON, F.I.C., F.C.S. Vice-President : B. DUNSTAN, F.G.S. Hon. Treasurer: Hon. A NORTON, M.L.C. Hon. Secretary: J. F. BAILEY. Hon. Librarian: ROWLAND ILLIDGE. Members of Council: W. J. BYRAM. C, J. POUND, F.R.M.S. JOHN THOMSON, M.B. J. SHIRLEY, B.Sc. J. CAMERON, M.L.A. Trustees: JOHN CAMERON, M.L.A. Hon. A. C. GREGORY. C.M.G., M.L.C. Hon. A. NORTON, M.L.C. Hon. Auditor: G. WATKINS. Hon. Lanternist : A. G. JACKSON. CONTENTS. A DISEASE GARDEN. — John Thomson, M.B., May 27th, 1905 A PRELIMINARY REVISION OF THE AUS- TRALIAN THYRIDIDAE AND PYRALIDAE (Parr II.—continued)—A. Jefferis Turner, M.D., F.FE.S., January 2nd, 19V5 NOTES OF TRAVEL. BaissaneE to Port Curtis By Lanp 1n 1861.—Hon. A. Norton, M.L.C., July 21st, 1904 DESCRIPTION OF A TYPICAL QUEENSLAND LAGOON (THe Enoccrra RESERVOIR, NEAR BrispanE)—WitH MrtHops OF RENDERING THE Water Fit FoR a Town Svuppry. —- Hardolph Wasten ys, Analyst to Brishane Board of Water- works, August 5th, 1905 PRESIDENTIAL ADDRESS PAGE 73 89 91 105 iv. A DISEASE GARDEN. By JOHN THOMSON, M.B. Read hefore the Royal Society of Queensland, 27th May, 1905. In Queensland there is a Local Authorities Act, and the people enjoy the privilege—if there be any—of Local Govern- ment, and, of course, they have to pay for this; but, whether they get the value of their money is quite another matter. Under heavy penalties they have to keep their allotments and their lands free from certain weeds and plants declared to be noxious and a nuisance. I presume they are so declared because, at present, they serve no economic purpose. Any- how, the ratepayers have to destroy these pests, and I think they don’t. I may safely, sav The Brisbane By-laws of the Local Authorities Act mention some thirty-two of these Noxious Weeds, and lest there be any mistake, refer to them in the vulgar and in the classic tongues. Undoubtedly, these apparently useless samples of vege- table life are a nuisance, and to let them take root and spread is simply to let them take possession of the land, and rob the human owners. But noxious as these weeds may be, they are harmless, in comparison with other weeds which are responsible for an immensity of the disease which attacks and slays mankind, and to combat these enemies, another act—The Health Act— ‘operates, and like the Local Authorities Act, it advertises a mr 74 A DISEASE GARDEN list of noxious plants by indicating the diseases they give rise to—diseases due to vegetable organisms and known as infect- ious. : “Infectious Disease.”’—Bubonic or Oriental plague, smallpox, cholera, diphtheria, membranous croup, erysipelas, scarlatina, scarlet fever, the fevers known by any of the fol- lowing names—typhus, typhoid, enteric, relapsing. continued or puerperal, and also any other disease which the Governor- in-Council, on the recommendation of the Commissioner, and from time to time by notification in the Gazette, brings under the provisions of this Act, either generally or with respect to any particular place. And it is the duty of the Health Authorities adminis- tering the Act, if possible, to destroy, or as it is called stamp- out these infections. The terms, Infection, Infectious and Infective refer only to those diseases which are caused by pathogenic (disease producing) germs, which enter into the tissues from without, and are capable of multiplying in the same.—Kanthack. Contagion, Contagium, Contact, Contagious, refer to Infectious Diseases which are communicated directly from one person to another.—Osler. “Infection includes contagion.’’—Kanthack. The word germ, having been associated with disease, introduces us to :— The Germ Theory of Disease which feaches :—that certain ailments are due to the action of certain germs. To extend this :—that, in man and animals, certain Diseases which may be local, or general. or both; acute (hours) or chronic (years); mild, or almost certainly fatal, and whose chief lesions or symptoms are due to poisonous effects (intoxicants, toxins) and mechanical interference—are depend- ent upon the presence, multiplication and conduct in the blood, lymph or tissues of the affected individual of a minute organism (Germ) which requires an Incubation Period of varying length, for the first manifestations of its existence. The natural question now is—‘‘ How can this be proved ? ” or ‘“ On what foundation is this theory raised ?”’ Professor Robert Koch, he, who, in 1882, made himself and the year BY JOHN THOMSON, M.B. 75 famous by discovering the Tubercle Bacillus—the germ of consumption—provides the answer by insisting that certain postulates must be proven before a micro-organism can be accepted as the author of any particular ailment. 1. The micro-organism must be found in the blood, lymph, or diseased tissue of the man or animal suffering from, or dead of, the disease. 2. The micro-organism must be isolated from these media, and artificially cultivated outside the animal body, and these cultivations must be carried on through successive generations, and the purity of them maintained. 3. The micro-organism thus obtained, after generations of pure culture, must. when introduced into the body of a healthy animal, capable of taking the disease, produce the disease in question. 4. The micro-organism must be again found in the in- oculated animal, and in greater number, showing it has proliferated. And quite a number of diseases, from about twenty- seven to thirty, have complied with the requirements, and are accepted as of established Bacteriology. The term Bacteriology includes much more than the derivation of the word warrants. It should refer only to the study of Bacteria—vegetable micro-organisms—but usage and consent include in it all the morbiferous germs, and some of these belong to the Protozoa—to animal life. Bacteria are unicellular vegetable growths, devoid of chlorophyll, and multiplying by cleavage—fission—hence the more scientific name—Schizomycetes or Fission-fungi. They can be cultivated much as the plants in a garden, and under favourable conditions—of suitable soil, nutrient medium, as it is called; moisture; temperature ; light or darkness ; oxygen (air) or the want of it—can be made to flourish luxuriantly ; yield brilliant colours; emit odours, never fragrant odours, usually stenches most abominably objectionable and generate deadly poisons. 76 A DISEASE GARDEN Their place in the vegetable world is indicated by the following scheme :— Thallophyta (lower plants without fibro-vascular bundles, and with no distinction between root and stem). Forms with Chlorophyll Forms without Chlorophyll. | (Algae. Desmids, etc.) | Multicellular. Spores in Unicellular. Spores fre- differentiated cells or spore- quently absent. Spore- bearing organs. Frequently bearing not or but slightly a sexual method of repro- differentiated. No form of duction. sexual reproduction. | The Hyphomycctes, or Fungi and Moulds. | | Reproduction by fission. Reproduction by budding. The Schizomycetes, or Bacteria. The Blastomycetes, or Yeasts. Bacterial classification is incomplete and unsatisfactory. Each author has formulated or favoured some scheme of his own, but none has been generally adopted. Our knowledge is still limited, and many factors have to be considered ; the lines, upon which attempts to classify have been made, are shown in following table from Gould and Pile’s Dic- tionary. GLASSIFICATION. 1. Microbacteria— short rods. ig 2. Desmobacteria— kis 1.—According to morphology, . oh nee 3. Spherobacteria— globules. 4. Spirobacteria— \ spirals, 3 . Saprophytic. 2.—According to biology, . 1 Ryde se ] 2 4 1. Aerobic. 3.—According to necssary medium, pause BY JOHN THOMSON, M.B. 7 a CLASSIFICATION .— Continued. Pathogenic. hte 4.—According to virulence, -. - Menpariecenie —_ . Diplococci. 5.—According to manner of divi- | 2- Streptococci. SIGH Sri eee Staphylococci. Leptothrix, ete. > oe bo : ‘ ( 1. Endospore. 6.— According te sporulation, 2. Arthrospore. 7 “Accordins torcolourses'. oa) ec oe 2. Nonehromogenic. ' ( I. Hy phomycetes. 8.—Bacteria that contain m0 9. Saccharomycetes. chlorophyll (fungi), . - | 3. Schizomycetes. The simplest classification is that based upon (1) morpho- logical characteristics—that is, shape and form, and (5) the manner of division. 1.—Gecei—round, spherical or oval cells, which always retain their shape. no matter in what natural or artificial media they may grow. 1. Monococci—single forms. 2. Diplococci—when the cells are in pairs. 3. Tetracocci—when the cells divide in two directions on the same plane, forming squares. 4. Sarcinae—when the cells divide in three directions on different planes, forming cubes. 5. Streptococci—when the cells are arranged in chains or beads. when the cells are in irregular clumps or bunches, like bunches of grapes. Zooglea—when the cells are embedded in their own glutinous secretions. 6. Staphylococci ~I 1]. —Bacilli—rod hike structures in which the greater diameter is more than twice the lesser. They may be long and thin ; or plump and almost round ; they may have square, pointed, round or clubbed ends, and they may arrange them- selves in pairs, chains, clumps or filaments. They may be rigid or flexible ; motile or non-motile. I11.—Spirilia—Rods having a curved or spiral form. 1. Spirocheete. 2. Vibrios. 78 A DISEASE GARDEN : 1V.—Higher Bacteria— 1. Clostridia—when the rods are fnsiforin or spindle- shaped. 2. Cladothrix—when the rods are in filamentous forms, with pseudo branches and true spores. 3. Lepothrix—when the rods are of great length, straight, but with no spores. 4. Streptothrix—when the rods truly branch with occasional club-shaped thickenings. Classification according to (2) biology. I.—Saprophytes—organisms which grow on, or in de- caying organic matter and can exist independently of a living host. II.—Parasites—organisms which are unable to exist without a living host—plant or animal. Organisms strictly saprophytic or strictly parasitic, are called Obligate ; while those organisms, which, bemg sapro- phytic, may become parasitic, and vice versa, are known as Facultative. Classification according to (3) necessary medium—the necessity for pure oxygen or air. I.—Aerobic— organisms which grow only in the presence of free oxygen or air. When this is absolutely essential, when they are obliged to have oxygen for their existence they are called Obligate or Obligatory Aerobes ; but when they become amphibious as to the oxygen, that is live with it or under favourable circumstances, without it, through some acquired faculty they are known as Facultative Aerobes. II.—Anaerobic—organisms which grow without the presence of free oxygen or air; they can appropriate oxygen from the unstable organic compounds on, or in which they live and among them, both Obligate and Facultative varieties, are to be found. Classification according to (6) sporulation :— I.—Endospores are usually found in the Bacilli or rod- shaped organisms, and are refractile bodies in the interior of the rods. They are highly resistent to the action of light, heat and disinfectants. They vary in size and shape, being round, or oval or rod like ; they also vary in position, being sometimes central, BY JOHN THOMSON, M.B. 19 sometimes at one end, but they are always constant for the same species. There is rarely more than one spore in a bacillus, and each spore, under favourable conditions, produces only one parent form. Muir and Ritchie say “ as a resting place of a bacterum, and is rarely, if ever, to be considered as a method of multiplication.” sporulation is to be looked upon Il.—Arthrospores are spores formed by joints, and about the existence of these there seems to be a considerable element of uncertainty. Classification according to (4) virulence and (7) colour may be grouped, together with the conditions the Bacteria give rise to, or the changes they effect, in the media in which they grow. I_—Zymogenic— Ferment producing I1.—Pathogenic— Disease producing III.—Saprogenic— Putrifaction producing IV.—Chromogenic— Colour producing V.—Photogenic— Light—phosphorescence—producing. Some micro-organisms are flagellated, that is. they have long, slender, lash-hke appendages ; and the motility which some of these organs enjoy is supposed to be due to their flagella. When there is but one flagellum, the organism is said to be monotrichic ; when the flagella surround the organism, it is called peritrichic, and when the flagella are tufted or in clumps, the term lophtrichic is used. Many organisms are encapsuled—surroundeds by a homogeneous covering or capsule. The rate of Multiplication among Bacteria—The numbers in all the classes of bacterial varieties are “as the sand which is by the sea shore, innumerable,” and it is almost impossible to realise their rapidity of multiplication. 80 A DISEASE GARDEN A singie generation, which isto be considered as the time elapsing between two successive divisions is frequently only the fraction of an hour. In some species the individual may grow to maturity and reproduce in twenty minutes. The rate of multiplication thus hecomes enormous as time goes on. Dr. Ferdinand Cohn calculated both the rate and the weight of this multiplication and justified his computations, being far from idle play, as they made the immense work exe cuted by the Bacteria comprehensible to us. The following table is compiled from Cohn’s calculations : Pee aa | Number of Individuals. | Weight. i 1 | 0.000,000,000,004,243, 672 or. 24 16,500,000 | 0.000,4 grain—plus 48 47,000,000,000,000 | one pound—plus 78 —--— | 825 tons 100,000,000,000,000,000,000, | A mass about the size of 168 000,000,000,000,000,000,000, | the world. 000,000,000 | Fortunately for us, long before the offspring reach far into the millions, their rate of multiplication is checked either by lack of food, or by the accumulation of their own secreted products which are poisonous to them. Size of Bacteria.— The standard by which this is gauged is the MICRON. Unit of measure in Micrometry. METRE Ten millionth (1-10,600,000th) of a quadrant of the Meridian. 39.3704 inches, or 3 feet, 3 inches and 3 eighths. Centimetre, c.m. 0.01 or 1-100th of a metre. 0.393,7 or 2-5ths (nearly) of an inch. Millimetre, m.m. 0.001 or 1-1009th cf a metre. 0.039,37 or 1-25th (nearly) of an inch. MIGRON, plural microns, micra, symbol, p 0.001 or 1-1000th of a millimetre. 0.000,001 or 1-1,000,000th of a metre. 0.000,039,37 or 1-25,400th of an inch BY JOHN THOMSON, M.B. 81 INCH. 1 inch equals 2.54 centimetres. Lae BS 25.4 millimetres. diem 3 soe) 2ao micra, p Small as the micron is, there are many objects constantly under microscopical observation, which are but fractional parts of it. And in the calculation of ethereal wave lengths, this microscopic micron is again divided into thousand and million parts. Some of the micrococci are so small that four of them can be easily packed into a square micron; most of the bacilli are but half a micron broad, while there may be one. two, three or more micra long; and some of the stained flagella are but fractional parts of a micron or less than the 1-100,000th of an inch. With few exceptions, the slides exhibited have been photographed at a magnification of 1000 diameters—that 1s linear—cr 1,000,000 superficial. And this magnification is guaranteed, for the microscopical and photographic apparatus were adjusted and standardised after careful experimenting with stage micrometers. In the slides or photo micrographs, the size of any micro- organism can be determined at a glance, for a graphic plan has been adopted of having a scale, occupying half the picture. printed on the transparency along with the micro-organism. Each small square of the scale, represents a square MICRON. Benign, Useful, or Friendly Bacteria.—It is rather unfortunate that the public should associate bacteria with disease—in fact view them as synonymous terms. That we have foes—foes treacherous and implacable— amongst these tiny organisms is certain; but we have also friends, trusty and reliable, humble, perhaps, and unobtrusive, but persistingly working together for our general welfare. BACTERIA. Their use in the Arts. Maceration Industries. Linen Hemp Jute Cocoa Nut Fibres Sponges Leather preparation Maceration of skeletons Citric acid 82 A DISEASE GARDEN Fermentative Industries. Vinegar Indigo Lactic Acid Butyric acid Tobacco curing Opium (smoking) curing Dairy Industry. Cream ripening Cheese ripening Agriculture. Nitrification Sprouting of seeds The Silo Fertility of the soil Food Products. Game flavour Sauer Kraut. Purification of Sewage. The effects of friendly bacteria are seen in the manu- facture of linen, hemp and jute ; in the preparation of indigo ; the curing of opium and the production of vinegar. The fragrance and aroma of tobacco are due to bacterial causes. re the tobacco leaves are fit for use, they have to go through many processes, some of which, at least. are ferm entative. “ 'The special quality of tobacco is in part dependent upon the pecuhar type of fermentation that gives rise to the flavour and aroma of the tobacco, and as the number of species of bacteria which are found on the tobacco leaves, in the various stages of its preparation, is quite large, it is inevitable that the different kinds of bacteria will produce different results as to flavour and grade in the fermenting pro- cess.” The dairyman has to put up occasionally with the enmity of unfriendly bacteria ; the souring of his milk ; its somewhat bitter, tainted or soapy taste ; its blue, red, or yellow colour ; its slimy consistence are due to the growth in the milk of un- usual bacteria. On the other hand, the ripening of his cream and the ripening of his cheese, giving it the special flavour, which finds acceptance in the market, are but the effects of his allies the friendly bacteria. The flavour of cheese is due to a bacterial growth of a fermentative character, giving rise to decomposition, which, in the case of Limburger and others, is not very difficult to discover. To the agriculturalist the friendly bacteria are as essential as the soil or the seasons. It has been asserted, I don’t know BY JOHN THOMSON, M.B. 83 how truly, that—given the choicest soil for some special crop—not a blade would grow, if all the factors—the earth, seed, water and air—had been absolutely deprived of bacterial life. Certainly it has been proved that the complex process of nitrification, the process by which nitrogen from organic substances—decomposing animal and_ vegetable bodies, manures, etc.—is transformed or mineralised into ammonia, nitrous and nitric acids depends upon micro-organic life, and that the conversion is a double one. One set of bacteria changes the ammonia into nitrous acid, and a totally different set transforms’ the latter into nitric, which unites with soil ingredients to form nitrates. The process is an oxydising one, but it is a fundamental of agricultural chemistry. As baking (panary fermentation) and brewing (vinous fermentation) are both dependent upon the behaviour of the yeast plant—of which, by-the-way, there are many varieties— and as yeasts are half brothers of the bacteria, one may truly assert that our lunch, of bread, butter, cheese, and beer, with salad and its vinegar dressing and the subsequent soothing weed, is composed of articles, whose very existence is undoubtedly dependent upon or absolutely due to micro- organic life; and, judging from the number of bacteria found in the mouth, and also from the number on the mucous surface of the prima via, it is at least probable, that the process of digestion is more or less dependent upon bacterial aid. And another, a more recent, and, if successful, perhaps the most important, of all the friendly aids which man receives from lowly hfe is the bacterial treatment of sewage, or as it has been referred to as “‘ simply allowing Nature to fulfil her function by means of bacteria.” The Pathogenic Organisms will now claim our attention, and as these are responsible for the Infective Diseases. Kan- thack’s classification of the latter, as 1t appears in the first volume of Clifford Allbutt’s System of Medicine, may be accepted as authoritative. And although this was published in 1896, the years since then have made but little change. The lst gives 17 diseases of more or less established bacteriology :—19 are catalogued as uncertain ; 5 appear as 84 A DISEASE GARDEN 2 communicable from animals to are due to Protozoa —a total of 43 ailments. Perhaps No. 28 Yellow Fever may now be included in Class IV. Diseases due to Protozoa. At one time Yellow Fever seemed to have an established bacteriology. due to Sanarelli’s announcement of his discovery of its bacillus, but now its protozoal origin seems to be determined. No. 31. Maltese Fever might be transferred to Class I. (a) owing to its cause, the Micrococcus Melitensis. No. 33. Negro-Lethargy, sleeping sickness, is believed to be due to a Trypanosome, a hoematozoon. No. 35, Verrugas—Peruvian Wart—is credited as the production of the Bacillus man, and Vaquierdo. I. Diseases of more or less estabiished = (2) Variola Bacterisiogy. (23) Mumps (a) Local or General Diseases due (24) Whooping Cough to Pyococci. (25) Sypailis (Mixed Infections.) (1) Septicemia and Pyzeimia (2) Erysipelas (3) Intective endocarditis ‘4) Puerperal Septic Disease (5) Carbuneles and Boils (6) Infective Fevers Epidemic Preumonia Cerebro Spinal Meningitis Influenza Diphtheria Tetanus Enteric Fevet Cholera Oriental Plague Relapsing Fever (c) Infective Diseases of Chronic Course. (15) Tuberculosis (16) Leprosy (17) Aectinomycosis Il. Diseases of uncertain Bacteriology. (a) Not Endemic. (18) Measles (19) Rubeola (20) Searlet Fever (21) Varicella (b) Topical or Endemic. (Fevers of India). (26) Typhus (27) Dengue (28) Yellow Fever (29) Amoebic Dysentery (30) Beri Beri ( Maltese Fever (32) Epidemic Dropsy (33) Negro Lethargy (34) Dehli Boil (85) Verrugas (36) Frambeesia 31) 32) 35 Ill. Infective Diseases communi- cable from Animals te Man. (a) Of certain Bacteriology. (37) Glanders (38) Anthrax (b) Of uncertain Bacteriology. (39) Vaccinia (40) Foot to mouth disease (41) Rabies IV. Disease due to Protozoa. (42) Malaria (43) Blackwater Fever BY JOHN THOMSON, M.B. 85 In the following table, the Local and General Diseases, due to Pyococci, mentioned in Kanthack’s list, Class I (a) are given more in detail and the pus-producing organisms respon- sible for them, are specified. Abcess Hospital Gangrene Boils Osteo-myelitis Carbuncles Puerperal Fever Cellulitis Pyemia Erysipelas Sapremia Endocarditis (infective) Septiceemia Blennorrhagia. Bacteria producing the above :— Usual. Occasional. Coli communis Oedematis Maligni Airogenus capsulatus Staphylococcus pyogenes albus, «wureus, citreus Streptococcus pyogenes 2 brevis, longus Micrococcus tetragenus of Neisser Diplococcus Pneumonize Diplococcus Intracellularis Meningitidis. Pyocyaneus Typhosus Wee ee It has been asked, Why call this lecture “A Disease Garden?” True, J cannot let you see the growing plants: but a visit to a Disease Garden (a bacteriological laboratory) will show you them living and being cultivated. The pictures projected on the screen represent types of vegetable life as real as anything ever produced in a flower— a fruit—a vegetable—or a kitchen garden. These names suggest what each garden grows, and as mine vields disease producing plants, “‘ Why not a Disease Garden 2” 86 A DISEASE GARDEN APPENDIX. List of Slides (136) projected on the screen during the Lecture. 1 Noxious Weeds. Loca] Authorities Act 2 Infectious Disease. Health Act 3 Definitions. Infection and Contagion 4 Germ Theory of Disease 5 Koch’s Postulates 6 Place of Bacteria in Vegetable Kingdom 7 General Classification of Bacteria 8 Classification according to Morphology and Division 9 Types of Bacteria 10 Classification according to Biology 11 Pe > “s necessity for Air 12 ms a .. Sporulation 13. Types cf Spores 14 Classification according to Virulence, Colour, etc. 15 Types of Flagella 16 Multiplication of Bacteria 17. The Micron 18 Stage Micrometer, magnified x 1000 19 Scale of square Micra 20 Bacteria, their use in the Arts 21 Infective Diseases 22 Suppuration and Septic Diseases Pathogenic Organisms. No. of Magni specimens fication. 250 24 Actinomyces—Lumpy Jaw 1 25 = + 1 500: 26 Bacillus Aerogenes Gapeilaipat 1 1000 i be Anthrax—cover glass impression 1 75 28 s a blood of mouse 1 250- 29 3 53 val ens 2 500: 30 ae =e spores 2 1000 31 a - Sympininntie=—Bladk lg 1 1000 32 ; Cholera Asiatic— spirilla 1 1000: 33 ., Chicken Cholera 2 1000 34 ,, Coli Communis 1 1000 35 , Diphtheria 2 1000 36 ; - a3 1 1250: 7 » Dysentery—(Shtga) 2 1000 38 » Glanders—Mallei 1 1000 39 , lcteroides—Yellow Fever —(Sanarela l 1000 40 » Influenza ae Se 5 cs ae 1 1000: 41 , Leprosy a se te 6 1000 42 , Malignant (idea ae 2 1000 43 , Micrococcus Tetragenus Se 5 2 1000: BY JOHN THOMSON, M.B. Bacillus Plague—pestis Si 53 es involution forms 5 eS bi-polar staining » Pneumonia—-diplococcus » Pyocyaneus—blue pus » swine fever » Tetanus 2 Ba xe 4 with flagella » Lubercle <3 es zs 3 -pseudo, sheep disease .. a * phagocytes, frog’s blood .. » Typhoid, culture pe = with fagella of - involstion forms Gonococcus Staphylococcus from pus. Ae 9 pyogenes aureus—culture 5 culture—mailignant endocarditis 3 pyemia Streptococcus on epithelial cell 3 in 9 yy from mouth a: x from malignant diphtheria ” from erysipelas Tuberele and Leprosy—contrasted Tetragenus and Sarcina, ,, Plasmodium Malariz 2 ; Pyrosoma Bigeminum~ Tick Fever Parasite—blood of snake - Sc as Non-Pathogenic Organisms. Bacillus Chromogenic agar culture.. # ys gelatine culture Sc m Wigurans ” ” . 29 a Ianthinus i Indicus Be Megaterium Fe Prodigiosus Mucor Rhizopodoformis Oidium Lactis Saccharomyces Cerevisie—Beer Yeast Sarcina Aurantiaca os Lutea Spirilum Rubrum Spirochcete—culture m— Wwe © = & oO lor) ee ee ON RK OD RR ea NOK NON NM — DN & K&S Ke Ke ee ee AG ROMER ay é Rao be wi wear i et sia tuleags Nite el) Sie i “itp i) _ on) oneal Wy at 7 rym anal Vines fi halal seven “4 Re ty « hn a Bnet * : ~~ Jcf0 9 -noF ing 7 ie ar suastbert ; “orb kot paaial 7) A PRELIMINARY REVISION OF THE AUSTRALIAN THYRIDIDAE AND PYRALIDAK, By A. JEFFERIS TURNER, M.D., F.E:S. Part I].—Continued ‘rom page 63. pa RHODONEU RA LOXOMITA, 2. sp. No€oputos, with oblique thread or line. 3 2 24-30 TTL. Head and palpi dull ochreous. Anten- nae dull ochreous; in g thickened, and with extremely short pectinations ($). Thorax ochreous in ?, in 3 pale rosy, except tegulae and bases of patagia. Abdomen pale rosy in both sexes, but more distinctly in ¢. Legs ochreous, tarsi ochreous-fuscous. Forewings triangular, costa gently arched, apex pointed, termen bowed, strongly oblique ; dull ochreous with darker strigulae ; basal half of dorsum suffused with pale rosy ; a well-marked fuscous streak from apex to dorsum at 3; cilia concolorous. Hindwings with termen rounded ; color, strigulae, and cilia as forewings ; a transverse fuscous streak at $ continuing that of forewing: between this and base a rosy suffusion. Type in Coll. Turner. I formerly referred a ? example to R. scitaria, though with doubt. A second g example received from Dr. E Culpin shows it to be distinct. Independently of the rosy suffusion, which is better marked in the $, the forewings are narrower, more acute, «ith more oblique termen, and the oblique streak distinctly to apex. Brisbane and Mount Tambourine must be deleted from the localities for scitaria. _It is impossible to say that Dr. Lucas’ description of stramentaria, though unrecognisable, may not have been intended for this species, but, if so, it is very inexact, and the name cannot be adopted without evidence. Q., Brisbane, Mount Tambourine, in January and April ; two specimens. G 90 AUSTRALIAN THYRIDIDAE AND PYRALIDAE MELLISSOBLAPTES CISSINOBAPHES, 2. sp. kicowoBadys, stained with ivy green. g 24 TM. Head and antennae ochreous-whitish. Palpi ochreous-whitish, tinged on outer surface with pale fuscous. Thorax whitish-ochreous, collar and patagia dull greenish. Abdomen ochreous. Legs ochreous-whitish ; anterior and middle pairs mixed with fuscous. Forewings elongate-oval, costa strongly arched, apex round-pointed, termen obliquely rounded ; ochreous-whitish, mixed with dark fuscous and reddish fuscous ; in posterior part of disc the dark scales form fine lines along the veins ; a large oval green suffusion on dorsum from } nearly to tornus, reaching nearly to middle of disc: a slight green suffusion at apex ; a series of minute dark-fuscous dots on termen and apical 3 of costa; cilia ochreous-whitish with median and penul- timate fuscous lines. Hindwings with termen rounded, scarcely sinuate ; dull ochreous ; apical 4 suffused with dull greenish ; cilia whitish grey. Type in Coll. Lyell. N. Q., Kuranda; in May; one specimen received from Mr. F. P. Dodd. TALIS PEDIONOMA. W.A., Bridgetown (Coll. Lyell). TALIS ICELOMORPHA, 2. Sp. eixeAopophos, of similar form. 9 24 TILT. Head, palpi and thorax ochreous-whitish ; frontal cone well developed (4); palpi very long (5). An- tennae ochreous-whitish, towards apex grey. Abdomen whitish. Legs ochreous-whitish. Forewings elongate, costa rather strongly arched, apex tolerably acute, termen nearly straight, oblique ; ochreous-whitish sparsely irrorated with large black fuscous scales ; a fine indistinct median whitish streak from base to ?, margined above with fuscous ; a dark fuscous discal dot on lower edge of median streak shortly before end: some minute dark-fuscous terminal dots; cilia whitish. Hindwings with termen rounded, whitish ; cilia whitish. Near acontophora but frons with a longer cone, forewings with termen not sinuate, central streak not prolonged to termen or apex, cilia without darker line. Type in Coll. Lyell. W.A., Bridgetown. NOTES OF TRAVEL. BrissangE to Port Curtis sy Lanp in 1861. By HON. A. NORTON, M.L.C. Read before the Royal Society of Queensland, 21st July, 1904. In 1860, after three years of continuous bush travel in many parts of New South Wales, and some districts of Victoria, I found my way to the Port Curtis district of Queensland, having followed an overland route from Raymond Terrace to Gladstone. I had inspected some pastoral properties in the Lower Burnett and Port Curtis districts, with the view of purchasing, and, having made an offer for one of these, which the managing partner favoured, I took steamer (the Sampson) from Maryborough to Sydney, in March, 1861, to settle the matter one way or the other, with the senior partner. This gentleman invited me to dine with him at his very com- fortable suburban residence, and we became good friends at once, but when we talked over business, we differed over about £200. Anticipating a possible failure in this case, I had arranged with its owner a price at which I could secure Rodd’s Bay station, unstocked and unimproved. I wrote at once therefore accepting this offer, and determined to go without delay; and take possession. Before leaving Sydney, I purchased a draft of cattle from Bundock, Barnes and Co., on the Richmond River, to be delivered to me on Rodd’s Bay. Then I put two horses I had bought on board the s.s. Eagle, and paid £5 each freight on them to Brisbane ; for my own passage I was charged £8, and in due course I arrived at the metropolis of the recently separated colony. I put up at MacAdam’s Hotel, a one-storied building in Queen Street, with a veranda along the front. This was Brisbane’s crack hotel. This occured in May or June. 92 NOTES OF TRAVEL Having completed my arrangements, I started one day for Ipswich, immediately after lunch, crossing by the punt to South Brisbane, and following the road which was then in use. There had been a heavy fall of rain just before ; it was showery that afternoon, and the road was very heavy in places. Night had set in by the time I reined up at the North Australian Hotel (I think that was its name) at Ipswich; here a tragic event had happened during the afternoon, Count Hickey had started for Jinghi Jinghi, where he lived, in a buggy, accompanied by his wife, nurse, and infant child ; but before he had gone far, he discovered something wrong with the harness, and turned back with the intention of having it repaired. The horses took fright, however, and got beyond control; they came to the hotel at a gallop, and, in turning the corner to their late stables, the buggy came into collision with a post, and was overturned. Count Hickey and the nurse were seriously injured, while Mrs. Hickey was killed ; the child was unhurt. The accident cast a gloom over Ipswich, and this was aggravated by the rain, which came down steadily all night. The unfortunate lady, whose end had come so suddenly and so unexpectedly, was buried on the following day. I was detained two days in Ipswich, all the watercourses being flooded, but on the third morning I made a fresh start. In close proximity to the “Modern Athens,” as Sir George Bowen described Ipswich, there were a few suburban dwell- ings of unpretentious appearance ; then came forest land, with an occasional homestead ; this was the general character of the country from Ipswich to Gladstone, with homesteads in a diminishing quantity. About mid-day I struck the Brisbane River, at a station occupied by Mr. or Major North. The water was turbid, and the current too strong to be inviting ; as I was unacquainted with the depth, etc., I rode up to the station, and Mr. or Major North very kindly sent his son to see me over a safer crossing, after which there was no further difficulty ; so I jogged on quietly until in the afternoon I came to a fairly good bush hotel, and there I spent the night. Its name I am unable to recall, but it was the first habitation I had seen after crossing the river. On the follow- ing day, which was Saturday, I continued my journey until I arrived at Mount Brisbane, where I was very hospitably BY HONe A. NORTON, M.L.C. 93 received by the Hon. Francis Bigge, M.L.C. Mr. and Mrs. Bigge were living in their new cedar house, Mr. and Mrs. Bowman in the cottage close by, which had, until the erection of the cedar house, done duty as the chief house of the Station. This homestead was pleasantly situated near the bank of Reidy Creek, where was a patch of good drift soil that had been converted into a garden, in which, in addition to the usual ornamental flowers and vegetables, were a number of peach and other fruit trees. It was evident that someone connected with the establishment had a thoughtful regard for the orchard; a hollow tree had been cut into lengths of 18 inches or 2 feet, and beside each tree, one of these natura! wooden pipes had been let into the ground in an up- right position, so that the roots of the trees could be thoroughly watered by filling the hollow stumps with water drawn from the creek ; an excellent, and I believe a very effective arrangement. In the garden I noticed a number of salt- bushes, which Mr. Bigge told me had been raised from seed gathered from plants which grew on the Dawson River ; they were planted as an experiment, and appeared to be in a healthy condition. For a number of years, specimens of the same plant could be seen in the Brisbane Botanical Gardens. My host had very kindly suggested that I should rest on Sunday, and, anxious as I was to get on, it was difficult to set aside so tempting an offer. But in the morning I had an unpleasant experience ; when the horses were brought up from the paddock, the animal which carried my pack was lame. Mr. Bowman joined me in an inspection of the injured hoof, from which I had removed the shoe, and the hurt was too serious to be made light of. Under these circumstances, I thought it advisable to move on quietly as far as Cressbrook, so after lunch I saddled up. But Mr. Bigge was one of those kindly men who would not allow anyone to pursue his journey under such a disadvantage. I must leave him my lame horse, and take in exchange, a very good young “Sailor” mare, which was then in the yard close by! So the exchange was there and then effected, and I left Mount Brisbane with a grateful heart. Many years afterwards, when I again met Mr. Bigge, I reminded him of the incident, which he had altogether forgotten. The exchange was one in which I was in every respect the gainer ; but I was doomed to another 94 NOTES OF TRAVEL disappointment. In the evening I arrived in good time at Cressbrook. Mr. and Mrs. David McConnel and their family were at that time in England ; his brother John and his wife were in possession, and hospitably received me after the good old fashion in the bush. The house was so placed that from the veranda the windings of the Brisbane River could easily be seen. At what was then called ‘“ the old cottage,” there was a fine bunya, which had been planted in the garden sixteen years before, and it then was bearing cones for the first time. Before going to bed, I obtained leave to get my new mare shod by the station blacksmith, and I handed her over to him as soon as he got to work on the following morning. He made a very neat job of the shoeing, but later on I found to my sorrow it was not a success. I did not get away that morning until 19 o’clock, intending to go only to Colinton, where lived Mr. Balfour, the then owner. I had not gone far, however, when it commenced to rain, and as there seemed every prospect of its continuing, I decided to push on. I had heard much of Cooyar Creek, on which Walter Scott’s station, Taromeo, was situated, a rushing stream easily raised by steady rain to flood level ; such was its character. I had lost two days at Ipswich, and had no more to spare ; I must therefore get over it before the flood waters came down. I rode past Colinton in the pouring rain ; up the range where bunya trees grew in their native home; on over the stony road until Taromeo came in view. I looked hungrily at the snug home, then rode down the creek bank and over the already rising stream. Now, at any rate, the flood would not block me; but the next stopping place was Nanango, and Nanango was a long way ahead. After ‘crossing Cooyar Creek, the road was less rugged, but the rain stil] came down steadily, and the light was already failing. Fortunately, the horse I rode was a sensible old fellow, who knew how to stick to the track in the dark; it passed through thick wattle for what seemed an interminable distance, and there the night was black as pitch, and the rain fell with pitiless force. I could not see a dozen feet in front of me, but ‘‘ Cock Robin ”’ never made a mistake or a false step, and it was due to his sagacity that I arrived at the hotel at Nanango at half-past nine that night. ‘‘ You must be very wet,’ remarked the good woman who attended tomy wants. ‘‘ And uncommonly BY HON. A. NORTON, M.L.C. 95 hungry, also,” I replied suggestively. By the time I had dragged off my sodden garments, and replaced them with others which a waterproof covering had _ protected, an abundant supper awaited me. A scrub turkey, young and tender, and cooked to a nicety, invited immediate attention, and received it. I had never eaten so nice a bird until then, and I left nothing but the bones. I was far too hungry to feel ashamed of being thought greedy ; and the bread and butter were delicious. I stopped two days at Nanango ; not that I wanted to, but because the creeks were .gain in flood. The little town- ship had one hotel], and six or seven other buildings, but there was plenty of good land in the neighbourhood, which has since proved tempting to the selector. Everywhere I looked, on the morning I resumed my journey—ahead, and on either side of me, the level country was as sloppy as rain could make it, and the little watercourses, which led to the gully which I was following, were half full of dirty water, which hid its own depth. There was a plain track, however ; not a dray road indeed, but a well-marked bridle track, and here and there the old scars on trees beside it showed that there was at one time a blazed line to guide those who were not acquainted with the locality. My new mare, unfortunately, had gone lame, and she became more so as we proceeded on our journey. Then those little watercourses were in some instances still and almost pool-like where the track crossed them. I dodged round some of them, as I had no desire to get soaked in deep dirty water, now that all my clothes and kit were dry. But looking for better crossings becomes tedious and wastes time, so I began to take them on chance, and did so in several instances with success ; but I chanced it once too often. The gully I was approaching had not a suspicious appearance, and I faced it with confidence. As I had no companion, there was nobody to laugh at my mis- fortune, and just then I felt no disposition to laugh at any- thing. My pack mare took a step forward, and down she went. As she sank, the water rose steadily up her sides and over her back ; then my pack began to disappear, and at last was completely submerged. Oh! the wretchedness of it; all my dry clothes must be saturated, all that were clean must be discoloured by the muddy water. Happily, the good old 96 NOTES OF TRAVEL horse I rode missed the hole, and I escaped without a ducking. On a memorable occasion some years later I was less fortunate ; with a couple of hands I was taking some cattle from the coast to a station’on the Dawson. We had deluges of rain as we went up the Calliope River, and on the following day had to get over the many crossings of Rainbow Creek, which was running strong, and in places pretty deep. The last crossing of the day was more formidable than any of the others. It was below the junction of Rainbow Creek with the Callide, and the doubled volume of water looked uninviting enough for anything. The bed of the creek was full of tea trees, and only a narrow way had been cleared as a drayroad. Fortunately, the stream here was not very swift, and the tall horse I was riding took me over with only a short swim. As soon as I returned we forced the cattle over; then we followed. My stockman, Jack McKenna, leading the horse which carried our spare clothes, blankets and provisions ; but when we reached deep water, my pack horse refused to swim, and as he floated down with the stream, Jack had to let go the halter. An overhanging branch soon caught the pack, and presently old Sandy’s legs came to the surface a little below the obstruction. When he rolled over right way up again, the pack-saddle and all had disappeared ! That night we stopped with good old John Sutton, at the Callide station ; he had for a time given up his spiritual vocation, and taken to the business of squatter. During the evening, I wore such of his garments as met the necessities of the occasion, and dried at a roasting fire the only clothes I had left. What a blessed thing it was to have them beautifully dry in the morning, but Well we got away with the cattle in good time, and I rode ahead to see how the creek was at the bottom of the paddock. It was running very strong, and the backwater had filled a small gully which joined it; but [I had often ridden up and down this road, and the gully at this point was shallow; the bridle track, too, was plain enough, and had been lately used ; I followed it therefore with confidence, but only to find that the rain had washed away the crossing. The horse I rode carried me ashore without difficulty, but my clothes, from above my waist to the soles of my feet, were completely saturated. My old friend, Morton, of the Prairie station, was just nine BY HON. A. NORTON, M.L.C, 97 inches less in height than myself, but he found me some slop clothes in the store, which had to do duty while my own garments were once more dried. But this is a digression. I arrived at Baramba station in due course with a mist rising from my pack, as mist rises on the hillsides after summer rain. My schoolfellow, “Tom” Jones, part owner of the station, was in Brisbane, or elsewhere, but his overseer and wife ministered to my inward necessities. Then I removed the shoe from my mare’s lame foot, and from one of the nail- holes dribbled the tell-tale blood! There was no Francis Bigge here to tell me to take that better horse and leave my lame one ; and the overseer, good fellow though he was, had no such power; there was nothing for it but to wait. I spread my limited apparel, my saddles, etc., over the fences, and did what I could to pass the time as these dried. Next morning, the mare was still very lame, so again I waited, but in the afternoon, having cleared a channel in her hoof that the discharge might escape by, I tacked on the shoe so that I might save time in the morning. On the second day, I thanked my hospitable entertainers, and jogged on quietly. At about 1 o’clock I passed the station owned by the Jones Brothers ; Boonara it was called. I was almost near enough to catch the smell of a well-cooked stew, but the mare could not be hurried, and the road was long. Some time afterwards, Thompson, a relative of the Joneses, overtook me, and we rode on together until in the evening we found quarters and were hospitably received by Mr. Lawless, at Boobyjan. I was still anxious about my tender-footed mare, and when on the following day I left Boobyjan, I had to take her along very carefully. That evening I reached Gigoomgan, where lived George Mant and his wife, a daughter of Dr. Palmer, of Bathurst. Her brother Edward had been at school with me for some time, and I hoped to meet him in this new country. I was disappointed however ; not very long afterwards he was drowned in the River Boyne. The Mants had no children at this time, but they had two very fine tabby cats, special favourites, who were quite at home in the drawing-room. The older of the two had been doing battle with a stranger from the bush, and brought home a very much damaged hind leg. The younger one was a splendid animal in magnificent condition. These engaged 98 NOTES OF TRAVEL our attention during part of the evening, and then we talked of many things. I went early to look at my horses next morn- ing, and was dismayed to find my mare lame in another foot. Mant was with me, and we struck off the shoe, but only to find one of the nails had touched her too close, and inflammation had set in. Never had I such bad luck, but again I had the good fortune to be with an exceptionally good fellow. I must stay a day, and then if the mare was no better, I should have another in place of her! So I promised to stay, and we walked towards the house ; we were met by the servant girl, who told us with the utmost excitement how “the wildcat”? had just rushed out from the bachelors’ quarters, and into the sorghum. Mant said we must have him, and, armed with shotguns. we took up a position where the monster might be dropped as_ he crossed a narrow path between two patches of sorghum. My instructions were not to lose a moment when the dogs brought the stranger to the path. Then we heard a rush through the sorghum, and we both stood with finger on trigger. ‘‘ Now he comes ; don’t miss him ’”’ said my friend, and I fired. At one time I could do some fairly smart shooting, but that was the best shot I ever mad» and Mant’s favourite young tabby lay dead on the path before us! George Mant was one of those very good fellows of whom they say in the bush—‘** My word, but he is a white man;” and so he is up to the present time. He has been blessed with a large family of girls and boys, but he has had a lot of bad luck, too, and still pluckily fights on against drought, ticks, and other disadvantages. When I started next morn- ing, a chestnut son of “ Cain” carried my pack, in place of the “‘ Sailor ’’ mare, and afterwards, on the station, he proved a very useful horse. Teebar station, which belonged to Mr. Eaton, was about three miles distant from Gigoomgan, but by visiting the last named place, I missed Teebar. My business took me to Degilbo, and I followed a track I had used a few months before, and which brought me into the Maryborough-Gayndah road, not far from the Bluff. It was a relief to reach Degilbo, though I suffered some days detention there. Most of the horses I had brought from New England I had sold before I went to Sydney. Those I retained were running up a gorge about three miles from the BY HON. A. NORTON, M.L.C. 99 station. These I got together so that I might not be further delayed when my business with Mr. Walsh had been com- pleted. Edward Mullett, who was at this time manager at Milton, came to Degilbo while I was there: this was as fortunate for me as it was agreeable, for he helped me to drive about a dozen spare horses when we started on. In due course, I parted with my very kind friends, the Walshes, Staying with them for a time, was good old Mrs. Brown, of Colstoun, on the Paterson River (Mrs. Walsh’s mother). and her youngest daughter, the wife of Dr. Walter Brown, of Parramatta ; they had come up for a few week’s visit. Starting soon after breakfast, Mullett and I jogged on quietly by a cross-country track to Stanton Harcourt, not particularly good country, and largely overgrown with gum saplings and wattle. It belonged to Mr. Corfield, but Mr. Spain was in charge at the time. We went on as far as Walla, and crossing the Burnett, claimed the hospitality of Mr. and Mrs. John Barker, who, not long before had bought out the former owner. Livingstone had latterly sold his Teningering station, and started North with his sheep in search of another run. The Walla house is beautifully situated on the left bank of the River. Immediately under the bank was a mass of columnar basalt in an upright position ; where the columns had broken away there were some well protected natural bathing holes. There is a similar outcrop in the bed of Baramba Creek, not far from Gayndah ; persons who travel that road by coach never forget the crossing of Baramba Creek. A similar columnar basaltic outcrop may be seen beside the road between Walla and Teningering. There were some fine orange trees in the garden at Walla, and some of these were still there when I visited the place a few years ago. The one object of which John Barker was specially proud, however, was his stockyard, which then was about finished. ‘‘ Jim’”’ Hobbs, a monster of strength, who erected it, afterwards came on to me, and put up the Rodd’s Bay yards. But John Barker must have the crack stockyard of the Burnett ! The round posts were enormous, and all the rest of the timber was proportionally large; the rails were so wide that they met, and formed a wooden wall in the clefts of which no man could even get toe-hcld. Cattle were more or less rowdy in those days, and the thought of work 100 NOTES OF TRAVEL ing them in a yard that could not be got out of in a hurry was not attractive to the hands who had to be so much amongst them. As for John Barker, he laughed at their fears, but one day he was doing the drafting in the lane, which was, if possible, more closely fitted than the rest of it ; a lively buck more than twelve months old took him from behind, and when John was helped over that fence, his language was out of the common ; the wound took some weeks tu heal, and gave him ample time to reconsider the question of closely-fitting rails. I am under the impression that foot holes had been cut in them before I next saw the yard. From Walla we rode on to Gin Gin, which, at that time, belonged to Messrs. A. and A. Brown; they bought it from William Forster, who afterwards became Premier of a New South Wales Ministry. A. P. Barton had bought from the Browns the country embracing the heads of Gin Gin Creek, and was still busy over his improvements. We struck the Kolan River about eight miles further on, and Munduran station, then owned by W. H. Walsh and his partners. Bernard Witt was in charge of it ; formerly it had belonged to James Landsborough, but he had moved on with his family to Raglan. The next station we came to was Kolongo, where resided William Harvey Holt, who afterwards moved North to Glen Prairie. Holt was the great horse authority in that locality, and there was no other who could sell a horse to so great advantage. The freedom with which he named scientifically every bone and muscle of a horse excited the admiration of all his friends. We all liked him, though his “ jaw-breakers ” were more than most fellows could under- stand. He was away from home when Mullett and I arrived there, but he had in charge a ‘“‘ supreme’ young man, who, from his conversation might have been thought to be the owner of the station, and a few others as well. He was really a “‘ jackaroo.” In these modern times the road northwards from Kolongo surmounts a rough range and crosses the Kolan at Toweran. In 1861, it kept a more easterly course, and struck the river at Wocogo station, which was then occupied by Huxham. Wocogo has disappeared and Toweran, some miles higher up the river, has taken its place. From this station the road ascends a low range, which, as a difficulty in the way of traffic, BY HON. A. NORTON, M.L.C. 101 would not count. It is really the Dawes Range, which separates the waters of the Kolan River from those of Baffle Creek. The first station North of Toweran, on the main northern road, is Warro, which for many years was occupied by my old friend, F. A. Blackman ; about 28 miles westward from it 1s Molangool. In 1860, Dr. Bingman occupied it, but a little later W. H. Gaden, who had been in partnership with “ Long” Ramsay, in Canoona, when the rush to that locality took place, succeeded the doctor. Thornhill, opposite to Warro, was about the same time occupied by Buchanan, who soon afterwards made way for Mr. James Glennie. North of this came three blocks of unoccupied country, belonging to Drs. Walter and Henry Brown; they were named Silex, Hex, and Goschen. Not very long afterwards, these were bought by Robertson Brothers, of Baffle Creek, and they exchanged them with Cox and Blomfield, of Miriam Vale, which adjoined them on the North, for a piece of country on Baffle Creek, between Miriam Vale and Taunton. Mullett and I did not get to Miriam Vale on this occasion ; we travelled eight or ten miles along the road from Warro towards Gladstone ; then turned to the left, and following what was known as Living’s track, crossed a range, which was decidedly rough, and dropped down on to the Boyne River at EKubobo. At this place, the brothers Living had sheep for a time, and George Living contrived to drive a bullock dray across by the track, which ever afterwards bore his name; or at any rate so long as it could be distinguished as a track. From Eubobo, we followed the Boyne down to Milton, where Mullett lived as manager ; two roads to Glad- stone were then in use, one by Riverstone, Sir Maurice (then Captain) O’Connell’s station, on the Boyne, the other by Barmundoo, where for a time, A. H. Brown (the British Lion) resided, thence by East Stowe, owned by old Robert Bell. This road I took. Had we followed the direct road from Warro, we should have passed Miriam Vale head station, and then through Rodd’s Bay, as yet unoccupied and which IT had just bought, crossing the Boyne sixteen miles from Gladstone, where that river is tidal. The distance I had travelled between Brisbane and Gladstone was about 350 miles. As soon as possible after arrriving at the latter place, I started out about 29 miles to the spot 1 had chosen on 102 NOTES OF TRAVEL Rodd’s Bay for the head station, and camped that night with Livingstone, who had removed kis sheep from Teningering on the Burnett. I gave him leave to shear them on my run, and thus had hin: as a neighbour for several weeks. He had a poor lot of men with him, and when they lost sheep, as they not unfrequently did, it was always attributed to the blacks, of whom I had seen scarcely any. The men seemed to suffer from what is sometimes called “blue funk,” and the climax was reached not long after I had got my own men out. One evening we heard some firing of guns and wondered whatever it all meant ; but we took matters calmly, never dreaming of danger. Next morning a tell-tale man let us into the secret. One lot of sheep which were camped some distance from the rest would not settle down for the mght as usual, so all hands. went over from the main camp taking their rifles and their fears with them, and they probably contributed to the con- fusion. After a time there was a cry, “ the blacks are sneak- ing on us!” There were the firesticks they carried, moving hither and thither, in a small scrubby gully, so bang, bang, went rifles and revolvers; otherwise there was no noise, nor was an attack made by the niggers, and the sheep were driven with haste to the main camp. After all, it turned out that the alarm was caused by fireflies, of which there were plenty about the banks of the watercourses ! Joseph Wilson, who has just completed a new house at Gin Gin, came on to me, and erected my house, and out- houses. His wife did the cooking, and such other domestic work work as was needed—first of all while my homestead consisted of a couple of bark humpies, and later on, when the more pretentious buildings were sufficiently advanced to be occupied. Few people have been blessed with a more excellent couple than Joe Wilson and his wife. Wilson was a good carpenter and builder, and needed no watching ; he was a thoroughly reliable man. Mrs. Wilson had a special horror of dirt, and a bark humpy, with an earthen floor, was a model of cleanliness while under her direction. She made yeast for her own use, and her bread was the pride of the district, while nobody who ate the food she cooked was ever known to suffer from indigestion ! Between Ipswich and Gladstone T passed only two hotels, that between the Norths and Mount BY HON. A. NORTON, M.L.C. 103 Brisbane, and that at Nanango ; the bush hospitality which was common in those days supplied such accommodation as travellers needed. On this journey I made some new friends in their native quarters. On the range between Colinton and Taromeo for the first time I saw bunya-bunyas growing where Nature planted them. The bunya grows, I believe, in a natural state, only on what is known as the Bunya Mountain and its spurs. We have lately been told that it has been found on one of our Northern rivers. I take leave to doubt this. Many years ago—probably five and thirty—I was told by Mr. MacMillan, of Airdmillan, that he had seen trees very similar to bunyas on the Herbert River ; when he inspected them closely, however, he found his first supposition was incorrect. Mr. MacMillan is a careful observer, and I think his statements may be relied on. The trees I saw between Colinton and Taromeo were somewhat disappointing, and could not be compared for girth, height, or beauty of form to those on the Bunya Mountains. On the Kolan River, near Munduran, there were many fine-grown scented gum trees (Kucalyptus citriodora) In the evening, when the dew is falling, or in the early morning, the air beneath these is strongly scented. On Granite and Baffle Creeks, which unite close to Miriam Vale, and on Coliseum Creek, which flows into them, there are vast numbers of Moreton Bay chestnuts (castanospermum australe), many of them grow to a consider- able height. In the scrubs of the Lower Burnett, I ought to mention the bottle tree (sterculia rupestris) which grows to a large size ; I had previously seen splendid specimens of this tree on the Dawson River. Near Miriam Vale station there are numbers of Leichhardt trees (Sarcocephalus cordatus) ; one very fine one close to the station house. Some of these grow on Rodd’s Bay also. On one creek on Miriam Vale Barklya syringifolia was flowering profusely, every branch being loaded with masses of golden blossom. I may also mention the fig (Fzcews glomerata), the pink fruit of which hang on the stem and branches in masses lke bunches of erapes, and are inhabited by dozens of curious flies. The above are the more conspicious of the trees I had been previously unacquainted with. I ought not, however, to omit all notice of the umbrella tree (Brassaia actinophylla) 104 NOTES OF TRAVEL which grows freely on some of the pebbly creeks, and as freely on the crags which occassionally surmount precipitous hills. Numerous smaller plants, some of them of great beauty, grow through all this coast country. On some future occasion I may go more fully into this subject. I need scarcely refer to the quadrupeds, birds, or insects of these districts, since they are common to most of the Queensland coast country south of the tropics. In the foregoing notes, I have not attempted to give the distances from place to place. I have trusted solely to my memory in what I have described, but could not trust it as to distances ; moreover, bush roads are very often changed as the country becomes better known, and distances which might be correctly stated in respect to roads more than forty years ago, would be altogether misleading if appiled to the roads at the present time. All this country has changed wonderfully since 1861, for as the poet sings :— “All things must change To something new, to something strange ; Nothing that is can pause or stay. The moon will wax, the moon will wane, The mist and cloud will turn to rain, The rain to mist and eloud again, To-morrow be to-day.” DESCRIPTION OF A TYPICAL QUEENSLAND LAGOON, (THe Enoccera RESERVOIR, NEAR BrisBaNe) Wirn Merruops oF RENDERING THE WATER FIT FOR A Town Suppty. By HARDOLPH WASTENEYS, Anatyst to BrigsBpANE Boarp oF WATERWORKS. Read before the Royal Society of Queensland, 5th August, 1905. BEFORE commencing this paper and in order to prevent misunderstanding, I would like to state that I claim to be neither a Biologist—in the sense in which the term is used in connection with water—nor yet a Bacteriologist, consequently, in the descriptions and lists of the biological contents of the water which accompany this paper I have confined myself to the enumeration of the genera only, as the determination of the species is, as all know, a task which may only be success- fully accomplished by experts who have made a life study of the subject. Similarly, in the department of Bacteriology, I have confined myself entirely to quantitative estimations. The lagoon: under consideration, which is situated near Brisbane, is an artificial one, and was formed by throwing an embankment across the bed of a creek, the upper waters of which it receives. It has been in existence for nearly forty years. Its watershed has an area of 8,295 acres, for the most part heavily timbered, and covered in some places with fairly dense undergrowth. The catchment area is not fenced, but the lagoon itself is surrounded by a fence placed at a distance of 1 chain from the water’s edge. There are practically no human habita- tions on the watershed, but cattle roam all over it at will. H 106 TYPICAL QUEENSLAND LAGOON The banks of the lagoon are cleared of timber for a distance of about 8 chains from the water’s edge. There are several tributary creeks feeding the lagoon, but only two of any size. The area of the lagoon when full, is 186 acres, of which about one-third consists of shallows less than 13 feet deep at high water, that is, when the lagoon is full. The greatest depth of water is 55 feet, and the estimated total capacity is 1,000,000,000 gallons. The lagoon contains abundant growths of common water weeds which Mr. Bailey, the Colonial Botanist, has been good enough to identify, and a list of which will be found in the Appendix I to this paper. Many of these weeds die, and rise to the surface whenever any considerable and sudden rise of water takes place in the lagoon. Some of these plants are undoubtedly responsible for a proportion of the colour and odour of the water. Mr. G. ©. Whipple, in his work on the “ Microscopy of Drinking Water,” states that Myriophyllum, of which there is abundant growth in this lagoon, “‘ possesses a natural odour that is strongly vege- table, and at times almost fishy,” this odour is imparted to the water whenever the plants die or are crushed and broken. I have myself observed this, and I have also found this plant to cause a sensible increase in the colour of water in which it was placed. There is practically no flow of water in the creeks feeding the lagoon except after heavy rain. There are many pools more or less deep in the bed of the main creek in which abundant growths of Spirogyra, etc., exist after dry weather has continued for a short length of time. These growths are washed into the lagoon whenever any flow of water takes place in the creek. The average total rainfall at ie lake per annum, for the past five years, was 33.93 inches. (For 1904-5 rainfall see Appendix IT.) The water discharged into the lagoon by the creeks is, tor the first day or so after heavy rain, highly charged with organic matter evidently of vegetable origin, and is also highly colcured, but after flowing for some little time it gradually improves in quality until, having run for, in some cases four days, the creek water is in some respects purer than the bulk of the water contained in the lagoon. (Appendix III.) BY HARDOLPH WASTENEYS. 107 In a lake of this type one of the most important factors m connection with its biological and chemical composition which we have occasion to enquire into is the period or periods during which the water in the lake is in a state of stagnation or circulation, these periods depend almost entirely on the temperature of the water throughout its depth at different times of the year. In colder climates there may be two periods of circulation of the water in a lake, but in a climate hke ours there can be ouly one unless indeed, the lake be over 200 feet deep when stagnation would probably be permaneni During the months between July and May, there is a difference of from 5 to 20 degrees Fahrenheit between the temperatures of the surface and bottom water in this lagoon, it is to be expected therefore that during that period the bottom layers of water are certain to remain at the bottom by virtue of their greater density. This period is termed the * period of stagnation.” It causes several changes to take place in the character of the water at the bottom of the lagoon. The most conspicuous change is that of colour. Whilst the colouring matter in the water remaining at the surface is bleached by the action of the sun’s rays, that at the bottom grows gradually darker until, near the close of the stagnation period it has a decided opalescent turbidity and a rich brown colour, which deepens after being drawn to the surface. This colour is probably due to the presence of iron in the water, as well as to the sedimentation of the organic matter, which is much increased in the bottom layers during this period. The oxygen dissolved in the bottom water disappears during stagnation, owing to its absorption by the organic matter, putrefaction takes place, and the water acquires an offensive odour, in which the familiar sulphuretted hydrogen plays a large part. The effect of stagnation on the microscopic organisms is no Jess remarkable, owing to the absence of oxygen and light little life exists at greater depths than 20 feet. but the water at the bottom acquires an abundant supply of food material, both organic and inorganic, suitable fer microscopic life. Towards the end of May, however, on the approach of colder weather, the decrease in temperature at the surface increases the density of the water there, gradually leading to a complete vertical circulation of the water in the lagoon, 108 TYPICAL QUEENSLAND LAGOON until, about the middle of June, the temperature of the water is practically the same throughout all depths. About that time stagnation once more commences, and continues throughout the remainder of the year, until May comes round once more, when the process is repeated. (Appendices IV and XIII.) During the period of circulation the character of the water at the various depths is completely changed, the colour of the water becomes uniform throughout all depths, conse- quently the colour at the surface increases ; indeed I have found it on one occasion, viz., 5th June, 1995, to be slightly darker at the surface than at the bottom; dissolved oxygen is now found at all depths, and the microscopic organisms are evenly distributed, whist the food material before mentioned is carried to the upper regions where, with light and oxygen, the orgarisms are able to utilise it. The following figures ilustrate in a striking manner the difference between the condition of the water during stagnation, and during the period of circulation : | DURING THE STAGNATION PERIOD. || DURING THR CIRCULATION PERIOD. May 19rH, 1905. ‘May 5TH, 1905|| Jone 5TH, 1905. | Jone 20, 1905 | : : | Dissolved : Dissolved Colour Units. Oxygen. Colour Units. Oxygen. ree | | per cent. | per cent. || Red. | Yellow. of Red. | Yellow. | of Saturation. | | Saturation. | aaa || aaa Petra Surface (i ge Be ae Blas 58.5 || 3.0 10.0 103.0 Thirty Feet || | nil. | 60.8 Bottom (45ft)} 42.0 | 32.0 |) 2a 8.0 (Colour determined by Lovibond Tintometer.) It will be seen therefore that in this lagoon, containing as it does an excessive amount of organic matter, the occurence of these phenomena produces no improvement in the quality of the water, and is in fact a large factor in the process of deterioration. Before leaving this subject, liowever, on which one might talk all night and concerning which much has been written, I might remark that stagnation is productive of no disagreeable effects when the lake bottom contains no organic matter, anc that it does not occur in shallower lakes such as those only 10 to 15 feet deep, for in such lakes thermal stratification hardly exists. BY HARDOLPH WASTENEYS. 1c9 Quantitative estimations of the bacteria in this water have been made at irregular intervals since November, 1904. As usual with waters of this class the numbers are com- paratively small, averaging about 400 per cubic centimeter when grown on neutral agar medium. (Appendix V.) Sufficient analyses have not been made to show the seasonal variations in the different micro-organisms in this lagoon water, it is noted, however, that the diatom Synedra, and the chlorophyll alga Protococcus are always more plentiful after rain. Comparatively large areas of a scum consisting for the most part of Anaboena, Protococcus and Oscillaria float on the surface of the lagoon during the summer months, and are found generally near the edges where they have been blown by the prevailing wind. The protozoa Peridinium is also very plentiful, and is found in large numbers associated with the scum before mentioned. A micro-organism which I consider to be a variety of Protococcus is the predominating organism in this lagoon , it may be seen at all times of the year, but particularly in summer and after heavy rains, distributed throughout the surface as a bright green powder of irregularly shaped particles. This organism, which I have not yet been able to identify satisfactorily, but specimens of which Mr. Bailey has kindly forwarded to Professor Borge, in Germany, for determination, is most obnoxious when plentiful; it has not yet given trouble in the lagoon under discussion, but in a similar and not far distant lagoon it became, some months ago, so bad that the water was of a bright green colour throughout, and at the edges in some places the organism was so plentiful as to impart to the water the consistency of mud. The odour given off by this organism was so bad that a workman, the nature of whose employment required that he reside near the lake, asked for and was actually supplied with a considerable quantity of disinfectant for use around his residence whilst the lake was being emptied. Spirogyra grows abundantly during the summer in the shallow water round the edges of the lake. When this lagoon water is passed through iron pipes under low pressure, abundant growths of the Bryozoa, Plumatella soon become attached to the interior surface 110 TYPICAL QUEENSLAND LAGOON of the pipes. It is found in active growth and decay nearly all the year round, but about the autumn decay is usually more marked, whilst is is less noticeable in the winter. The growth extends at times for about 5 inches from the iron to which it is attached, forming a dense mat in the lower 2 inches. Statoblasts are found in the Plumatella all the year round, but are most plentiful when the decay is most marked. Freshwater sponge and Hydra are always found associated with the Plumatella. The smell from this Bryozoa and Sponge when in process of decay is most offensive, and is a serious cause of odour in the water when it is passed through iron pipes. I might here remark that these organisms will not grow in the water which is produced in the methods about to be described. (Appendices VI. and XII.) I find it difficult, in fact almost impossible to describe satisfactorily the odour of this water; it may be described in a vague manner as a mixture of Vegetable—Salt Marshy— Grassy and Fishy—each item predominating at different times of the year. During long periods of drought the odour is almost absent, and it is I think most offensive when it has been in contact with decaying Plumatella. As regards chemical compostion I find the water of this lagoon to be comparatively constant throughout the year, a list which I have prepared giving the monthly averages of weekly analyses of samples drawn 5 feet below the surface since May, 1904, shows the organic matter as indicated by Albuminoid Ammonia determination, to have been highest in March, when it was averaged .367 parts per million for the month, the lowest figure obtained being for January, when it averaged.260 p.p.m. Nitrates were absent through- out the year, whilst Nitrites were only occasionally searched for, but never found present. (Appendix VII.) In colour the samples varied considerably, the highest figures being obtained in May and June during the period of of vertical circulation in the lagoon, the variation being from 52 on the platinum scale in June, 1904, to 20 on the same scale in January, 1905. The Chlorine figure was practically constant throughout the year, being about 34 parts per million or roughly 2.4 grains per gallon. The hardness of this water is very low, being about 3 degrees on Clarke’s scale. BY HARDOLPH WASTENEYS. lll In spite of the comparatively large amount of organic matter which it contains this water is not by any means an ‘acid’ water, except by virtue of its “ Free Carbonic Acid,” that is to say it contains no acidity due to “ organic ” acids. In no case would any of the samples obtained from the lagoon have been considered suitable for a town supply if only on account of the amount of organic matter indicated by the figures quoted. Having thus briefly reviewed the Physical, Biological and Chemical conditions obtaining in this lagoon, I now come to the second portion of my paper, viz., the description of methods of rendering this water fit for a town supply. Before commencing on this subject I would like to make one more disclaimer. I have had no opportunity of testing the processes about to be described on anything like a large scale, the results having been obtained on small filters, the largest being 76 square feet in area, and yielding nearly 5,000 gallons of filtrate per 24 hours. Nevertheless, the greatest care has been taken in every case to imitate as closely as possible the conditions which would exist were the filter an acre or more in area, and I am confident that the results obtained on this experimental scale closely approximate to those which would be obtained on the larger scale required for a town supply. It may be well at this stage to consider briefly the various methods in use for securing a pure supply of water from a source of this nature. First there is the method sometimes adopted of cleaning the watershed and also the lagoon which contains the water collected from it. This is a most desireable proceeding, though there exists some doubt as to the permanency of the benefits to be derived from cleansing the bottoms of such lakes, but time does not permit of going into the question in detail here. With smaller lakes it is sometimes the practice in warm climates to roof them over entirely, thus preventing the growth of the various forms of microscopic life which are responsible for a large portion of the obnoxious odours and tastes in the water. Water stored in this fashion, collected of course from a clean watershed, but which before roofing 112 TYPICAL QUEENSLAND LAGOON the lake has been a constant trouble on account of vegetable growths is said to remain “clear and pure as crystal, and nearly as pure as distilled water; this statement is made after 30 years experience by Mr. C. Eliot, City Superintendent of the Spring Valley Waterworks, of San Francisco, in a letter to the Committee of the American Waterworks Association, on Animal and Vegetable Growths affecting water supplies, 1890. When a reservoir was too large to permit of the con- struction of a roof over it, the same object is said to have been accomplished by the construction of a large raft which floated on the surface of the water, and from under the centre’ of which the supply was drawn. Of other methods of purifying lake waters in situ the most important is that devised by Dr. G. T. Moore, and which is reported to have been successfully used in several lakes in America. The method consists essentially in the addition of sulphate of copper to the water in the lake with the object of destroying the micro-organisms contained therein. The method will be dealt with later on in this paper. In nearly all other methods the purification of the water is effected outside the lagoon. These methods comprise—Settlement in covered basins, either by simple subsidence or subsidence aided by coagulants such as lime or alum, and with or without the use of screens, Sterilization by distillation, which is as a rule too costly to be used in conneetion with a city supply, and lastly Filtra- tion. ; Filtration is the most important of these methods and the most generally used. It may be divided into two great sections—Plain Sand Filtration and Mechanical Filtration. The first section includes all sand filters, both continuous and intermittent in action, which depend for their efficacy on the power of the sand alone to retain and remove suspended matter in the water, and on oxidation effected by the life processes of bacteria. These filters are generally operated | at slow rates, such as from 14 to 5 million gallons per acre per day. In the second section, I include all those methods of filtration in which sand filters are used in conjunction with coagulants and all filter presses of canvas or other porous BY HARDOLPH WASTENEYS. Vis: material such as the fused mixture of glass and sand, used in the Fischer Plaque filter. Filters under this section are neatly always operated at extremely rapid rates amounting in some cases to 130,000,000 gallons per acre per 24 hours. There are methods of filtration which do not come under either of these heads, but all the more important processes at present in use on a large scale are included. As I have already indicated, the water of this lagoon is objectionable for a town supply owing to its appearance, colour, smell and taste, but apart from these aesthetic con- siderations, water of this description is to some people positively harmful, causing when imbibed in any quantity various stomachic complaints. The purification of waters of this class is generally consiedred to be one of the difficult problems which Water- works Engineers and Chemists have to deal with. In the experimental purification of this water, the fol- lowing methods have been tested :— (a) Plain continuous filtration in filters constructed en- tirely of sand, with, of course, underdrains, and in filters whose sections consist of layers of sand, ashes and crushed quartz of various grades. (b) Plain intermittent sand filtration. (c) Mechanical filtration, with lime and alum as coaga- lants. (d) The Anderson Process, which comes under my heading of Mechanical Filtration. A method of water purification has been tried which, strictly speaking comes under neither of the heads mentioned, but which may for practical purposes be described as slow, downward, intermittent filtration. This ingenious process was suggested by Mr. Arthur Morry, of this City, who was at that time District Supervisor of Public Works, and in that capacity devoted a considerable amount of time and thought to the subject of water purification. A combination of this process and ordinary sand filtration was also experimented with. One more process has been tested, namely, Dr. Moore’s method of removing Algae and Bacteria from water supplies by means of copper sulphate. Continuous SAND FILTRATION. Although no less than five different filters have been used in this investigation, it is sufficient for the end in view to 114 TYPICAL QUEENSLAND LAGOON consider in anything like detail the results obtained from but one of them, a filter whose section is composed entirely of sand. This filter has an area of 25 square feet, and a section as follows :— Fine sand at top of bed (effective size 335 m.ms.) 41 inches Underdrains composed of various grades of gravel 12 ,, Total depth of material Be exe jouer Oo mane The depth of water over the sand was 41 inches, whilst the maximum loss of head was 91 inches. The method of operating the filter is as follows :—It is fed from below with filtered water until it attains a depth of about 6 inches above the surface of the sand, unfiltered water is then fed on to the bed from above, and filtration commenced as soon as the water in the filter is 2 feet over the sand. For the greater portion of the time during which this filter was in operation, water was discharged on to the bed through an aerator, which divided it into a comparatively fine spray. The filter was allowed to run until it became so choked with organic matter that a “head” or pressure ot 7 feet 10 inches was necessary to force the water through the sand at the required rate. The feed water was then turned off, the sand allowed to drain, and the surface removed for a depth of about half-an-inch. The filter was then restarted as before detailed. The period between the times when scraping the surface to remove clogging becomes necessary is termed a “run,” and varies according to the nature of the applied water. The average length of run for this filter during the time it was in operation, was over 70 days, showing clearly that the sand used for the filter bed was not by any means too fine, as this is a comparatively long run for a filter of this type. This filter remained in operation for 183 days, the average rate of filtration maintained throughout that period was exactly 2 million gallons per acre per 24 hours. Chemical and Physical analyses of the unfiltered water and effluent were made weekly, and a monthly average of the percentage reduction of organic matter and colour, is given in Appendix VIII. The average reduction of organic matter, as shown by the Albuminoid Ammonia determinations throughout the whole period of operation was more than one-half, whilst the reduc- BY HARDOLPH WASTENEYS. 115 tion in colour was 66 per cent. of the yellow, and 93;per cent. of the red units determined by means of the Lovibond Tintometer. The number of bacteria per cubic centimeter in thé effluent and unfiltered water were also determined from time to time, the average result of nine determinations showing 462 per c.c. in the unfiltered water, whilst only 7 per c¢.c. appeared in the effluent, which is equivalent to a per centage reduction of 983}. Throughout the whole time the appearance of the effluent was good, its taste was excellent, ‘no odour was noticeable, and it was to the ordinary observer practically colourless. The sand used in this filter was of poor quality, being the result of recent decomposition of granite, it was very friable and exceedingly difficult to clean, and even when washed with apparent thoroughness still con- tained a good deal of organic matter. Had better sand, such as that obtained from the Brisbane River bed been used, the results from this filter would doubtless have been still better. I have described this filter in preference to the other sand filters mentioned, because it is the most typical of the group. Even better results were obtained from one of these filters in whose section ashes played an important part, but this improvement was proved to be due not to the ashes, but to the finer grade of sand in the surface layer. The last mentioned filter contained besides cinders and crushed quartz, 12 inches of sand on the surface of the bed, which had an effective size of -28 m.m.s. The sand used was of superior quality to that in the first-mentioned filter composed entirely of sand, which probably accounts for the better chemical results obtained. The Bacteriological results were however not quite so good, probably on account of the fact that the depth of the sand layer in this filter was less than in the former filter. The length of run or period between scrapings was also not so good as for the sand filter, averag- ing only 31 days. this was to be expected on account of the finer grade of sand employed. During the warmer weather and on account of the in- creased bacterial activity occasioned thereby, it was found that the removal of the organic matter and colour by these filters was much greater than during the colder months of the year. Fora similar reason the amount of dissolved oxygen 116 TYPICAL QUEENSLAND LAGOON found in the effluents of these filters at the same period was very small, the oxygen in the applied water being practically exhausted before the water reached the outlet of the filter. As the amount of dissolved oxygen in the lagoon water at this time of the year is comparatively low, aerators were fixed at the inlets of both filters. These had the effect of practically saturating the applied water with oxygen, increas- ing the amount from 75 per cent. of the possible quantity to about 98 per cent. Notwithstanding the increased amount in the applied water, however, the oxygen still continued to be almost entirely exhausted in its passage through the filters, though a slight increase took place in the amount con- tained in the effluents. In order to investigate this phenomenon, arrangements were made whereby samples of water might be drawn from different positions in the sand bed. Several determinations of the number of bacteria and the amount of dissolved oxygen in the water ai different depths in the sand were made. It was expected that the rates of decrease of bacteria and dissolved oxygen would be somewhat similar, or that the decrease in oxygen would cease in those portions of the filter which contained practically no bacteria; this was expected on the assumption that the decrease in the amount of oxygen dissolved was entirely due to its consumption by the bacteria in the process of oxidation of the organic matter in the water. It was found that the bacteria were practically all removed in the upper 6 inches of the sand, but that whilst about one-half of the total absorption of oxygen by the filter took place in the first § inches, the amount continued to de- crease at a fairly regular rate throughout the remaining depths of sand where the water at the same time contained prac- tically no bacteria | am not able to satisfactorily explain this phenomenon, but intend if possible to investigate further. INTERMITTENT SAND FILTRATION. Following a line of thought suggested by the last mentioned experiments, an intermittent filter was constructed with a view to testing the effect of more efficiently aerating the sand bed. The filter is 76 square feet in area, and is constructed on the lines of the City filter at Lawrence, Massachusetts, in the United States of America. The bed BY HARDOLPH WASTENEYS. ahi by? of this filter is composed of 5 feet of sand of an effective size of -27 m.m.s., placed over underdrains of gravel and brick. The method of working is as follows :—Water is fed cn to the filter bed by means of a gutter placed along the centre of the filter 2 inches above the surface of the sand, no attempt is made to obtain any depth of water over the surface of the sand bed, so that the water flows almost directly through it in such a manner as to leave the greater portion of the surface dry. By this means the growth of algae on the surface of the sand which takes place in ordinary continuous sand filters is avoided, and the periods between the times when scraping becomes necessary are in consequence greatly increased. No water is fed on to the filter for a certain portion of every 24 hours, during which time the filter *s allowed to drain, and in this manner the sand bed is completely aerated every 24 hours. Two different periods of rest have been tried for considerable lengths of time in this filter, namely 8 hours and 4 hours, the former period, 8 hours, appears so far to give the best results. The cessation of work for such a large por- tion of the time naturally necessitates a greater rate of flow through the filter than is the case with ordinary sand filters, in order to accomplish the same amount of work for the 24 hours. Nevertheless, in spite of the increased rate, the reduction of colour and organic matter has been excellent, and the average reduction effected by this filter when working with a daily rest of 8 hours is distinctly better than that effected by any of the ordinary sand filters. The Bacterio- logical results from this filter are, however, not so good as those obtained from the ordinary sand filters, the average reduction effected being about 74 per cent. (Appendix IX.) We now come to the consideration of results obtained from filters of the type designed by Mr. Morry, which he describes as “ Biological Oxidising Beds.” Mr. Morry states that the idea of their construction was suggested by the “ Ducat ” and “* Stoddart ” beds used in sewage purification, and which are built up above the ground. . In brief the beds are composed of about 6 feet in depth of gravel, or coal, in varying grades ; in some of the filters these beds are so con- structed as to admit of side aeration, but the feature which is common to all is the method of delivering the un- filtered water on to the bed of the filter. This is done through 118 TYPICAL QUEENSLAND LAGOON an intermitter from which the water is discharged at intervals into the basin of a revolving sprinkler running on ball bear- ings, which distributes it reguiarly and evenly over the surface of the filter bed, through which it slowly percolates and flows into underdrains which lead into a small receiving vessel. The object of this method of discharging the effluent is to insure the thorough aeration of the water in its passage through the filters. That this has been effected is proved by the fact that even in the warmest weather the effluents from all but one of these filters contained over 95 per cent. of dissolved oxygen, and it has been proved that this aeration is chiefly produced during the passage of the water through the bed of the filter itself. Altogether 8 filters of this type were experimented with ; they may be divided into two classes, namely, those in which sand forms a portion of the filter bed and those in which the filter bed consists entirely of gravel. Two beds composed partly of sand were tried. In each of these the surface layer was composed of one foot in depth of sand, which was also of the same grade in each case. In one, the remainder of the filter bed was composed of coal in four layers of different grades, the coarsest with material 4 inch in diameter, being at the bottom, making the total depth of material 6 feet. In the other filter the remainder of the bed is composed of gravel in four layers, which are identical in grade and depth with those in the coal filter. The coal filter is fitted with means of securing both side and bottom aeration, whilst no provision for such aeration is made in the gravel bed. In consequence of this the amount of dissolved oxygen in the effluent from the coal bed is much greater than in the gravel bed effluent. The reduction of colour and organic matter however, was found to be much better in the gravel than in the.coal bed filter, whilst the bacterial purification was the same in each, the reduction effected being about 92 per cent. The effluent from this gravel and sand bed filter was in every way excellent, and the average results are equal to the best results obtained by sand filtration. The beds in which gravel alone was used, though effect- ing a remarkable reduction in the organic matter and colour of the water, are open to two objections, firstly—They take a considerable time to properly mature or get in working BY HAXDOLPH WASTENEYS. 119 order, and secondly—Even when matured, their effluents though bright and sparkling and in every other way desire- able, always contain a slight amount of matter in suspension, also as might be expected the reduction in the numbers of bacteria is comparatively poor. The consideration of the foregoing circumstances led to the conclusion that a combination consisting of a bed of this type worked in conjunction with an ordinary sand filter would give excellent results ; the rapid passage of the water through the gravel bed would it was thought effect a partial purifica_ tion of the water without removing all the suspended matter, at the same time aerating it, and thus rendering it in every way more amenable to treatment by the sand filter. It was decided to try the experiment. A small square gravel filter of the Morry type was constructed with an effective area of 12 square feet and a depth of 3 feet, a small sand filter was also constructed, having an area of 18 square feet, and composed of 2 feet of fine sand. These two filters were arranged so that the sand filter might be con- veniently fed with the effluent from the Morry filter. The sand filter was worked in the usual way, but with a depth of only 11 inches of water over the sand. Although only a poor quality of sand was used in this filter, the results of the analyses of its effluent have fully realised the expecta- tions before mentioned. When the combination was worked at a rate which gave a yield of water from the combined areas equal to that obtained from a similar area of the ordinary sand filters, the results obtained showed a _ reduction of organic matter, which was a distinct improvement on the results obtained from the best of the sand filters, and whilst the reduction of the numbers of bacteria was equally good. the amount of dissolved oxygen in the effluent averaged 66 per cent. of the possible quantity during a period in which the oxygen in the ordinary sand filter effluents averaged only 10 per cent. Having considered the results obtained by filtration of the water without the assistance of coagulants, the next method for consideration is that of Mechanical Filtration. The main object of mechanical filtration is to purify large volumes of water with a small amount of filtering material. In order to effectively do this the addition of a 120 TYPICAL QUEENSLAND LAGOON coagulant is generally necessary in order to remove a portion of the polluting matter before filtration, and to quickly form on the surface of the sand in the filter a coagulum which takes the place of the natural film produced by subsidence of suspended matter and bacterial action on the surface of a plain sand filter. This form of filtration is only “ mechanical ” in connection with the arrangements for agitating the sand during the frequent cleansing necessary, and for the regular dosing of the applied water with the solutions of coagulant Experiments conducted with the water of our lagoon showed the best proportion of coalguants to be 1 grain per gallon of alum and 43 grains per gallon of hme. Four hours settlement after adding the coagulants but prior to filtra- tion was also found to be necessary. Time does not permit of a detailed description of the experiments conducted with this process, which extended over a period of six months, I must content myself with stating that very excellent results were obtained throughout the experiments. For purposes of comparison, I have constructed tables showing the average composition of the effluent of the mechanical filter for a period of three months, during which the best results were obtained at a rate of filtration equal to 104 million gallons per acre per day. For purposes of comparison, I have also calculated the average com-- position of the effluent from the intermittent plain sand filter before described during a _ similar period of three months, whilst operating at an average rate per day of 2.23 million gallons per acre, and a rest interval of 8 hours in every 24. I have also calculated in each case the reduces tion of organic matter effected in the same period. This shows the percentage reduction of organic matter, as indicated by the albuminoid ammonia figures to be roughly 58 in the case of the intermittent plain sand filter, against 56 in the case of the mechanical filter, although the average albuminoid ammonia contents of the plain sand _ filter effluent was .136 parts per million, as against .123 parts per million in the mechanical filter. It is true also that the best result obtained by mechanical filtration was better than the best result obtained from the plain intermittent sand filter, but in view of the decided BY HARDOLPH WASTENEYS. Lon predjudice which exists against the use of alum in con- nection with the purification of a water supply, whether this predjudice is justified or not, I venture to assert that the comparison 1s all in favour of plain sand filtration, especi- ally when it is considered that the average results compared, are not the best results obtained from plain sand filtration, though unfortunately I have no better figures available from observations conducted throughout a similar period. (Appendix X.) The next method for consideration is Anderson’s Pro- cess. This process comes under my heading of Mechanical Filtration, though it has not the objectionable feature of the method just described, namely the use of alum as a coagulant. The process in brief is as follows :—Metallic iron, in the form of cast iron borings or steel punchings is placed in an iron cylinder, through which the water passes on its way to the sand filters. This cylinder is so arranged that by its slow rotation the iron is continually lifted and showered down through the water, which is being passed at a moderate speed through the cylinder. Air also is introduced. By means of this contrivance a small quantity of iron is dissolved in the water through the agency of the carbonic acid contained therein. This iron is dissolved in the form of ferrous carbonate, which on coming into contact with the air is oxidised and precipitated as ferric hydrate in particles more or less coarse, according to the nature of the water. This precipitate settles rapidly, carrying down with it and possibly oxidising the organic matter in the water, and at the same time removing the bacteria also. Subsequently the presence of this flocculent precipitate in the water permits of its rapid and efficient filtration through a simple sand filter. The use of this process for the purification of our lagoon was suggested to me by Mr. Parkinson, a well-known civil engineer of this city, who was kind enough to lend me a copy of the proceedings of the Institution of Civil Engineers containing a paper by Messrs. Chadwick and Blount, on the results of their experience with this method as a means of purifying the waters of lakes similar to ours in Mauritius and South Africa. The results described in that paper were so very good that it was determined to try the method en our lagoon water. I 122 TYPICAL QUEENSLAND LAGOON I regret to say that I am unable to describe the results of experiments with this method on anything but a laboratory scale, but the results thus simply obtained are so very excellent as to warrant the assumption that if tried on a larger scale, an effluent would be obtained which would easily excel the best results obtained by any of the methods I have just described, at the same time requiring a very much smaller area of sand bed, on account of the much greater rapidity with which the water may be efficiently filtered after treatment in this manner. (Appendix XI.) One more system of water purification remains to be mentioned before I conclude, namely Dr. Moore’s method of destroying and preventing the growth of algae and bacteria in water supplies. The numerous experiments with this method and our lagoon water, which continued without cessation during a period of three months, thoroughly confirm the results obtained in America in similar lakes by Dr. Moore, or under his direction. The method used for the distribution of copper sulphate throughout the lake is to tow it in coarse bags behind boats, in this manner it is stated that 100 lbs. of the salt can be dis- tributed in 1 hour. The toxicity of copper sulphate is so great that on one occasion when experimenting with so small a proportion of the salt as 1 to 8 million of lagoon water, only a few protozoa remained in the water after treatment, whilst untreated water which had been standing under exactly similar conditions, contained at the end of the experiment as many as 1,320 organisms per cubic centimeter. The satisfactory fact was also noted that the organisms which are most objectionable and most plentiful in this lagoon, showed the greatest sensitivity to the sulphate of copper. From the results of the experiments, I think it is safe to conclude that a strength of solution of 1 part of copper sulphate to from 8 to 10 million parts of water is sufficiently strong to effectively remove the obnoxious algae from this water, this proportion stated in other terms is equivalent to llb. of copper sulphate in every 800,000 to 1,000,000 gallons of water. I consider also, that if this salt is added BY HARDOLPH WASTENEYS. 123 to the lagoon water during the stagnation period before mentioned, a still smaller amount of the salt would be necessary on account of the fact that organisms exist to any great extent during that period only in the upper 15 feet of water, whilst it is probable that the stratification of the water by reason of its varying density would help to maintain the solu- tion in the upper layers of a sufficient strength and for a sufficiently long period to enable it to do its work among the algae; and it is to be remembered also that in the surface layers of water where the algae are most abundant, the solution will in any case owing to the method of applica- tion, be for a short period much stronger than one to eight million. My experiments also proved that when solutions of the strength named were used, no copper could be detected in the water three days after its addition, although the test used would easily have detected the presence of 1 part of copper sulphate in 25 million parts of water. As this pro- portion is equivalent to 1 part of metallic copper in 100 million parts of water, it may be considered I think that all the copper is eliminated by precipitation. In the majority of these experiments with copper sulphate, 43 gallons of water were used, the containing vessel being glass in nearly every case. Small fish were invariably present, and in no case suffered any apparent inconvenience. It is impossible here to go into the results obtained in these experiments in anything like detail, and it is sufficient to state that the results indicate that the method could be successfully applied to a water of the type under considera- tion, nevertheless although the copper sulphate treatment is a most valuable remedy for the unpleasant odours and tastes, and might be advantageously applied where no other method of purification exists, or in conjunction with other methods, it does not remove the colour and dissolved organic matter, and only removes one of the causes of colour and organic contamination, consequently it cannot be said to remove the necessity for filtration. In conclusion I may state that nearly every one of the methods I have described for the purification of this lagoon water yields a product which would be received with delight 124 TYPICAL QUEENSLAND LAGOON if delivered to consumers by the pipes of any water system in Australia. Not only is the purified lagoon water excellent for drinking purposes, but it is also eminently suitable for other uses ; its softness and freedom from colour rendering it especially desirable for laundry work and steam raising. It is evident from the results of these investigations that the purification of waters of this type is not by any means the impossibility which tradition has taught us to imagine it. In the course of these investigations, I have frequently found it necessary to obtain the advice of several of my friends, better versed than myself in various phases of this subject, and I seize this opportunity of expressing my grat- itude to these and all others who have rendered me assist- ance. Appanpix I. LIST OF AQUATIC PLANTS IN LAGOON. Names Suppriep py F. M. Batuny, F.L.8., Cotomran BorTanist. Utricularia flexuosa. Hydrilla verticillata. Myriophyllum verrucosum, Myriophyllum variaefolium. Jussiaea repens. Ottelia ovalifofia. Marsilea Brownii. Kelipta alba. Cyperus exaltata. Polygonum lapathifolium, Polygonum attenuatum. Limnanthemum indicum. Nymphza gigantea. Nymphwa. flava. Azolla rubra BY HARDOLPH WASTENEYS. 125 AppENnpix II. RAINFALL AT LAGOON, 1904-1905. Inches Month Ending June 1904 af Ets ais 0.16 July ¥ Me Ae Ba 1.89 August - a aC A .61 September 41 October - BBY) November 35 24 December 34 January 1905 ONnNwonnrKo QO oo February sO). 18 March 5 09 April cf io 3¢ an 74 May 1D on aa dc 1.25 Yearly total 32.06 ApPENDIXx III CHEMICAL AND PHYSICAL ANALYSES OF MAIN CREEK AND LAGOON WATERS. No. oF ANALYSIS: . Parts per Million No I No 2 No 3 No 4 Total Solids .. oe 150. 185. 114.3 107.1 Total Solids in Suspension Uo 50. 7.2 el Chlorine AS oe 35.7 34.3 33.6 37.1 Free Ammonia : 04 .025 trace 015 Albuminoid (Total) .. .305 .340 .195 .245 do. do. (in solution) .235 .295 .185 .205 Oxygen Consumed in 15 Mins. at 90° Fahrenheit 3.40 5.24 3.01 1.38 do. do. in 4 hours 8.07 9.46 6.98 2.72 Nitrogin existing as Nitrates Nil Nil Nil Nil Turbidity (Silica Scale) .. 15.0 30.0 10.0 5.00 Odour Warm, Odour is of Ss decaying vegetable ei oa strong decided pe 2 matter Od a3 Colour (with Hazen’s tubes) 114. 142.0 110. 26. Colour, Lovibond Tinto- meter Red (Units) 4.4 6.2. 3.0 1.0 Yellow ,, 2 16.8 9.2 oil Awnatysis, No. 1, 15/1/05. Water from Main Creek entering lagoon after creek had been running one day in slight flood, rainfall for previous 24 hours 5.37 inches. Anatysis No. 2, 17/1/05. Water from Main Creek entering lagoon after creek had been running two further days slightly stronger than on 15/1/05. Rain- fall for previous 48 hours 0.49 inches. Awnatysis, No. 3, 18/1/05. Water from Main Creek entering lagoon after creek had been running one further day less strongly than on 17/1/05. Rainfall for previous 24 hours 2.3 inches. Anatysis, No. 4, 18/1/05. Water from lagoon at outlet. 126 TYPICAL QUEENSLAND LAGOON APPENDIX LV. TEMPERATURE OF WATER IN THE LAGOON. DEGREES FAHRENHEIT. Average Daily 1903-1904. 1904-1905. Temperature per Month. Surface. Bottom. Surface. Bottom. June a se 58.2 56.5 58.7 58.1 July < - a 57.8 56.8 56.4 54.2 August .. es S 59.9 57.1 59.3 55.2 September - at 65.0 59.9 64.4 56.2 October .. ay bi 69.9 58.0 71.0 57.3 November ae nc fBjel 58.9 77.0 58.6 December ce Ae 79.0 59.9 78.0 59.0 January .. as is 78.7 60.6 78.7 59.6 February.. oe re 17.2 61.0 78.8 59.2 March .. us a 75.9 61.4 717.2 60.5 April i) 2: eB et 69.8 62.0 72.6 61.0 May a Be ad 65.6 61.8 65.9 58.2 Maximum temperature for above period .. 83.0 63.5 86 62 Date: ssc ae Me 21/1/04 May’04 3/1/05 April, 04, Minimum temperature for above period .. 53.0 55.0 54.0 54.0 Date .. - -- 16/7/03 June,’03 4/7/05 ~— July, ’04, APPENDIX V. TABLE SHOWING THE BACTERIAL CONTENTS OF THE SURFACE LAGOON WATER ON DIFFERENT DATES DURING 1904-1905. Date of Analysis. Bacteria per C.C. 28th November, 1904 3% ee Lt oe 130 5th December, 1904 bee a Be e 150 12th December, 1904 de ae Ne oe 170 19th December, 1904 = ing ar ad 130 2nd February, 1905 és rE a iA 1100 8th February, 1905 se a os BA 375 16th February, 1905 Hs é3 - t 350 2lst February, 1905 ) contained scum from 270,000 3rd March, 1905 J surface { 8775 8th March, 1905... sf e. ae? oe 600 30th May, 1905... oe A es Be 275 15th June, 1905... a. Sc “ 5% 110 23rd: June, 1905 .. po ie ae He 550 27th June, 1905... a5 de ae Sr 100 12th July, 1905... 170 Estimations made in Petri Dishes at Laboratory Temperature. Medium used 1.5 % Neutral Agar, with Beef Extract. N.B.—Optimum reaction with this water = Neutral BY HARDOLPH WASTENEYS. 127 APPENDIX VI. LIST OF MICRO-ORGANISMS. OTHER THAN BACTERIA, FOUND IN THE LAGOON WATER, DURING THE PERIOD APRIL, 1904— JULY, 1905. DIATOMACEAE :— = Synedra ulna, Synedra_ pulchella, Nitzschia, Nayicula, Asterionella, Tabellaria, | Cocconeis, Himantidium. CYANOPHYCEAE :— Anabaena, Gleocapsa, Coelosphaerium, Micro- cystis, Oscillaria, Aphanocapsa, Lyngbya. SCHIZOMYCETES :— Crenothrix, Beggiatoa. CHLOROPHYCEAE :— Chlorococcum, Protococcus, Haematococcus, Scene- desmus, Coelastrum, Cosmarium, Palmella, Pan- dorina, Raphidium, Staurastrum, Conferva, Desmidium, Closterium, Volvox, Kirchneriella, Micrasterias, Ophiocytium, Pediastrum, Stauro- genia, Ulothrix, Xanthidium, Ankistrodesmus, Arthrodesmus, Botryococcus, Docidium, Sphaerozosma, Gloeocystis, | Dictyosphaerium, Dimorphococcus, Hyalotheca, Penium, Spirogyra, Stigeoclonium, Chaetophora, Zygnema, Micro- spora. PROTOZOA :— Peridinium, Dinobryon, Ceratium, Cryptomonas, Mallomonas, Vorticella, Chlamydomonas, Coleps, Enchelys, Euglena, Nassula, Paramaecium, Phacus. ROTIFERA :— Anuraea, Rotifera, Asplanchna, Diglena, Triarthra, Notholea. CRUSTACEA :— Bosmina, Cyclops, Daphnia, Diaptomus, Sida. OTHER ORGANISMS AES Arearina, Anguillula, Hydra, Spon- a. Those italicised occasionally observed in large numbers. Plumatella, Hydra and Spongilla plentiful on wooden piles in lagoon, and in low pressure lengths of pipe. TYPICAL QUEENSLAND LAGOON 128 ‘aor sod sqred Oz wey} o10TT 41 se TOIsB090 tO Ajuo uo pure {uo god syed ¢ Jopun sosvo som ul svat JoyVM OY} Jo ApIPIqINy oeqy, ‘punoy Aue SBA SO OU UT ANG ‘SoRLQIN sv SuNstXe UoToIZINY LO poyso} AT[eUOIsVI00 SBA uoose, oY T—'q'N = A nrwtitnsos 098+ SOT GoGx GLG 009 OOtT SSRs 2g ars S grweee OsT Ost “mOIBANgBy | MOTTPA ‘9'¢ aad | yo"yus0 z0d sliajoe8g | ueshxoO PpoaTossiqy 2 al 2 4 CI op BD i] COrnronrr Co Oa “ped *sqluQ anolop ‘qUIVeIOXH) UO UMOTD x SIT LSS . co) 8ST ae roa 10 3°89 Ayn y's se BLS 8F'T 08" ae" £0" L'6S eune 6°88 “ 8S L9°T SLB" sie" GPO" $19 Avi SIT o'o8 ee 18'S 16°} 0ge" 298" 130° L'bL [dy FIT L's8 as 66°8 #1’ 99% 198" L10° T'6L ** Wore jaa o's uD LOS ¥9'T OLB 918" BF0" $'08 Aveniqe,q 80T 02 TL s 9L°% 98'T 0&6 09% PIO" L'6L ane 1 "ae ee BFS 08'T 183" 9ge" $20" L'8h Teqursce(y 1 PLE S 98'S 8'T Goa" 808" 850° o'08 ToquIeAoN Ze 296 e *9'% 98'T 698° 18% GEO" PCL 19q0300 ts QBS Ly 09° SIT 6c8" 668 880° GLO requieydag 18 L'2e & idird OFT 892" a1s 620° 8°89 “ysn3ny IF $68 oe 96° 6F'T GLB ¥6c Ts0° “LS “7 syne 9 S Go's 08'T 868" TS0° 9°LG eune OIT 0g TEN SL'S S8'T 863" ¥0° = ABW 8 2 : gy | ames] "ter0u: o ¢ a ; *sanoy F *urur || .gezur 2 : 5 BBs eee bal a “prouramngiy set rant “yO6T 3 = | ey MGSOXHEN Saar ie! a: S 2 ‘rye ‘30pog 38 F * = poumsuog ueshxO VRQ ‘HOTTA 19d sy1Bq "GO61 ‘ATOL OL FO6T ‘AVW ‘AOVANOS AHL MOTAT LAAT TATA NMVUC AALVYM NOODVT AHL JO SHSATVNV ATYAAM AO WOVAWAV ATHINOW ‘THA Ex1anaaay BY HARDOLPH WASTENEYS. 129 APPENDIX VIII. MONTHLY AVERAGES OF PER CENTAGE REDUCTION IN ORGANIC MATTER, COLOUR AND BACTERIA, EFFECTED BY PLAIN SAND FILTRATION. 1905. (1904) December (start) (1905) January February March April May June July Average from, 23/12/04 to 12/7/05 ‘Temperature. | Effluent. | aks Oxygen Con- Colour. a oa,2| Ammonia. sumed at (Lovibond = ~ a8 90deg. Fahr. Scale.) o_s BSc : 5 o oes — oS a eS Bee Si wea) PE eos sae) ¢ | Seg | 6 gee efo| & | | #| 2] @ |] s 388 eas 2 ~ tal 3 < ass = 3 2.1 | 100 | 31.8) 23.8 | 26.2 | nil nil 2.0| 71 | 48.8|26.1136.3| 71.5] 48.1 1.9 | 76.7] 58.8 | 34.5 | 40.2 | 98.2) 65.9 99.1 2.0 | 11.7] 57.0 | 38.4 | 38.7 | 55.9] 33.2 | 96.0 2.1 | 82.8] 42.7 | 41.2 | 37.2 |/100.0} 61.1 2.4°| 75.3} 51.4 | 30.7 | 30.0 | 88.7] 67.4 98.2 2.1 | 97.6] 44.5 | 30.0 | 18.4 | 85.7) 69.7 | 96.0 2.3 |100.0) 57.8 | 31.6 | 32.7 | 92.0 67.0 99.0 2.0 | 66.0 | 51.2 | 33.0 | 35.2 | 77.8 | 52.7 | 98.5 APPENDIX IX. AVERAGE PER CENTAGE REDUCTION IN ORGANIC MATTER, COLOUR AND BACTERIA, EFFECTED BY THE VARIOUS TYPES OF FILTERS USED IN CONNECTION WITH THE EXPERIMENTAL PURIFICATION OF THE LAGOON WATER. Type of Filter. Morry Filter (sand & gravel) Plain Sand Filter Sand and Ashes Machine Filter (Coagulants used) Combination of Morry Fil- ter and Plain Sand Filter Intermittent Plain Sand Filter Period for which average reduction is calculated. Sans 6 |% 183 bo —_ (o2) —_ -~I =) lad oS to gas Average Percentage of Reduction. 1 Se Oxygen. | etn. £28 ne ‘Consumed. sobs Pes eax 34 a | | Lovibond Rope w Mei so | 2 “% | Tintometer| ~5 0 oso| €§ I il | aaa epee |iecscrt o.o & z FI & 3° | . oe = apes @a8) S| sele se Bol si / sees ass) < ca ial Meh oc 2 4 2.1} 54| 40] 39{ 93 | 67 | 91.8 2.0) 53 | 33 | 36 | 93 66 | 98.5 2.1] 53.5 | 40 | 39 | 97 | 70 peas 104.0] 766.| 57, | 40) b=) | 2.2) 59 | 35 | 42 | 100 | 68 | 97.3 2.1 58 | 43 | 43 | 997 66 | 74.2 130 TYPICAL QUEENSLAND LAGOON APPENDIX X. COMPARISON OF EFFLUENTS FROM A MECHANICAL FILTER AND AN INTERMITTENT PLAIN SAND FILTER, OBTAINED DURING PERIOD OF THREE MONTHS. Average rate of filtration throughout period of test per 24 hours. Intermittent Sand Filter—2.23 million gallons Mechanical filter—104 million gallons per acre per acre per 24 hours. AVERAGE RESULTS OF ANALYSES THROUGHOUT PERIOD OF TEST. | 3, |_Oxygen Consumed. | Colour Units. 5 5 Be es a 5 Parts per Million. ae EN eB z gs 5 a5 ibe Coats ° = = 2s =| a & o =< s | ve] mH =< = =) ao Machine Filter, Applied | Water .. Ne oe 218: | 10:57 0.91 || 2.23 — — Effluent .. .. . .. | .123 | 5.76] 0:30)|ee Sand Filter, ples Water |-.322 | -— | 2.00 3262 5ieu 4.1 Effluent .. ' 136 | — | 1.13 | 23084) ees COMPARISON OF AVERAGE PER CENTAGE REDUCTION IN ORGANIC MATTER EFFECTED BY MACHINE FILTER AND INTERMITTENT PLAIN SAND FILTER. Ss Oxygen Consumed. _ Colour Units: om oh: ie ea ¢ = > =o | w a Per cent. Reduction. g : 2 : 3 3 & aie | “ eo] G Oo < 5 =) = al Mncbwie Plies 56.7 | 45.5 | 57.1 | 40.8) =e Sand Filter 57.7 | — | 43.5 | 42.5 | 99.1 | 65.8 131 BY HARDOLPH WASTENEYS. APPENDIX XI. ANALYSES OF SAMPLE OF LAGOON WATER COMPARED WITH FILTRATES FROM ANDERSON’S PROCESS. ~ 2 4 Minutes contact with 4 minutes contact with > Cast Iron Borings, Cast Iron Borings, Parts per Million. Aeration, 48 hours Settle- | Aeration, 12 hours Settle- =| ment, and Filtration ment, and Filtration S through two thicknesses | through three thicknesses 30 of Berzelius Filter Paper. | of Berzelius Filter Paper. =| Free Ammonia .O1 .04 .10 Albutininoid Ammonia spe 12 .207 Oxygen Con- | sumed in 15 Minutes 1.58 .49 .88 Oxygen con- sumed in 4 | hours 3.15 1.08 | Ta Tron (as Fe.) 57 — .055 Nitrogen as Nitrates nil nil | nil Turbidity nil nil | very faint opalescence CoLouR—Lovisonp— UNIts. Red Beles. cl nil | nil Yellow .. rile Seen 0.3 | 0.5 Odour sre [need day | | sw’py | nil | nil APPENDIX XII. BIOLOGICAL CONTENTS OF LAGOON WATER AT SURFACE NEAR OUTLET. 18m: OF Dates Depth rate SERRE Ne C.C Sa uae 13/8/04 240 — 10/10/04 264 — 26/1/05 960 —— 1/2/05 1040 —— 8/2/05 Samples 1208 3175 16/2/05 collectea 1080 1426 21/2/05 one foot 528 *3425 22/2/05 below 736 *3008 3/3/05 surface 596 1302 15/3/05 344 353 17/3/05 2960 *14908 4/4/05 840 1222 27/4/05 152 198 *Samples marked thus contained some of the floating scum from the surface of the lagoon. 132 SHADE TYPICAL QUEENSLAND LAGOON APPENDIx XIII. TEMPERATURE OF THE ATMOSPHERE AT THE LAGOON. (DEGREES FAHRENHEIT). Average Daily Period. Mean Temperature. For month of July, 1904 5 sis ae cas, gl 55.3 August, 1904 .. ar 8 are 56.1 September, 1904 Ae 5 ae 61.7 October, 1904 .. An ve Ae | 68.7 November, 1904 A ne bn 72.7 December, 1904 ae a ee | 75.8 January, 1905.. ce ns eo iA 79.5 February, 1905 oe ac oe 78.3 March, 1905 .. a is ae 74.9 April, 1905 aye ate Bi od | 71.2 May, 1905 ne ac ate fe 61.0 June, 1905 aie ave ee ne 55.8 Average Daily Mean Temperature for 12 months .. | 67.0 EXTREME TEMPERATURES FOR ABOVE PERIOD. Date. 15th June, 1905 Lowest Minimum Temperature > 15th June, 1905 Uowest Daily Mean Temperature 4 3rd January, 1905 Highest Max'mum Temperature .. ile 5th January, 1905 Highest Daily Mean Temperature .. 9: NOTE. (DEGREES FAHRENHEI7). —The prevailing organism in the reservoir is described in this paper as Protococcus, because the dimensions of its cells correspond more closely with the dimensions of Protococcus infusionum— Rabenhorst (aquatic form)—than with those of any other similar organism ; the method of multiplication, by cell division, is also similar. In other respects, however, it agrees with descriptions of Clathrocystis mruginosa, Henfrey; but I have never observed the thallus in clathrate form, it having been always either saccate or broken up into small fragments. The diameter of the cells is given for C. wruginosa as 2.5—3.5 #, whilst the cells of our organism vary from 4.5—10 p. Like C. eruginosa, it appears on the surface of the reservoir ‘“‘as a bright green scum, sometimes glaucous, presenting to the naked eye a finely granular appearance, and when dried appearing like a crust of verdigris.”” Vide Cooke’s British Freshwater Algae. . Professor Moebius found the organism —C. sruginosa—associated with Peridinia in water brought by pipes from this reservoir, and collected by Dr. Thos. L. Bancroft, Vide Contributions to Queensland Flora, by F. M. Bailey, F.L.S., 1893. The organism under discussion is always found associated with Peridinia, Anabcena, etc. HWe PROCEEDINGS OF THE Annual Meeting of Members, HELD ON SATURDAY, 27th JANUARY, 1906. » The Annual Meeting of Members was held at the Technical College, on Saturday, 27th January, 1906. The President (J. Brownlie Henderson) occupied the chair. The following Report of the Council and the Treasurer's Statement for the 1905 Session were read and adopted :— To the Members of the Royal Society of Queensland. Your Council have pleasure in submitting the report of the work done during the past Session. Monthly Meetings.—Seven Monthly Meetings were held, at which the following papers were read :— 15th April—Some hitherto unknown manuscripts relating to the first French Republic, by 8S. B. J. Skertchly. 27th May—A Disease Garden, by Dr. J. Thomson. 25th June— Paraguay, by John Lane. 5th August—A Typical Queensland Lagoon, and methods of purifying water for a town supply, by H. Wasiteneys. 26th August—Java, by J. Brownlie Henderson. 25th September—The New Zealand Education System, by J. Shirley. 2nd November—Three-Colour Photography, by W. Saville Kent. Three interim meetings were also held, at two of which the Hon. A. Norton gave exhibitions of lantern slides, and at one Mr. Shirley gave a lecture on Insects and Flowers. New Members.—Hight members were elected during the year, namely: 27th May, J. C. Brunnich and H. Wasteneys ; 5th August, R. M. Steele and W. E. Evans; 26th August, Henry Tryon ; 25th September, Messrs. J. Cowan, F. EK. Connah, and P. W. Jones. The Council regret to record the death of two members, viz., the Hon. Sir A. C. Gregory, K.C.M.G., and the Right Hon. Sir H. M. Nelson, K.C.M.G, The first-named gentleman li. REPORT OF THE COUNCIL. was the first president of the Society, and was also one of the trustees. dir Hugh Nelson was elected in 1898, when he paid a life-membership fee. Council Meetings.—Eleven meetings of the Council took place, the attendance being as follows:—President, J. B. Henderson, F.I.C., F.C.S., 10; Vice-president, B. Dunstan, F.C.s., 6; Hon. Treasurer, Hon. A. Norton, M.L.C., 9; Hon. Secretary, J. F. Bailey, 11; Hon. Librarian, R. LIllidge, 5, Members of Council: W.J. Byram, 5; J. Cameron, M.L.A., 3; C. J. Pound, 3; J. Shirley, B. Sc., 4; ur. A. J. Turner, 8. Change in Council.—Dr. J. ‘1 homson was elected a member of the Council at the Annual Meeting, but subsequently re- signed, and br. A. J. Turner was, at the February meeting, elected to the vacant seat. Nature Study Exhibition.—From the 9th to the 12th of this month a Nature Study Exhibition was held at the Technical College. Thirteen schools entered, and a certificate was awarded for the best collection in each of the various sections. The Council wish to acknowledge the assistance received from Messrs. A. Hxley and A. Johnston, the Teachers’ Union representatives on the committee appointed to make arrange- ments in connection with the Exhibition. In April last Vol. XIX., Part I., containing the papers read during the previous Session, was published and issued to members and the institutions on the exchange list. A large numer of donations have been received for the library from kindred societies and institutions. Treasurer’s Statement.—As usual, the Treasurer’s State- ment is furnished separately. It is to be regretted that so many subscriptions are in arrears, and it is hoped that those members in default will give attention to the matter. The library is sadly in need of funds, and it must be remembered that no subsidy from the Government was received during last year or the previous year. J. BROWNLIE HENDERSON, President. BrispanE, 27TH January, 1906. J. F. BAILEY, Hon. Secretary. COUNCIL. REPORT OF THE 906L ‘havnuve YyIGT ‘auvgsiag “LOpIpNP ‘UWOFT ‘SNIMLVA\ “OULD "q001100 PUNO] puv pouluUTex “LadNSVALT, “WOW ‘NOLMON “VY ‘906T ‘huvnunpe YyIgT ‘awnqgsrusy "PS “SEL TF ‘onsoyeywp [vUoyvuLezuy Ammsvory, | “86 PF ‘Buyutg “og Y eog—"ps ‘SBT OF ‘SoMVIT L 6 O8F L 6 O8F 6 GL GI 8 F 0 ‘** pusy ut ysep 40g 02016 puvg ur enbeyp i ( ®* yood yas 10d Hi) eh ta —osounleg 8 110 : : % + Surytamod 47, Guaicen0 oe aie ee ‘+ yoog anbeyg 0 O10 is: ce a seseyQ yuRg 9S oT oC vs 09 oe souBInsUy 0 OL1g oS ee aes ** SuIstjIeapy (Reaci « axe ** gnso[ByBQ [BUOTyBUAOUT yoo lL" a "* gsup Ajj0qg pue o8Bys0g CPORt Bis ag e SBuIpae001g JO ayeg i) @yt gfe 9 o0 ** Arouoyeyg pus duyuag Sh i (hp “2° 2 a ** suolyditosqng 0 0 Bt ne oe oe oe query i fA (eke oo v° ** ga0dea 4sv] WO’y ooOURlTe pes) ss ‘SLNAWASUOASIGT j) Wy ee ‘SLAG MY a) 1G ‘SO6F 2ABOKR 84} AO} LNAWALYLS IVIONYNIA ‘ANWISNAANS FTO ALAIOOS I1WAOH FHL iv. PRESIDENTIAL ADDRESS A vote of sympathy in the death of the Right Hon. Sir Hugh M. Nelson, K.C.M.G., was passed to Lady Nelson and family. Dr. John Thomson was elected a Trustee in the place of the late Hon. Sir A. C. Gregory, K.C.M.G. | The retiring President (J. Brownlie tienderson, F\I.C., F.C.5.) then read the following address :— PRESIDENTIAL ADDRESS. LADIES AND GENTLEMEN,— Before going on with the principal subject of my address this evening, I would like to make a few remarks on the work of our Society during the past year. On looking over the list of papers and lectures the first thing to strike one is the very small amount of original work that has been put on record. It is extremely remarkable that in this new country with a field for research which is the envy of all European scientists, we ourselves do so very little original work and allow these outside scientists to step in and do most of the important researches. One of the causes is undoubtedly lack of education—our young people are blind to much of the world that lies around them and practically no attempt is made to give them sight. This phase I intend to deal with more fully later on. Still, in Queensland we have a number of scientific workers scattered up and down through the land—enthusiastic botanists, geologists, mineralogists, entomologists, etc., but who do not contribute anything to the Society’s Proceedings, i.e., to the world’s knowledge, as our Proceedings are exchanged with those of nearly 200 similar Societies all over the world. Is it entirely the fault of these workers that they are not connected with us ? Would it not be worth our while to see if we are not partly or wholly to blame ? [ think we would get a good response if we sent out notices to these workers, inviting them to help the Society in its efforts to add to mankind’s knowledge of nature, and offering the Society’s help to them by referring questions or specimens to standing sub-committees in the various sciences, and by publishing the results of their work. If Queenslanders only knew of the enormous fields for research BY J. BROWNLIE HENDERSON. V. that lie open to them at their very doors and of the intense fascination of the search after such knowledge, we would hear a great deal less about the monotony of the Australian bush. Why, the bush simply teems with scientific facts waiting to be made known to a huge audience thirsty for the knowledge. In the Old Country, the Royal Society’s work largely depends on the use of expensive apparatus—natural history has been to a great extent worked out. But here in Queens- land Natural History papers ought certainly to be sent in by hundreds, and yet they are comparatively few in number. I trust that ere long we will have far more work of this class entered in the records of the Society. When the powers that be in Queensland wake up to the necessity of seriously fighting the various pests that tend to destroy our agriculturai industry the scientists who take up the work will, I hope, find much of the life history of those pests already recorded in the Proceedings of the Royal Societv. At present we have some such infor- mation collected, but the amount is very small indeed compared with what might be and ought to be on record. I sincerely trust that my successor in office will find a change for the better in the amount of research work recorded during the year 1906, and that the present members of the Society will look through their observations for the last few years to see if they cannot find there some work worthy of a place in our Proceedings. I think it must rather be excessive modesty than excessive laziness that causes our Proceedings to contain the names of so very few members of the Society, seeing that many of them are continually at work in their special branches of study. And now to the subject of the evening— EDUCATION IN QUEENSLAND. There is absolutely no need to apologise for introducing such a subject as education in the President’s Address to this Society. I know it is much more common in Royal Societies to give a resume of the scientific research of the world during the past year in one or more branches of science, but it would be absurd for me to attempt such a task in Brisbane. It must be a very hard task indeed where there are many to help and first-class libraries to refer to, but here K vl. PRESIDENTIAL ADDRESS with very few to help and practically no scientific libraries it would be an almost impossible task, even if but one science were taken, to give a full and accurate review. I therefore chose a subject in which I have always taken a great deal of interest, and which I know is personally of very great interest indeed to many members of the Society, and also one which is of paramount importance ty Queensland. Unless the subject of education soon receives a great deal more attention than it has done in the past, this Society will have to finish its existence. To realise this one has only to look at the list of names of contributors to the Proceedings, when it is seen that the native-born is con- spicuous by his absence. This is not as it should be but it is a natural corollary to the present absence of any system of education in Queensland. Before putting forward my views as to the directions in which f think we ought to proceed in our efforts to estab- lish a system of education here, it would be well to take a rapid general view of the subject to see what has been done elsewhere in the past. It is impossible to exaggerate the importance of a com- plete educational system to a nation. As Haldane says, ‘* Educate your people, and you have reduced to compara- tively insignificant dimensions the problems of temperance, of housing and of raising the condition of your masses. These things solve themselves if you onty yet the right spirit into your people,’ Many other thinkers have put the maiter in a similarly strong way. A nation’s educational standard of to-day determines that nation’s moral, literary and commercial standing of a few years after. To those who have studied the question, that is obvious, but unfortunately at no time has any Govern- ment in Queensland realised it. Yet far back in the world’s history, centuries before the time of the Greeks, it was recog- nised by the thinkers that the national life was merely that of an aggregation of units—the higher and better the position of each unit, the higher and better must be the general status of the whole community. The most obvious method then to raise the nation to a high position was to train the children to reach what those in authority considered the highest ‘type of man. BY J. BROWNLIE HENDERSON. Vil. And it is just here that we can get the ideals of the jeaders of those natioas—by examining their method of preparing their young people for the business of life. The history of education is therefore a most fascinating study, revealing as it does how the leaders of the various nations that have come and gone across the centuries have looked at the future. It is interesting to just look over a few of these ancient methods of education. In India the Bra’:mans, since about 2000 B.C., have kept all education in their own hands. They were of pure Aryan blood and evidently introduced the caste system as a means of race preservation. They taught the young men (for females were never educated) sacred and heroic literature, poetry, rhetoric, grammar, law, medicine, theo- logy, philosophy, mathematics, and astronomy. Most of the teaching was oral, and even lately text books were written so as to be easily committed to memory. ‘The demand on the memory was very great indeed. The next two castes, the warriors and rulers, also could take the higher courses in the schools, but their training was much more on the lines of physical development. In 400 B.C. they had a comprehensive grammar of their own language, and their mathematics and astronomy were sufficient to enable them to calculate eclipses. The great mass of the people belonging to the lower castes were of course left in darkness—their education was illegal, as it is with the Javanese under Dutch rule at the present day. The Brah- mans, who held the power, looked forward to keeping that power in their own hands as a class, and therefore carefully educated that class and no other. But their system tended only to develop metaphysicians, and as a natural result deterioration soon set in, and all over India progress ceased. Much of our learning seems to have come from or through India: now the Western pupil has far outstripped the Eastern teacher. The Aryans who settled in Persia were much more energetic than those who settled in India. They had a system of state education, but as before it was reserved for the children of the noble. And reading and writing formed no part of the systematic course! Their training was viii. PRESIDENTIAL ADDRESS mainly physical and moral. About the age of seven they left their homes and became attached to the king’s, or other great man’s court. They were then taught to be magni- ficent horsemen, to mount or dismount from a horse at the gallop. and to use the throwing spear and bow and arrow also while galloping at full speed. They were taken on long marches, subjected to extremes of heat and coid, and to scanty food. All this for physical training. Courage, truthfulnes:, gratitude and self-control were carefully incul- cated, while rewards for services to the State were given, and State punishments inilicted, in their presence. iso far as it went the training was splendid, but it was much too narrow. It made splendid noble warriors, but nothing more, and the warrior, after all, was essentially a robber and a murderer. He lived by conquest, and as riches and power increased, he as usual gradually deteriorated. Being only a very small section of the people the deterioration of this governing class was rapid and complete, and a few hundred years saw the end of the Empire. The Persians in their systems of education neglected the sciences and arts. which were studied only by a few of the priests. The Eygptians on the other hand studied science deeply, and their searchings into nature gave them those magnificent views of life and death which are partly translated into stone in the temples and pyramids. Ele- mentary schools where reading, writing, and arithmetic were taught, were private. The state did not control them and made no provision for the education of the masses. The priests were the educated class, and they conducted the higher schools in connection with the temples. It is astonishing that right down through the ages, even until the comparatively recent years of our Christian times, the learning and science were largely kept in the hands of the priests of the various nations. In these temple schools of the Egyptians, the principal studies were professional— architects, engineers and physicians being trained. The priests were trained for the priesthood in a more liberal way, the subjects including religion, morals, law, rhetoric, litera- ture, astronomy, mathematics. Much of this learning was also imparted to the cultured upper class. But once more we have the record of the mass of the people being kept in BY J. BROWNLIE HENDERSON. 8 ignorance, and the decay of power and ability in the upper class could consequently not be mad- up by fresh strong recrulis from the body of the people. Little is known of the methods of education of the old Semitic nations, the Babylonians and Assyrians. There was certainly a well-educated class among them, and that class gathered together enormous libraries, the one at Nineveh containing at least 10,000 books. As the books treat of religion, law, literature, astronomy, mathematics, geo- graphy, plants and animals, the system had certainly done good work. One treatise on astronomy dates back nearly to 4,000 B.C. The Hebrew branch of the Semitic nations developed a system of education pecuhar to them- selves. It was a part of their religion, which was the noblest the world had ever seen. The Hebrews believed that all law—physical, moral, and legal—was an expression of the will of God, so that all their methods of education were necessarily concerned with their religion. They be- lieved in the equality of man, of course in the general sense, and consequently every man had to be educated. We are all fairly familiar with the ancient Hebrew methods of education. It was laid down by law that parents must teach their children the laws of God, and though occasionally much neglected, that system has never been abandoned, and the obligation of parents to teach their children has undoubtedly done much to preserve what is best and noblest in Hebrew lives. Unfortunately little attempt was made beyond this—the Hebrew child was taught the highest moral law that the world had ever known. That was a magnificent start in life, but it did not tend to broaden or deepen the intellect. The priests and prophets had often schools in which were studied law, history, music and poetry, but higher education was practically non-existent. Later on in their history the scribes taught in the synagogues, and used a method of teaching which has been in existence until within recent years—the system of question and answer. It was used in giving instruction in the synagogue and else- where as being the method to which the people were accus- tomed by the Greatest Teacher of all time, the Christ. See- ing the results He obtained by it, one does not wonder at its almost universal acceptance by Christendom. The xX. PRESIDENTIAL ADDRESS c Christian churches still have their ‘‘ catechisms,” and even elementary science text books were, until a few years ago, written in this form. The Hebrews had thus a splendid system of moral training, but it never went further. The leaders of the nation never seemed to awaken to the craving of a*man’s intellect for something more than a system of morality. The high position since taken by Hebrews in both sciences and arts shows to what heights their ancestors might have risen in these directions had they only made as much provision for education in that direction as say the Egyptians or Assyrians. In ancient Greece there were two distinct types of people, and each devised a system of education typical of themselves.%.. The Spartan, whose ideals rose little above that of making a man a perfect animal physically, trained the young with that end in view. Children if delicate when born were killed off by exposure. Those allowed to live, on attaining the age of seven were handed over to the state, placed in public institutions, brought up under the strictest discipline, and allowed notiiing but the barest necessities in either food or clothng—the idea being to harden them for war. Physical culture was brought to a high state of de- velopment, and the girls were also trained till physically perfect, so that the women might be strong to bear strong children. The system of education somewhat resembled that of the Persians, producing a splendid warrior with a few splendid virtues, but owing to its narrowness it led to the extinc:ion of the Spartan. The Athenians on the other hand recognised that the mind makes the man more than the body, and in their system of education they aimed not at a glorified animal, but at a glorified mind in a vigorous body. Although physical training of the young held a very high place, it was put in its proper sphere as only a step in the scheme— not the end. The public schools where the physical and mental training were given were distinct. Music also held a very high place in their esiimation, and was one of the most important subjects taught in the schools. In the secondary schools and in most of the schools of the philoso- phers, the physical sciences were taught in addition to the usual rhetoric, musiv, drawing, grammar, philosophy, etc. BY J. BROWNLIE HENDERSON. 10 wiaat we st:li believe to» be the highest point ever reached by the human race, in moral standard they were far below that of the ancient Hebrew. The educational system of Rome. while founded on that of the Greeks, was adapted by them to their own special needs. At first the schools had no connection with the State, but as the Empire grew its leaders recognised the importance of t aining the youth of the nation, and the State then step- ped in and supervised the work of tr:ming. After the elementary work, pupils were taught in secondary schools grammar, composition, music, rhetoric, etc., and occasionally geometry. At about 16 a youth would commence his professional training, and this lke most things taken up by the Romans was done in a thoroughly practical manner. If intended for a military career, he became attached to the staff of a commander, if intended for a lawyer he joined himself to a jurist, if for a politician to some well-known orator. He could also study at the higher schools and later on at the Universities. The University of Alexandria established in the third Century, B.C., was a great landmark in the history of educa- tion, and although so far from Rome became and remained the principle centre of education while the Empire lasted. It was a State endowed institution, and was splendidly equipped. It is not necessary here to go into its history, but it is a fact not generally realised that one of its earliest teachers, in the third Century, B.C., was as far as we know the first to calculate the magnitude of the earth by measuring an arc of the meridian. It was at the University of Alex- andria and similar high schools that the Roman completed his studies. The Roman system was the best that the world had so far seen, but the corruption that ruined the Empire of course also ruined the schools. | Perhaps it might be as accurate to state that the corruption which ruined the schools thereby ruined the Empire. xii. PRESIDENTIAL ADDRESS Such is a short history of the systems of education in force prior to Christianity. With the exception of the Hebrew system they were all intended for the classes, and the masses of the population were purposely left in ignorance. Christ is not often regarded as an educational reformer, and yet His teaching of the brotherhood of man and His divine message that the ultimate measure of a man is his love for his fellowman, completely if slowly revolutionised the systems of education. Christ taught no detailed system of education of the young, as also He taught no system of theology for the adult. He swept aside all systems and replaced them by a grand general principle, leaving all special cases to be dealt with under that principle as they arose. And after many centuries the lesson has been absorbed and educational facilities are being provided in most Christian countries for all who have the ability to assimilate knowledge, instead of being practically confined to one class. When the Christian religion replaced that of heathen Rome, several serious errors were made by those in authority. In their zeal for reform they cast out not only a most brutal, sensual and corrupt power, but with it much that was good and noble. They failed to distinguish between the art and learning of the heathen schools and the utter moral depravity that existed alongside. All were swept away together’ and it took centuries to regain the lost ground. In fact the evil seemed to recover its lost ground more quickly than the good. The early Christians in their school system at first contented themselves with giving instruction in Christian doctrine—all else was neglected. Even in training for the ministry of the Church, little more than Scripture knowledge was at first required. National educational systems, if the education of one small class can be so called, were thus swept away, and were very inadequately replaced. The monasticism of the ancient heathens soon took a hold on Christianity also, and gave a strong bent to educa- tion. Schools sprang up in connection with the monastries all over Western Europe, and as the number of dialects far exceeded our present number of languages, Latin perforce became the language of the scholar. Some of the monastic BY J. BROWNLIE HENDERSON. xiii. schools became famous, and it is interesting to note that one of the most famous was that of Columbia in the Island of Iona, the Irish monks from there spreading their knowledge all over Europe. In one sense it was unfortunate that the monks held supreme control of education. Each monastery had its own methods, and there was no attempt at a national system of co-ordinated education. The monks’ view of life was an extremely narrow one, and it, of course, colored their system of education. With several brilliant excep- tions the monastic schools were of a rather low standing. Charles the Great saw the pressing need of education, even found fault with that of the monks, and strove to educate the laity as well as the clergy. The good work he did in this direction long survived him, the schools he had founded still remaining in existence long after his Empire was dismembered. Alfred the Great shortly afterwards did the same work for Great Britain, actually himself conducting a school at court for the sons of the nobles. All these schools however still had the monastic ideal, and advancement under that ideal was quite impossible. The monk glorified the soul and scorned and ill-treated the body. In the period known as the Age of Chivalry the knight arose in contrast to the monk. He glorified the body, and cared little for the soul and less for the mind. His education was simple, first as page and then as esquire. He was taught to scorn learning as a thing for monks, not for men, but in spite of that he had many manly virtues and served to preserve a balance against the monk at the other extreme. At the same time another development took place, the birth of modern conditions. Large towns gradually arose, and as a check to the power of nobles were granted by the sovereigns the right of self-government. In these towns the need was felt of an education totally distinct from that of the monk or the knight. As a result the first secular schools were founded and for the first time the native tongue was taught as a distinct subject. Out of these monastic and other schools grew the educational triumph of the middle ages—the Universities. The first Universities were merely the result of great teachers arising in well-known schools, and by their ability increasing Xiv. PRESIDENTIAL ADDRESS the attendance of students till the numbers were so great as to demand special treatment. It is strange to read of the University of Paris, 700 years ago, having 20,000 students—nearly half the population of the city. Truly there was a thirst for knowledge displayed then that does not at present show itself in Queensland. Unfortunately the Universities were not part of any general national system, but still their power for good was so enormous that in all the changes that have taken place in those last 700 years, the old Universities still exist and live with greater vigor than ever. They marked the break away of the higher education from the government of religious or other control, and that too with the consent of the religious powers, for in the 12th Century, shortly after the growth of the episcopal school at Paris into a self-governing University, it received many privileges and gifts from the Pope. The Universities were also partly the outcome of the increasing power and wealth of the ordinary citizens, and the strong new life of the people fostered and was fostered by the Universities. The Universities naturally reacted on primary and secondary education, and they again on the Universities. With the Renaissance came another increase to the number of students, and also to the power of the Universities, and such a hold did the study of Latin and Greek then take, that a knowledge of one or both of these languages has been made compulsory in most Universities down to the present time for aspirants to degrees, even in subjects totally unconnected with any- thing mentioned in classical literature. In Teutonic countries the revival in the study of the classics took a peculiar bent. The study of the New Testament in Greek led to a change in religious belief of many of the leading scholars, who induced their pupils to study the Bible in the original, and this was one of the principal causes that gradually led up to the Reformation. Zwingli and Luther were not only reformers of religion— they each helped to establish national systems of educa- tion. In holding that every man is responsible for his own religious beliefs, they had naturally to hold that he ought to be able to read and study the Bible for himself so that he might know what to believe. We talk of nature BY J. BROWNLIE HENDERSON. XV. study and new syllabuses. What would we think of read- ing, writing, arithmetic, scripture study, surveying, music, the classics and the study of objects in nature for mental work, and running, jumping, wrestling, and putting the shot for physical training ? Somehow it sounds as if some- one were advocating an advance on our present “‘ syllabus,” and yet it is an outline of what wes advocated and used in Switzerland in 1520 by Zwingh. Luther strongly advocated compulsory education, pointing out the great danger to the State of allowing part of the population to grow up undisciplined. He advocated women as teachers, and pleaded with the Magistrates of the cities to spend more money on the schools. ‘* Every year,” he said, “ the cities expend so much upon arms, roads, bridges, and number- less other things that contribute to their temporal peace and prosperity ; should they not much more contribute as much for the employment of teachers for the poor youth so much in need of instruction.”” He also advocated in addition to the usual subjects “the study of nature,’ anda thorough course of physical training. About this time the secondary classical schools sprang up, so that in Germany education became fairly well co- ordinated and the work ran through from primary. to secondary, and then to University. Following on the establishment of the Reformers’ schools, came the mag- nificent system of schools of the Counter Reformers—as represented by the Society of Jesus. They had in Jess than 150 years from their foundation over 200,000 scholars in splendidly organised schools, and to them belongs the credit of first definitely and thoroughly training teachers for their profession—a position not yet reached by us in Queensland. The classical learning had barely become established when it was strongly attacked by skilful men, and these men too were among the greatest scholars of their time. Montaigne in France, Bacon and Mulcaster in England, and Ratich in Germany, all made strong attacks on the classical system, and advocated something new and better. Comenius, the Moravian, advocated a system which we still admire, and to some points of which we have not yet attained. The following sentence was not taken from a Xvi. PRESIDENTIAL ADDRESS late number of any educational gazette—it is 250 years old: ‘‘ People must be taught to get their knowledge, as far as possible, not from books, but from earth and sky, from oaks and beeches.” Comenius’ system was magnificent —he looked to it to raise the whole nation to a higher plane ; morally, mentally and physically. Over 200 years ago, Francke, a German, who, like most of the world’s great school teachers was a minister of religion working for love of the people, established, among other schools and institutions, a secondary school. In it were taught German, Latin, Greek, Hebrew, French, arithmetic, geography, history, music, sketching, painting, mathematics, botany, anatomy, and the elements of medicine. It had a botanical garden attached, a physical laboratory, a chemical laboratory, a dissecting room for studying anatomy, a workshop with turning lathes and machines for grinding glass. What would not the Trustees of some of our so-called Technical Colleges give to put an educational feast of that sort before our knowledge-hungry youths. And yet the bill of fare is 200 years old. The 17th Century saw science fairly established in the secondary schools and Universities, and in the beginning of the 18th century, the professors mostly ceased to lecture in Latin, and substituted the mother tongue. However, from our standpoint to-night, the greatest change in the 18th Century was in the number of elementary schools established, and the better acceptance of the principle that not only is education in itself a desirable thing, but that any nation which desires to hold its own in the struggle of life must insist on every citizen receiving a sound primary education, with special provision that all those who have the ability to benefit themselves and the nation by higher education, shall have opportunity given them to receive that eductaion. As a result of the great advance made in the 18th Century, still greater advances were made in the 19th Century, and the necessity of free and compulsory education almost universally admitted and put in force. One of the most striking advances was made as a result of the crushing of Germany by Napoleon. In_ 1807, Frederick William III. and his councilors, defeated, ruined and crushed, sought a way of recovery. They hit upon a BY J. BROWNLIE HENDERSON. XVli. plan which has made Prussia the leading power on the Continent of Kurope—the education of the people. They instituted a complete system of compulsory state education which is still in existence, and which enabled them in less than 60 years to dominate both Austria and France in war, and is now seriously threatening to dominate England in commerce. France, even after the defeat of 1870, was badly provided with schools. As late as 1873, when the Prussian illiterate were under 1 per cent., more than 30 per cent. of the adult French population were entirely illiterate. The leaders of the nation then recognised the national danger and the way out. They followed Prussia’s example, and in a few years had in working order what has been characterised as the most thorough and comprehensive school system in the world. By 1895, 91 per cent. of all the children in France attended school regularly. Along with this enormous increase in the number of pupils in the primary schools, came an_ increased demand for secondary technical schools, and these are now firmly established on a good basis in several countries. There also came with this increased activity a radical change in the methods of teaching, most of which had been outlined long ago. It is not my intention to discuss these methods in detail this evening, though some of them, such as the kindergarten, could well be adopted in Queensland. Such details are matters of consideration for experienced teachers themselves. I have briefly given these few facts as to the growth: of educational ideas, so that we may be better able to judge as to whether we are doing in Queensland what we might be doing. 1 think I might shortly sum up educational facilities in Queensland as follows :—We have, considering the smal] population that is spread over such a large area, a very fair proportion of primary schools. The subjects taught in these schools are reading, writing, arithmetic, grammar, history, geography, drawing and music, and for the girls, needlework. In the larger schools a few elementary science subjects are also taught, and there has lately been added to the syllabus the hundreds of years old subject—nature study. So far as it goes, our elementary education is good— XVili. PRESIDENTIAL ADDRESS at least when compared with similar elementary courses of study elsewhere. In addition to our elementary State schools, we have several other schools called Grammar Schools in six of the principal towns. These are not worked by the Education Department, but each is under its own Trustees, gets an endowment from the Government and establishes what courses of study it pleases. That the work of the Grammar Schools is well up to that of similar institutions in the Southern States we all know, and it is shown by the results of the Sydney University senior and junior exam- inations. Unfortunately the Grammar Schools, not being under the control of the Education Department, are doing a good deal of the work that is also done in the State Schools, and so are not proper continuation schools. As they aim Jargely at preparing students for the Universities they have perforce to retain the ancient classical learning as one of the principal parts of the school curriculum. We have no higher education provided than is supplied by the Grammar Schools. In another direction, education here has been struggling along under difficulties. Some years ago, in several of the larger towns, institutions called Technical Colleges were established, to encourage which the pupils’ fees were subsidised to an equal amount by the Govern- ment. This subsidy has in the last few lean years been considerably reduced. In quite a number of the colleges no applied science whatever is taught. Such colleges are merely commercial schools where shorthand, type- writing, and probably dressmaking covers the entire number of subjects. In one or two of the larger colleges attempts have been made to establish physical and chemical laboratories, but the lack of funds has prevented any of the college authorities, however much they wish it, from establishing well-fitted physical or chemical labora- tories or engineering workshops. Great credit is deserved by those who, in the face of all difficulties, have established such laboratories as we have now. While the name Tech- nical College has perhaps no definite meaning, the Technical Colleges of Queensland, except in the case of a very few classes, do not reach the standard of the secondary science schools of England and Scotland. Apart from these BY J. BROWNLIE HENDERSON. XIX. Technical Colleges there are two educational institutions which are entirely controlled by the Government—the Agricultural College at Gatton, and the School of Mines at Charters Towers. Both are doing good work, but both are sadly hampered by lack of funds. That briefly summarises the educational facilities pro- vided or subsidised by the State in Queensland, and I am safe in saying that none of the few private schools reach so high a standard as the Grammar Schools. The total State provision for higher education consists in three exhibi- tions granted every year (worth £100 a year for 3 years) to enable the holder to attend a Southern University. Three exhibitions per annum for half-a-million people! About 14,000 children are born every year in Queensland, and three of them are to be fully educated! I know that these statements are familiar facts to nearly all present, but although the facts have been on several occasions put before the general public, the facts are not known—that is, the general public does not realise what a serious menace to Queensland is the total absence of any co-ordinated system of education. Will not some of our legislators who recognise this great danger (and I know that some of them do) start a campaign in favor of a complete educational system for Queensland. In spite of all that is said about politicians in general, I think there is quite enough patriotism in the Queensland Parliament to prevent the subject of education entering the sphere of party politics and thereby probably receiving more harm than good. A good supply of primary state schools, several Grammar Schools, not connected in any way with the State Schools, several Technical Colleges, also practically independ- ent, where much revision work has to be done owing to the students having partly forgotten their primary education, a School of Mines away in the North, working under the same lack of connection with primary and also secondary education, an Agricultural College, also disconnected, and lastly three pupils per annum sent South ! When will some strong man arise, and co-ordinate and bring into working order all these independent educa- tional forces. Where is the sense in spending so much money xX PRESIDENTIAL ADDRESS on secondary education that means, as we have so few rich residents in Queensland, that only about 3 per annum of all these students are going to complete their work? Why go on so far only to drop practically everything ? The answer that has hitherto been received is generally that it would cost too much. But it would cost nothing, and possibly result in a saving of money and certainly of the pupils’ time, were the work of the Grammar Schools made as strictly continuous as possible on that of the primary State Schools, and students entering the public or State Technical institutions required to show their fitness to par- take of the mental food presented. Such a course has been found necessary elsewhere, and will, I trust, soon be adopted here. It would be a very great mistake indeed to attempt to put on the crown of all educational systems—the University, ere the primary and secondary schools were properly corelated. With primary and secondary schools in working order the establishment of the University would be greatly facilitated. We would have hundreds of students ready to take advantage of the University immediately it was opened. Very many hard words have been used against past Governments for refusing to go to the expense of establish- ing a University. I suppose they were deserved, as the enormous benefits to be derived by Queensland from a University would completely justify any Government in spending the money. But in one way the Governments had a very good excuse indeed for not spending the money. There has never been a general demand by the people for a University, and knowing that, successive Governments have refused to take action. We are sadly in want of a Horace Mann in Queensland, some one who will go round, as he did in Massachusetts, U.S.A., finding everywhere absolute apathy and unconcern as to educational facilities, and leaving behind him boundless energy and enthusiasm in the good cause. Once open the eyes of the people of Queensland to the danger of the future through bringing up our young people practically uneducated, to compete with the trained skill of the foreigner, and the University question will solve itself. Any Government that got a mandate from the people to complete the system of State BY J. BROWNLIE HENDERSON. > 418 education wou!d gladly supply the necessary funds and do the work. The raising of the funds could be done as in America and e'sewhere, by selling State lands, or by direct taxation, and I am certain that an educational tax would be as littie unpopular as it 1s possible for a tax to be. The incidence of the tax could best be decided by those experi- enced in such matters, but for this object the ancient and venerable tax on bachelors might be hinted at as a fruitful and of recent years unexploited field. And now having summarised what is being done in Queensland, I would like to make a few suggestions as to what I think are weak points in our present methods. And first of all let me state clearly that I do not desire to make any reflections whatever on our Education Department. Any one who knows anything of Queensland and its back- blocks, and its far North, can have nothing but admiration for the educated men and women who go there and endure the extremes of heat and drought and isolation, without any prospect of “making a pile.’ No teachers in the British Empire have, I believe, more hardships to endure than those in Queensland, and none endure them more cheerfully. And the Department in its new syllabus has certainly taken a step in the right direction, and is probably now as far advanced in primary education as any of the Southern States, except in one point—the training of the teachers. At our late Nature Study exhibition, one of the senior teachers remarked to me, with reference to Nature Study, “I know nothing about natural sciences, and so far as I can see, neither do any of my assistants, although some of them are reading it up. How am I to supervise them or teach Nature Study myself?” That is the weak spot in the scheme. A new subject has been introduced, few of the teachers have previous knowledge of it, and now they have to teach it. That is one of the arguments in favour of a training college, if arguments are required for such an obvious necessity, and the establishing of the University would at once supply the greatest need of the teachers of Queensland. The question sometimes forces itself on one, are all these States going on the right road to education ? What do we ultimately aim at? Why this enormous annual expenditure ? I suppose we expect that by our L Xxii. PRESIDENTIAL ADDRESS system we will not only prevent the race from deteriorating, but that our system will carry succeeding generations to higher levels, physically, mentally and morally than we our- selves have attained. Is the boy who leaves the State School to-day physically superior to the boy who left it 30 years ago? I am afraid not. It is staggering to think that because the known systems of physical culture have not been adopted, our boys and girls are growing up with only half their proper share of health and strength. If it is true, and some of the best authorities say that they have actually proved it in practice, that one hour per day, if systematically devoted to physical culture, will thoroughly develop the frame, then why is it not done? Take a walk along any of the principal streets of any of our Queensland towns, and look at the physique of the youths. Any one will admit, I think, that the average is certainly not better than that of the youths of the old country towns, and in some of the towns it is as certainly inferior. If there lies to our hands a method of making the children grow up much stronger and healthier physically and we do not use it, then our neglect is absolutely criminal. Either the advocates of physical cuiture are deliberately misleading us, or our authorities are, by their neglect, laying up a store of weak- ness and sickness and resultant criminality. Ability to extract a cube root is of much less importance than a well- developed healthy body, and an hour per day, or even half the day, if taken from other pursuits would be well spent indeed in laying up a store of health and strength. There is one other point in which I think our system is woefully defective—in religious training. This is recognised by men of every branch of the Christian religion, but unfor- tunately none have so far suggested a practical remedy. In an old settled community the lack of religious instruction in the State Schools is not felt quite so much—there are other sources of that instruction. The old spirit which made Churchmen everlastingly harp on their points of difference is fortunately giving way to a more rational spirit, and they are now showing a tendency to find out the points on which they agree. As they are all nominally believers of Christ’s teachings, it should surely be possible for them soon to agree to similarly interpret a sufficient BY J. BROWNLIE HENDERSON. XXHil. number of His sayings to form a course of lessons from which dogma and “isms ”’ would be entirely absent. Owing to the power of the Churches, until that is done, possibly the best course to pursue is the present one—let religion alone in the State School. If there is one statement more than another that has been borne out by history, it is the thousands of years old one, that “ Righteousness exalteth a nation’ The Spartans pinned their faith to a sound body but they soon perished. The Athenians developed both mind and body—were possibly the most highly cultured race the world has ever seen—yet it did not save them from the vilest immorality and debauchery, and final extinc- tion as a nation. In the middle ages the rulers of the nations tried ignorance as a method of keeping the nation together ; they had a few educated thinkers and rulers, and all the remainder workers who were not on any account to think. But that also failed. Solomon was right, ‘‘ Righteousness exalteth a nation,” and nothing else will. Yet thousands of our children are growing up with practically no moral training. “Thou shalt not be found out,” is the only commandment they are taught to respect. It is just as impossible to develop the moral as it is to develop the mental side of human nature without any training. I consider it one of the darkest outlooks for our Common- wealth that so many thousands of children are coming to maturity with undeveloped or blunted moral perceptions. The very small amount of time devoted to moral and physical development of our children I look on as the most serious defects of our State primary education. The sub- jects of the syllabus I consider a matter of much smaller importance. A good teacher will educate with almost any subject, and a bad teacher will not educate with the best subjects. The training of the teachers is of far greater importance than the items of the syllabus. Of course there are some subjects of more importance than others, and it seems absurd to an onlooker to see history and geography taught while physiology and dietetics are avoided. A very slender knowledge of foods would probably have a marked effect in lowering the infantile death rate. It shocks one to hear from medical men of the awful yearly sacrifice of infants through improper feeding. It is largely XXiv. PRESIDENTIAL ADDRESS preventable, being solely the result of ignorance. It is an established fact that proper mastication and inselivation of all food practically prevents indigestion, which is the cause of nearly all disease. Yet this fact, which if properly instilled into children would vastly improve the race, is ignored and instead they are thoroughly drilled in such lists as the names of the principal capes in England! One other point in the State control of education is badly neglected. We offcially test lawyers, and dentists and State school teachers and others ere they practise, and yet we allow anyone who pleases to start a private school and charge the public presumably for education supplied. The education of any people is of quite sufficient import- ance to justify the State in seeing that all who take part in it are qualified for the positions they take up either in State or private schools. I have already pointed out that the State does not control the subjects or methods in the small amount of secondary education provided. It is therefore not much use to criticise them, but I would like to point out that the classical education still holds pride of place in the Grammar Schools, and commercial education in the Technical Colleges. As the Head Master of the leading Grammar School has often pointed out, the Southern Universities determine the subjects taught in our Grammar Schools, so until we provide a University of our own we must needs, at least for students intending to go South, accept their lists of subjects. I sincerely trust that when the University is established here, no foreign language, dead or alive, will be listed as compulsory in the matriculation, and that to obtain degrees in any one branch of knowledge it will not be necessary to show a knowledge of subjects in a totally distinct branch of knowledge. One of the most famous Professors of Edinburgh University, failed to take his arts—which is a literary—degree, because his brain was not built on mathematical lines and he failed to pass in mathematics. Why should he have been deprived of a degree that required brain power of one kind, because he had not brain power of a totally different kind ? While I would be sorry to see the classics entirely omitted from our educational system, I trust they BY J. BROWNLIE HENDERSON. XXV. will never be made compulsory. A University for a new country with no leisured class who have little else to do than amuse themselves, should give a distinctly practical bent to education. The technical side of higher education, such as medicine and surgery, engineering subjects, chemistry in its application to agriculture, mining, metal- lurgy, etc., and those other branches of knowledge of natural science the application of which tends to the better- ment of our people, will I trust take first place. The cost of starting a University here has often been much over-estimated. Undoubtedly £200,000 could be spent on buildings and fittings without wasting a penny. But a start could be made without other buildings than we have at present. The Wellington branch of the New Zealand University when I was in Wellington two years ago, consisted of the teaching staff. They had no buildings, though these were approved and the site cleared for their erection. Buta first-class teaching staff had been appointed, and the classes met where rooms were available—which meant in different quarters of the town. The chemistry was taught by arrangement with the local Technical College in their Laboratory, and though the Laboratory could not be called a first-class one, and the equipment was inexpen- sive, some of the most striking recent contributions to chemical science have come from there in the last few years. The appointment of say four first-class men, with a few assistants and a comparatively small initial outlay for apparatus for physical and chemical laboratories would start a Univeristy in Brisbane. We do not require a great outlay on buildmgs at the beginning, but we want the teaching to be the best obtainable. And look at the advantages to be gained from a com- mercial standpoint—for that is evidently the view that will be taken by those who supply the funds. At present if a scientific man is required in Queensland we instantly send elsewhere for one. It is not because the young Queens- lander is less capable than the young Englishman. So far as my observation goes the average boy here is smarter and quicker, if perhaps a little less tenacious, than the boy in the Old Country. It is merely that the young Queens- lander has never had a chance. I have known boys here XXVi. PRESIDENTIAL ADDRESS show most exceptional aptitude for science. Had there been an educational system they might have become leaders in pure science, or have devised newer and cheaper methods of treating our ores. One I remember in particular, whose appetite for science was insatiable, failed to get an Annual Ex- hibition because he could not stew up Latin and Greek suffi- ciently well, and the marks given in that examination for these subjects were out of all proportion to their importance. That young man is now a clerk in an office. To take another view. We are trying to establish several secondary indus- tries here. I have often been interviewed by individuals engaged in these industries, and the ignorance they show of the foundation principles of their trades is only equalled by their courage and perseverance. Some time ago a man brought to me an article he had manufactured. He said it contained about 14 % of a certain constituent. He was basing his calculations on that, but wanted to make quite sure. It contained 34 %. Another manufacturer of the same article, when asked, stated he did not know how much was in his—he thought about 20 %—but there was over 30 %. Now a comparatively elementary know- ledge of practical chemistry, such as would be obtained in second year’s chemistry at a University would have sufficed to put these men right. Where the educational system is good, such small manufacturers easily get a man to do all their clerical and chemical work, and the saving is enormous. Until skilled labor is cheap Queensland’s secondary indus- tries will not thrive, and skilled labor will not be cheap until we get a modern University. Had one tenth part of the famous £10,000,000 loan been devoted to establishing a complete educational system, we would not still have been waiting for outsiders to show us how to develop our mag- nificent mineral resources. Young Queenslanders would have been discovering and turning out copper, tin, lead, and other metals by the thousands of tons, and Queensland would have already occupied the postiion to which she will one day attain—the wealthiest mineral State in Australasia, and one of the greatest if not the greatest mineral pro- ducer in the world. £1,000,000 invested then in that way would by this time have given returns in actual cash worth the whole loan. BY J. BROWNLIE HENDERSON. XXVil. The advantages of a University from a higher stand- point have been so often proclaimed that it is needless for me to repeat them to-night. One is tempted to look forward and try to show some of the results of better education. Try to picture Brisbane if governed by men who had been well trained in public health. No more would be heard of our present foul “ sanitary ”’ system, or of foods manufactured solely to sell—not for pro- viding nourishment. It is undoubtedly only a matter of education (which is in this case “ time”) until we will force all candidates for civic honors to prove by passing a@ non-competitive qualifying examination that they know sufficient about finance, public health, and similar subjects to justify the citizens in putting them in charge of their city. We would then have a proper system of drainage, a drinkable water supply, a freedom from plague, etc., and I have no doubt, a smaller overdraft. The same thing will apply in the future to politicians. I feel certain that a well-educated people will demand from any man who proposes to make their laws and govern them some proof of his competency to do so. I do not suggest a literary standard but a qualifying examination before nomination, on the principles of Government as applicable to our local conditions. We do it in every other profession—why not in that profession which should be the noblest of all 2 It is also-a question of only a few years till education will cause the present barbarous system of war to be abandoned. It is against the laws of nations to kill by Shells containing poisonous gases. Why? Would it not be infinitely more humane to fire shells loaded with a gas, which if it did not kill (and that painlessly) outright would leave men strong and well as ever, than to fire shrapnel which smashes and maims and tears and leaves what was aman a hideous mass of torn flesh, and even when it only wounds leaves men maimed for life? That old professional soldier, the knight, objected to the introduction of fire- arms; it spoiled his sport and made war more, instead of less, dangerous to him than to the ordinary soldier. The modern European military expert objects to gases which would kill without maining or leaving any wound because it would spoil war from his standpoint. Instead of being XXVili. PRESIDENTIAL ADDRESS an exciting game with one chance in a hundred of being killed, he would have about ninety-nine chances of being killed. It certainly would make war as now conducted impossible. With a comparatively few shells filled with suitable compressed gas and suitable big guns to throw them, 50 men could annihilate an army. And why should they not do so? War is wholesale murder, so if it is to be murder let it be done as quickly and pain- lessly as possible. I trust that some great nation will soon give notice that if any other power attacks it this method will be used in defence. That will do more to end war than all the peace conferences that could be held in 100 years. It would look wasteful to throw so many millions of pounds worth of war material on the scrap heap, but better throw the money there than the men. Much more might be said on the benefits of thorough education—its “ socialistic” tendency (not in the political partisan sense) and in a hundred other ways. I have tried, in however imperfect a way, to show the very backward position in which we are in Queensland with regard to education. I have quoted no statistics as to money spent elsewhere. We have heard and read those over and over again. I would like again to say in reply to the hackneyed cry of our poverty as our excuse that it is because we have no system of education that we are poor. What nations have now the best educational system ? Undoubtedly Germany and America, and they are also making greatest progress in commerce. New Zealand has the best educational system in Australasia, and New Zealand is the most prosperous State in Australasia. Can anyone honestly say that we, the richest State in the world if we consider the natural resources per head of population, cannot raise even £10,000 a year for a University ? I think I have said quite sufficient to show that not only is the scholar interested in the establishment of a University, but that it is a matter of the deepest concern to every one in the State; and not only to establish it as part of a system, but to see that provision is made that every youth in Queensland who has shown capacity for receiving a higher education shall have opportunity given to receive the best education that can possibly be provided, Poverty BY J. BROWNLIE HENDERSON. XXIX must always be a hindrance to the education of a budding genius, but in the interests of the State such provision ought to be made that poverty, while it may demand increased exertion, will not debar any capable youth from having his gifts developed by a first-class education. And such a complete system of education young Queenslanders should not request as a favor from anyone, but should demand as their rightful heritage, as something that should be theirs, something that is being cheerfully given to their more fortunate brothers and sisters in other parts of the empire, and without which Queensland and Queenslanders must be left far behind in the rapid advance being made under modern educational methods in all civilised countries. A vote of thanks to Mr. Henderson was carried by acclamation. A paper by J. Douglas Ogilby, entitled ‘‘ Symbranchiate and Apodal Fishes new to Australia,”’ was laid on the table and taken as read. The election of office-bearers for the year 1906 resulted as follows:—President, Benjamin Dunstan, F.G.8. ; Vice-President, A. Jefferis Turner, M.D.; Hon. Treasurer, Hon. A. Norton, M.L.C.; Hon. Secretary, F. E, Connah; Hon. Librarian, R. Illidge; Members of Council, J. F. Bailey, W. J. Byram, John Cameron, M.L.A., J. Shirley, B. Sc., and John Thomson, M.B.; Hon. Auditor, George Watkins; Hon. Lantermst, A. G. Jackson. The new President was conducted to the chair, and after returning thanks for his election, the proceedings terminated. Ty et ms rar heey OT mates adet 2S . Die 9 i Voth re Avy, ‘ Th Byes iT ee oie i (4 ’ at OTR - WY Sag lt , ; PTET Cony Ts" + . F ’ 2 ‘) “4 ™. Pod , > is 5 Tay i ye ~~ “ : ea PROCEEDINGS ROYAL SOCIETY QU BENSDLAN D. VOLUME XxX. PRINTED FOR THE SOCIETY BY H, POLE & CO., PRINTERS, ELIZABETH STREET, BRISBANE, 1907. PROCEEDINGS OF THE ROYAL SOCIETY OF Seen SA INL. VOLUME XxX. PRINTED FOR THE SOCIETY BY H. POLE & CO., PRINTERS, ELIZABETH STREET, BRISBANE. 1907. FA SSNS 1 yh | I 1 r “ ii: NAS ae UE ae SP XAATELK BARGE AY hs i oe ~ . tras 7 " - ee ; 2 al = Ee 5 oe Vek i Oi ixy mat # ot: ma % ¥ i as ts ee. ha : —o ee ~ pet y , . 3p Sere ne a Biya earn Ropal Society of Queensland. Patron : HIS EXCELLENCY LORD CHELMSFORD. Oren @ see SS Ore President: ALFRED JEFFERIS TURNER, M.D., M.R.C.S.E. Vice=President : J. C. BRUNNICH, F.1.C. Hon. Treasurer : Hon. ALBERT NORTON, M.L.C. Hon. Secretary : H. M. CHALLINOR. Hon. Librarian : FRANK SMITH, B.Sc. Members of Council : J. SHIRLEY, B.Sc. J. F. BAILEY. W. J. BYRAM. FRANK E. CONNAH. J. B. HENDERSON, F.1.C. Trustees : JOHN CAMERON, M.L.A. How. A. NORTON, M.L.C. Cor. JOHN THOMSON, M.B. Hon. Auditor ; G. WATKINS. Hon. Lanternist: A. G. JACKSON. / CONTENTS. SYMBRANCHIATE AND APODAL FISHES NEW TO AUSTRALiA.—J. Douglas Ogilby, ge 27th, i906 ae ' SOME NEW PEDICULATE FISHES.—/. Douglas Ogilby, April 2nd, 1906 NOTES ON EXHIBITS.—J. Douglas ie March 5th, 1906.. ; = ee A NEW TREE FROG FROM BRISBANE.—J. Douglas Ogilby, April 2nd, 1906 NOTES ON LEPIDOPTERA. From tue Vierniry or BrisBANE, THE Larv& or Wuicnh Frrp on Lorantuus.—R. Illidge, March 5th, 1906 ON A NEW TERAPON, From tue SranTHorRPE District, SouTHERN QvEENSLAND.—J. Douglas Ogilby, August 31st, 1906 MENTAL DEVELOPMENT IN ANIMALS,—Aon. A. Norton, M.L.C., October 4th, 1906... NOTES ON AN APPARENTLY NEW SPECIES OF HYALINE DAPHNIA.—W. R. Colledge, October 27th, 1905 ... De- cember 22nd, 1906... PAGE 17 27 31 33 37 41 53 61 SYMBRANCHIATE AND APODAL FISHES NEW TO AUSTRALIA. By J. DOUGLAS OGILBY. [Read before the Royal Society of Queensland, January 27, 1906.] In the following pages will be found full descriptions of three additions to the fish-fauna of Australia. These are: (1) The very interesting symbranch Amphipnous cuchia, not hitherto recorded east of Burmah, but now described from a Queensland specimen. The small order to which this fish belongs is, however, well represented in our waters by one, perhaps two, species of Chilobranchus and a Symbranchus. (2) A moringuid from North Australian waters belonging to the genus Aphthalmichthys, which I am constra ned to describe as new, since it is in many respects intermediate between the typical vermiform A. javanicus and the more robust A. abbreviatus. And (3) a murenid, the easterly limit of whose range has so far been given as Java, but of which we have now two fine specimens from the rivers flowing into Moreton Bay. ORDER SYMBRANCHIA. THE SINGLE-SLIT EELS. Bopy anguilliform. Scales small or absent. Premaxillary, maxillary, and palatine elements well developed and dist nct {rom one another, the first constituting the entire outer margin of the upper jaw. Opercular apparatus complete. Gill-openings inferior, confluent in a single slit ; accessory branchial organs sometimes present. Vertical fins vestigiary, reduced to folds of the skin; no paired fins. Vent posterior. Cranium with the bones firmly united; a pair of exoccipital condyles. Symplectic bone A 2 SYMBRANCHIATE AND APODAL FISHES present or absent. Supraoccipital separated from the frontals by the parietals. Shoulder-girdle typically con- nected with the cranium; no mesocoracoid. Vertebre numerous, the anterior not modified. Ribs present. No air-bladder, nor pyloric coca. Ovaries with oviducts (cvv, together ; Bpdyxea, gills: in allusion to the confluence of the gill-openings). Fresh and brackish waters of India and Burmah, ranging northward to Korea and Japan, and eastward through the Malay Archipelago to Australia and Tasmania ; one species from intertropical America. Four families, one of them exclusively marine. The SymBraNncuiA form a small order of eel-like fishes of widely diversified structure inter se. They have been separated by the late Professor Cope into two suborders, which, with certain necessary modifications originally pointed out by Dr. Gill, are here adopted. Jordan and Evermann (Fishes of North and Middle America, part 1, p. 342) remark of them :—‘‘ They are probably related to the Apodes, but this is not certain, and in the structure of the head they approach more nearly to the true fishes. They rep-esent degraded rather than primitive types, and the line of their descent is as yet unknown. It is not even certain that the forms grouped in this order are closely related.’’? From this it will, therefore, be readily under- stood that the members of this order form a peculiarly interesting and instructive group. Three out of the four symbranchoid families have now been shown to inhabit Australian waters, while the inclusion of the fourth is probably a mere matter of time. The principal differences between the Symbranchia and the Apodes are given below in parallel columns :— SYMBRANCHIA APODES. Premaxillaries present, forming the Premaxillaries absent or atrophied, lateral dentigerous border of the the maxillaries forming the upper jaw; the maxillaries dis- lateral dentigerous border of tinct, lying along their inner edge. the upper jaw. Gill-openings confluent across the Gill-openings separate, lateral throat. (except in the Synaphobran- chide). Shoulder-girdle typically connected Shoulder-girdle not connected with with the cranium. the cranium. BY J. DOUGLAS OGILBY. 3 The Synaphobranchide, mentioned above, form a small group of deep-sea eels from the Atlantic and Pacific Oceans. They agree with the symbranchiids superficially in having inferior, externally confluent gill-openings, but may always be recognised by the presence of a rayed dorsal and anal fin, well developed pectorals, and an anteriorly situated vent. Appended is an analysis of the families of the Symbranchia :— a. Body scaleless; no accessory branchial apparatus; shoulder-girdle connected with the skull by an osseous bifureate post-temporal (Ichthyocephalt). b. Gill-membranes free from the isthmus; gill-arches four, the fringes well developed. c. No palatine teeth ; vent in the anterior half of the length. Mono- typic. ae oi i, CHILOBRANCHID 2. cc. Palatine teeth present; vent in the posterior half of the length. Monotpyic. a .. ll, SYMBRANCHID 2%. bb. Gill-membranes almost wholly cishited to the isthmus; gill-arches three, the fringes rudimentary ; palatine teeth small, in a narrow band; vent in the posterior half of the length. Monotypic. Ms iii. MONOPTERID 2. aa. Body scaly; an accessory franciial apparatus; ‘shoulder-girdle without osseous connection with the skull. (Holostomi). d, Gill-membranes almost wholly united to the ‘isthmus; gill-arches three, separated by narrow slits, the fringes rudimentary ; palatine teeth stout, uniserial:; vent in the posterior half of the length. Monotypic. as sé .. iv. AMPHIPNOID. AMPHIPNOID &. Body anguilliform, covered with minute scales, which are arranged in longitudinal series. Head moderate, the snout very short and blunt. Mouth anterior, with wide, oblique cleft. Upper jaw with several transverse series of small teeth anteriorly, the lateral teeth uniserial ; palatine teeth in a single row, stout, blunt, recurved, and com- pressed ; mandibular teeth similar to but rather larger than those of the maxillary. Anterior nostril minute, above athe front margin of the eye; posterior valvular, behind its middle. Eye very small, superolateral. Gill- membranes united, almost wholly attached to the isthmus ; gill-openings reduced to a confluent slit, situated on the ventral surface ; gill-arches three, separated by narrow slits, 4 SYMBRANCHIATE AND APODAL FISHES the branchial lamelle! rudimentary ; accessory breathing apparatus present, communicating with the gill-cavity ; branchiostegals six. Vertical fins rudimentary, reduced to more or less distinct folds of the skin; no paired fins. Vent situated in the posterior half of the length. Cranium short, not protecting the entire branchial apparatus. Shoulder-girdle not attached to the cranium by a bony process.” Vertebre—fide Giinther—106+65=171 Fresh and brackish waters of the Punjab, extending to Bengal, Orissa, Assam, and Burmah (Day). Eastern Queensland. Monotypic. Since it is by means of these lamelle that the water, inhaled by all gill-bearing animals, whether larval or adult, is deoxygenated previous to its expulsion at the gill-openings, it will be easily understood that the absence or degradation of these organs, unless invalidated by some counter- balancing provision, is a matter of very serious moment to such an animal ; of so great moment, indeed, that if we were to take a freshly caught fish, and having carefully removed with a pair of scissors the delicate filaments which fringe the outer edge of the gill-arches, return it in all its seemingly pristine vigor to its native element, but few moments would elapse before it began to exhibit all the symptoms of asphyxiation, and death would shortly result. In the case of Amphipnous, however, the difficulty is met by the pro- vision of an accessory breathing apparatus, which com- municates directly with the gill-cavity and enables the fish to absorb atmospheric air by a simple act of suspiration ; its dependence on this organ is easily demonstrable by placing the fish in a glass jar, the mouth of which has been closed by a piece of gauze or fine wire netting ; if this be sunk beneath the surface so as to deny all access to the air, 1Taylor (Gleanings in Science ii, p. 173), referring to these lamelle, informs us that the second gill-arch alone possesses them in the shape of ‘a few long fibrils attached to the middle of the arch, and occupying but a very small extent of its surface,” while ‘‘the third supports in the place of lamine a thick and semitransparent tissue, which in large individuals of the species possesses a fringed or denticulated appearance on its edge.” 2Giinther (Catal. Fish., viii, p. 13) describes the posttemporal as being “‘ very small and cartilaginous, continued into a muscle, which is attached to the skull.” BY J. DOUGLAS OGILBY. 5 asphyxiation will supervene so soon as the supply of atmospheric air contained in the gular reservoirs becomes exhausted, and the fish will perish, just as you or I would were we unfortunately placed in a similar predicament, as for instance in a damaged submarine. AMPHIPNOUS. Amphipnous, Miller, Abhandl. Akad. Berlin, 1839, p. 244 (cuchia). Ophichthys, Swainson, Nat. Hist. Classif. Fish, ii, p. 336, 1839 (punctatus =cuchia) ; not Ophichthus, Ahl, 1789. Pneumabranchus, McClelland, Calcutta Journ. Nat. Hist., v, 1844, p. 192 (striatus =cuchia). Characters and distribution of the genus included in those of the family. Only one species recognised. (audi, around; zvoos, breathing: in reference to the confluent gill-openings). AMPHIPNOUS CUCHIA. Murena pinnis carens; Dondoo Paum, Russell, Fishes Vizagapatam, i, p. 25, pl. xxxv, 1803; Ankapilly Lake. Unibranchapertura cuchia, Hamilton-Buchanan, Fishes Ganges, p. 363, pl. xvi, fig. 4, 1822; South-eastern Bengal. Amphipnous cuchia, Muller, Abhandl, Akad. Berlin, 1839, p. 244— Cantor, Malay. Fishes, p. 338 footnote, 1850; Punjab — Bleeker, Verh. Batay. Gen. xxv, 1853, Bengal en Hindoustan, p. 78—Kaup, Catal. Apod. Fishes, p 120, 185€—Gunther, B.M. Catal. Fishes, viii, p. 13, 1870; Bengal—Day, Fishes India, p. 656, pl. clxvii, -fig. 1, 1878—id., Faun. Brit. India, i, p. 69, 1889, fig. 27. Ophichthys punctatus, Swainson, Nat. Hist. Classif. Fishes, ii, p. £86, 1889. Pneumabranchus striatus, McClelland, Caleuita Journ. Nat. Hist., v, 1844, pp. 195 & 219, pl. xiii. Pneumabranchus leprosus, McClelland, ibid.. pp. 196 and 219. Body slender, its depth 143 in the space between the extremity of the snout and the vent, and 23 in the total length. Length of head 5 in that of the trunk and 93 in the total length. Snout very short and truncate, wider than long, as long as the eye, not projecting beyond the lower jaw. Eye very small, situated in the anterior fifth of the head, oval, its horizontal diameter twice as long as its vertical, the former }. of the length of the head and more than the interorbital width. Cleft of mouth wide, its length 1 of that of the head. Lips fleshy, laterally plicated. Dorsal fold originat- ing rather less than the length of the head in advance of the vertical from the vent. Length of tail 1% 6 SYMBRANCHIATE AND APODAL FISHES. in that of the head and trunk. Uniform brown, the snout, mandible, and branchial region livid gray. (Cuchia; the native name of this species among the Bengalese). Length to 600 millimeters. Distribution similar to that of the family, of which it is the sole representative. MEASUREMENTS IN MILLIMETERS. Total length oe é ac oe 40 36 nt So i010) Length of head (to gill- Soomine) aN or oe set, mOleD Length of trunk 56 on Ns we Bc .. 155-5 Length from tip of snout i vent. Fa Ee a4 ne Bien sallts%d| Length of tail .. 36 5c 5c ote at a0 yOs Depth of body ore oe 20 Be 36 Be so lis Cleft of mouth Be ae ys aye Be ay: Bo a llOck This unique Australian example belongs to the col- lection of the South Australian Museum at Adelaide, and is labelled as having been collected in Edcombe ( ? Edge- combe) Bay, Queensland. It formed one of a collection of catfishes and eels kindly forwarded to me for examin- ation some years ago by the Trustees of that Museum, to whom I take this opportunity of again returning my grate- ful thanks. I have gone very fully into the history of this well known Indian fish for two sufficient reasons ;—firstly, because this is the earliest record of its occurence in Aus- tralian waters, and indeed, so far as I am aware, in any waters east of Burmah, no mention being made of it as a Malayan fish by either Cantor or Bleeker. I have, how- ever, no reason to doubt that the locality given above is correct, even though its presence in the intermediate area has escaped the detection of such keen observers as the two biologists referred to as well as of all our Australian col- lectors ; and secondly, because I do not know any detailed diagnosis of the family Amphipnoide. Though the genus Amphipnous has been included in the Symbranchide, (though separated as a subfamily, Amphipnoina) by Giinther, Day, and others, the presence of scales and of a lung-like accessory branchial organ, and the degradation of the osseous attachment between the shoulder-girdle BY J. DOUGLAS OGILBY. i and the skull to a simple cartilaginous rod, fully justify its separation from the other symbranchoid genera, though in the reduction in the number of gill-arches and the rudi- mentary nature of the gill-fringes it approaches Mono- plerus. Writing of this fish (Fish. Ind., p. 655) India’s cele- brated ichthyologist, the late Surgeon-General Day, re- marks :—“ This amphibious fish, when kept in an aquarium, may be observed to constantly rise to the sur- face for the purpose of respiring atmospheric air direct. It usually remains with its snout close to the surface, and in like manner hes in the grassy sides of pools and stagnant pieces of water, so that without trouble it may obtain its modicum of air.’ In fact, the principal accessory breathing organ, which, in the form of a lung-like sac, lies along each side of the throat, and communicates with the gill-cavity, is so beautifully arranged that it performs the principal functions of respiration, being emptied or in- flated at the will of the individual. When distended with air these sacs have the appearance of a pair of rounded cushions, one on each side of the throat. ORDER APODES. MORINGUID &. THE SHORT-TAILED EELs. Tongue present ; gill-openings narrow and _ inferior ; heart far behind the gills ; vertical fins confined to the tail, which is very short ; pectoral fins small or wanting. The moringuids form a small and compact group of -enchelycephalous eels, having affinities on the one side to the Ophichthyide, on the other to the Murenide. No species has hitherto been recorded from the Australian seas, and the announcement, now made, of the occurrence of an Aphthalmichthys on our northern coast is entirely due to the acumen of Mr. George Masters, who first called my attention to the specimen—which is exhibited in the collection of the Macleay Museum, Sydney University— and assured me that to his personal knowledge it came from the ”’ North Coast of Australia, probably Port Dar- win.” There is nothing remarkable in the presence of a moringuoid eel in our waters ; indeed, our lack of know- 8 SYMPRANCHIATE AND APODAL FISHES ledge of the marine fauna of northern and western Aus- tralia is probably responsible for the omission of other species belonging to the family, the head-quarters of which are situated in the Malay Archipelago, from whence they have spread northward to Japan* and westward to the Ganges. Three genera of of Moringuide are here recognised, and since all may possibly occur on the Queensland coast, the subjoined analysis, which, taken in conjunction with the short family diagnosis given above, will greatly sim- plify identification, is arranged :— a. Dorsal and anal fins with distinct rays. 6. Vertical fins continuous, the anal origirating near the vent ; pectoral fins minute or rudimentary .. .. PSEUDOMORINGUA. bb. Vertical fins interrupted mesially, the anal originating well behind the vent; pectoral fins present. .. .. MORINGUA aa. De=rsal and anal fins reduced to a low rayless fold, with a few feeble rays at the extreme tip of the tail only ; ;ectoral fins absent or ves- tigial. ms a ac .. APHTHALMICHTHYS. APHTHALMICHTHYS. Aphthalmichthys, Kaup, B. M. Catal. Apod. Fish., p. 105, 1856 (Vercrricvs). Body more or less vermiform and terete. Lateral line continuous, formed by a series of open, mucous pores. Head small or moderate, with narrow, pointed snout. Mouth with narrow, horizontal cleft, extending but little beyond the eye, the lower jaw the longer. Teeth in a single series on the jaws and vomer. Nostrils lateral, the anterior near the extremity of the snout, tubular; the posterior in front of and near the eye, oval and hori- zontal. Eyes small, anterior, indistinct. Gill-openings narrow, oblique, inferior. Vertical fins rudimentary, re- duced to a low fold of the skin ; a few feeble rays developed round the tip of the tail. Pectoral fins vestigiary or er- tirely wanting. Vent posterior, remote from the origin of the anal fold. Tail much shorter than the head and trunk. (3, privative; . oe ae v3 «a aya Depth of body (at gill-opening) . Bi a4 5c os as 60. Width of body (at gill-opening) 5 Length of snout ac ae xc oc 43 ae x 15. Diameter of eye Be am gis ae A SY de 6.5 Cleft of mouth 50 ie 50 a 2 oc 2s 61. Length of gill opening ae 3c 56 as 38 as 21. This eel, the first ‘recorded from Australian seas, was captured on January 4th, 1904, with hook and line by Mr. James 8. Cruse, «in the deep-water bend of the Pine River about four miles from the Bay.’”*® He describes it as playing very hard and being very fierce when landed. After getting it out on the bank, he continues—“ When I went to him he raised the fin along his back and looked very fierce. I cut the line not caring to touch him, and let him le ; he soon died, not living a long time as eels generally do. This species attains a length of ten feet and is probably the largest apodal fish in existence. I have not been able to learn anything about its habits, but it is a new exper ence to me to find one of the murenoid eels, a group usually 7A second and rather larger example was caught in the Brisbane River near Pinkenba in October and came into my hands through the kindness of Mr. V. H. Jeff, of Queen St. 8Mr. A. Graham, who kindly forwarded the specimen to the Museum on behalf of Mr. Cruse, gives the locality of the capture as ‘‘ Greenwood Pocket, Bald Hills.” BY J. DOUGLAS OGILBY. 15 strictly confined to the purest salt water, so far> ,up a’small river and away from its normal surroundings among rocks and reefs. 7 itor we Nye ee % on med on te a ‘ NAAT ee, WABI GIR 119 wave Hane deg ey a oh i } Ad Bie WAL LTE DC We fos BION “Ais : we . ‘ a y US = a MM vo | , 4 ‘ > * ,. J _ : ‘ + * > vf : ' need a * : * * - ry ps ” ran Nets 7 \ ' J ' , ‘ : . i Bie oY y Mare r, py As : . ‘ r i. re Pas, ‘i eee ; Tey, r? a Ae S01 te a i id oe - 7 ‘ae at = : ae ey te ‘ uy v ; ; 1 ; A Wy SOME NEW PEDICULATE FISHES. By J. DOUGLAS OGILBY. [ Read before the Royal Society of Queensland 2nd April, 1906.] RHYCHERWUS, gen. nov. Form robust; body compressed, elevated in front, rapidly tapering behind. Head large, as deep as long. Skin smooth, densely clothed with cutaneous appendages. Mouth protractile, with moderate subvertical cleft; maxillary thin and flexible, remiform, extending well beyond cleft of mounth. Jaws, vomer, and palatines with small cardiform teeth; tongue smooth. Eyes moder- ate; infraorbital groove deep and naked. Gill-opening formng a simple longitudinal sht on the lower edge of the pseudobrachium some distance in advance of the fin. All the fins with numerous appendages : dorsal spines well de- veloped, erect, mobile, free ; rostral spine slender, rising directly from the tip of the snout, and terminating in a bi- fid tentacle ; frontal and occipital spines stouter than but as fiexible as the rostral, widely separatea, with a deep naked fossa intervening, the latter inserted ar behind the eye ; second dorsal with 13 rays, most of which terminate in along filament: anal fin with 8 simple rays, inserted below the terminal third of and far overlapping the soft dorsal : caudal fin rounded, with 9 rays, all except the outer pair branched : caudal peduncle free: pseudobrachium :mmobile, firmly fixed to the side by the enveloping cuticle, pectoral fin large and rounded, with 10 simple rays, extending, when appressed, to the origin of the anal: ventrals small and rounded, with 5 simple rays. (pexypos, ragged: in allusion to its shaggy appearance due to the crowded cutaneous appendages). Southern Shores of Australia (Victoria and South Australia). Two species. This genus forms a connecting B 18 NEW PEDICULATE FISHES link between Antennarius and Pterophrynoides, agreeing with the former in the robust form, the completely isolated rostral spine, the fixed pseudobrachium, and the small ventrals ; with the latter principally in the smooth skin, (See p. 24 infra for key). RHYCHERUS WILD, sp. nov. D. ui, 13: A.8: C. 9: P.10: V. 5. Cutaneous appen- dages simple or ramose, longest on the head. Depth of body 3; of the total length. Upper profile from tip of snout to origin of soft dorsal undulating, the concavity between the frontal and occipital spines, wide and deep. Length of head 1%, its width 2? in the total length. Mental tubercle small; length of maxillary about 4 of that of the head, its distal extremity rounded and as wide as the eye. Snout 6} in the length of the head, 3: in that of the maxillary, and equal to the eye and the interorbital width. Rostral spine terminating in a pair of widely separated fleshy lobes, forming to- gether a crescentic appendage. behind which is a low broad petiolate flap. bearing on each side a criniform filament ; height of spine 2 of the length of the head ; it extends, when depressed, beyond the naked interspinous fossa; second spine } longer than the first, fringed, bearing near its ex- tremity a pair of lateral ramose filaments, and reaching back to the base of the occipital spine, which is similar, but shorter, and bears in addition a pair of median filaments, which are ciliated distally and more than half the length of the spine; height of spine 2} in the head, its tip somewhat dilated and _ papillose, reaching, when de- pressed, to the origin of the second dorsal. Length of second dorsal rather more than its distance from the tip of the snout and rather less than the head ; first ray shghtly pro- duced ; second and third normal ; middle rays (and probably the posterior) terminating in a long filament, the fifth* about 2 of the length of the fin ; the rays, when depressed, reach far beyond the base of the caudal. Anal fin origin- ating below the 9th dorsal ray, rounded, the middle ray the highest, 1' time the basal length, % of the highest dor- sal ray, and reaching a little beyond the base of the caudal ; * Our specimen is in bad condition, and most of the radial filaments are broken. BY J. DOUGLAS OGILBY. 19 its length is 2} in that of the head, its distance from the tip of the closed mandible $ of the total length ; last dorsal and anal rays without membrane, leaving a clear space between them and the caudal fin. Length of caudal fin 3? of space between its base and the last dorsal ray 93, least depth of caudal peduncle 7} in the total length. Free por- tion of pseudobrachium and pectoral fin 3} inthe total length. Ventral fin 2} in the head. Uniform brown.t+ (Named for Charles James Wild, Acting Curator of the Queensland Museum, by whose courtesy I am permitted to make the above description.) Type in the Queensland Museum, Brisbane Length to tip of middle caudal ray, 77 millimeters. Distribution :—Southern Australia. This species differs considerably from Chironectes bifurcatus, McCoy,§ with which, however, it is undoubtedly congeneric. TATHICARPUS, gen. nov. Form more or less robust ; body compressed, elevated in front, rapidly tapering posteriorly. Head large, longer than deep. Skin dotted with small tubercles, separated from each other by a naked interspace, and each bearing a bifid spinule. Head and body with cutaneous appendages in varying number. Mouth protractile, with moderate, subvertical cleft ; maxillary thin, flexible, remiform, with a strong median longitudinal ridge, extending far beyond cleft of mouth. Jaws, vomer, and palatines with strong unequal, cardiform teeth ; tongue smooth. Eyes moderate, with well developed supracilary ridge ; infraorbital groove deep, naked. Gill-opening a rather large oval orifice, pierced at the end of a prominent papilla, and situated below and behind the inferior axil of the pseudobrachium. Fins spinulose with or without cutaneous appendages : dorsal spine erect, mobile, the two last membraniferous ; rostral spine slender, long, inserted upon a small bony tubercle above + After a long immersion in alcohol. This cannot be taken as any indication of its true coloration. § Prodr. Zbol. Vic., ii, p. 87, dec. xiii, 188€, pl. 128. 20 NEW PEDICULATE FISHES the tip of the snout and terminating in a simple tentacle ; frontal and occipital spines shorter and stouter than the rostral, latter inserted immediately behind eye, widely separated, without intervening naked fossa; all the fin-rays simple; second dorsal high, with 11 slender rays, connected by delicate, diaphanous membrane, and deeply cleft at the extremity : anal fin with 7 rays, similar to second dorsal, and inserted entirely or almost entirely behind it : caudal fin long and rounded, with 9 rays ; caudal peduncle free: pseudobrachium almost wholly free and mobile ; pectoral fin long and narrow, with 7 rays: ventrals moderate, pointed, with 5 rays, inserted behind the oc- cipital spine. (rafe’s, extending ; «ap7os, wrist : in reference to the greatly elongated actinosts). East Coast of Queensland (Port Curtis). Two species. In the length and mobility of the pseudobrachium this genus is only approached by Brachionichthys, from which, however, the position of the gill-openigs widely separates it. Key to the Species. Head and body with a few small scattered filaments; pectoral fin reaching to the base of the caudal... ae OT O06 an butleri. Head and body with numerous long ramulos2 filaments; pectoral fin reaching to the end of the base of the anal. o6 as MUSCOSUS. D. 13,1, 11: A. 7: C. 9: P. 7; V. 5. ‘Cutaneoustaaen- dages in small number, simple, longest on the chin, throat, and corner of the mouth. Depth of body 1% in the total length. Upper profile from tip of snout to base of occipital spine gently, thence to origin of second dorsal strongly convex. Length of head 12, its width 33 in the total length. Mental tubercle small; maxillary extending to below the posterior border of the orbit, its length 24 in that of the head, its distal extremity rounded, and about half as wide as the eye. Snout 6 in the length of the head, 33 in that of the maxillary, 14 in the diameter of the eye, and equal to the interorbital width. Rostral spine & of the head, extending, when depressed, midway along the interdorsal space ; frontal spine 4 of the rostral, curved, extending, as also does its membrane, to the base of the occipital spine ; occipital spine similar to but much longer than the frontal, bearing anteriorly a long median and sub- BY 3. DOUGLAS OGILBY. 21 terminal filament, its height 2¢in the head, and reaching backwards beyond the origin of the second dorsal, to the base of which it is attached by membrane. Length of second dorsal rather less than its distance from the tip of the snout and 13 in the length of the head ; rays subequal, the third the highest, ? of the basal length ; de- pressed rays reaching slightly beyond the base of the caudal. Anal fin originating behind the second dorsal, acutely pointed, the middle ray the highest, 2; in the basal length, a little higher than the highest dorsal ray, and extending far beyond the basa of the caudal; its length is rather more than } that of the head; its distance from the tip of the closed mandible + of the total length: last dorsal and anal rays without membrane, leaving a clear space between them and the caudal. Length of caudal fin 2:, of space between its base and the last dorsal ray 553, least depth of caudal peduncle 62 in the total length. Pectoral fin extending, when depressed, to the root of the caudal; its length with that of the free pseudobrachium about half the total length. Second ventral ray the long- est, } of the head. Roseate ; inter-and post-orbital regions, deep violescent gray studded with blackish spots and bars ; the whole of the eye, except the pupil, which is yellow, suffused with a lighter tint of the same; a broad band across the preorbital and the inner edge of the maxillary violaceous gray; entire postmental, thoracic, and sub- opercular regions suffused with lac ; tip of chin violet; a round violaceous spot on the side of the head below the post- orbital blotch; a broad irregular violaceous band, with deeply embayed edges, and containing blotches and spots of deep black, from below the eight anterior rays of the second dorsal to the inner angle of the pseudobrachium ; a large rounded spot of the same color below the middle of the ap- pressed limb; a second band nearly covering the caudal peduncle ; all the filaments, wherever situated, deep black. Rostral spine with alternate rings of violet and white, the tentacle blackish ; membrane of frontal spine purple ; basal half of occipital spine roseate, the rest purple ; its entire membrane, except the outer angle, rosy ; rays of soft dorsal blackish, the connecting membrane hyaline, more or less 22 NEW PEDICULATE FISHES clouded with violet ; anal fin similar to the soft dorsal, but crossed by four dark bars, the basal one continuous, the others interrupted ; caudal rays with black and yellow rings, the membrane uniformly hyaline ; posterior half of the outer edge of the pseudobrachium and the pectoral rays black- ish ; ventral rays similar with lighter tips. (Named for Dr. A. Graham Butler, its discoverer). Type in the Queensland Museum, Brisbane Length to tip of middle caudal ray 93 millimeters. Distribution : Port Curtis, Queensland. Writing of this species Dr. Graham Butler informs me :—‘‘ The specimen in question was caught by the local fishermen. while netting among coral and seaweed for Trumpeter at ‘North End’, port Curtis Harbour. They had not seen one like it before, so it is evidently uncommon Mere... 4a The color was a brilliant orange.’’ Within the few days which elapsed between its capture and my receipt of it, the brilliant orange had faded to a dead white, with here and there a roseate tinge. The most noticeable character in this fish is of course the enormous elongation of the carpal bones, which gives to the pectoral limb very much the appearance of the fore- leg of a frog, and like it is cabable of moving easily upwards or downwards, but can only move forwards to a right angle with the body from the joint which unites it to the pectoral arch, the want of elasticity in the axillary membrane not permitting of a further movement in that direction. The second joint, however, allows of the pectoral rays being laid directly forwards alongside of the proximal actinosts. The fin itself is narrow, and resembles more the claws of a bird than the rays of a fish. TATHICARPUS MUSCOSUS, Sp. nov. Head and body, except the abdominal region, with numerous long ramulose cutaneous appendages. Depth of body 13, length of head 13, width of head 25 in the total length. Length of maxillary 23 in that of the head. Snout 52 in the head, 2? in the BY J. DOUGLAS OGILBY 98 maxillary, equal to the diameter of the eye, and about % more than the interorbital width. Rostral spine 2; inthe length of the head, extending, when depressed, slightly beyond the occipital spine; frontal spine about 2 of the rostral, its membrane not extending to the succeeding spine, which, like it, terminates in long ramulose filaments ; occipital spine similar to the frontal and as high as the rostral, its membrane extending about midway to the second dorsal. Length of second dorsal about # of that of the head; fourth ray the highest, 3 of the basal length; the depressed rays do not reach the base of the caudal. Anal fin originating below the penulti- mate dorsal ray, its middle ray about half the basal length. Length of caudal fin 2%, of space between its base and the last dorsal ray 53, least depth of peduncle 7 in the total length. Pectoral fin extending, when ap- pressed, to above the end of the anal, its length with that of the free pseudobrachium rather less than half of the total length. Second ventral ray 34inthe head. Other charac- ters as in 7’. butlert. Pale brown, with indistinct greenish spots and ocelli, the abdominal region with a yellow tinge. Rostral spine with alternate rings of gray and brown, the terminal tentacle darker brown ; frontal and occipital spines pale brown, the membranes hyaline with greenish ocelli ; rays and membrane of second dorsal with scattered dark green spots and dots; anterior portion of anal fin purple, the posterior rays purple-spotted, the entire fin with three hight. dark-edged cross-bands ; caudal rays with regular series of dark spots: pectoral limbs and fins and ventrals brown. more or less blotched and spotted with green. (muscosus, mossy : in allusion to the long ramulose filaments, with which the head, body, and fins are adorned). Type in the Queensland Museum, Brisbane. Length to tip of middle caudal rays 98 millimeters. Distribution :—Port Curtis, Queensland Appended is a key to the genera of the Australasian antennarids :— a. ANTENNARIID 4%. Skin naked and smooth or tuber- cular and spinulose ; cleft of mouth vertical or sub- vertical, the lower jaw projecting ; gills 24 or 4 23; 24 NEW PEDICULATE FISHES no pseudobranchie ; pseudobrachium well developed, strongly geniculated, with three actinosts ; ventral fins present. b. Head more or less compressed ; anterior dorsal fin with three spines. c. Body robust and ovate; palatine teeth present ; gill-opening in or behind lower axil of pseudo- brachium ; five ventral rays ; stomach dilatable ; an air-bladder (Antennariine). d. Gill-openings pore-like ; anal fin opposite to soft dorsal; pseudobrachium not produced as a mobile limb ; pectoral rays at least nine. e. Two anterior spines of first dorsal united by membrane, the third isolated; ventral fins small : ah SaccaRIUs. ee. All three spines of first dorsal isolated. f. Skin granular and spinulose ; ventral fins small ANTENNARIUS. ff. Skin smooth, without spinuliferous granules. g. Soft dorsal and anal fins short ; pectoral undivided. h. Rostral spine long, inserted on tip of snout ; occipital spine free; pseudo- brachium immobile ; ventral fins small RHYCHERUS. hh. Rostral spine short, inserted on base of frontal spine ; occipital spine mem- braniferous ; pseudobrachium mobile ; ventral fins large PTEROPHRYNOIDES. gg. Soft dorsal and anal fins long; pecto- rals divided ; ventrals small TETRABRACHIUM. dd. Gill-openings enlarged and tubular; anal fin behind soft dorsal ; pseudobrachium produced as a free mobile limb; ventral fins moderate TATHICARPUS. cc. Body slender and elliptical; no palatine teeth; . gill-opening above and behind upper axil of BY J. DOUGLAS OGILBY. ah pseudobrachium ; four ventral rays; stomach not dilatable; no air bladder. (Brachicnich- thyine). i. Gill-openings small and tubular; two - poste- rior spines of first dorsal united by mem- brane; pseudobrachium produced as a free mobile limb; pectoral rays seven. BRACHIONICHTHYS. The subgeneric name Diceratias, given by Ginther* to Ceratias bispinosus from the Molucca seas, being un- tenable owing to the previous use of Diceratea by Oken in 1815 for a genus of mollusks, I propose to substitute Aischynichthys.+ *Zool., Challenger, xxii., p. 52, 1887. tduoxuvn, shame or disgrace; ixdis, a fish; hence a degraded form of fish. ; bes Cae” Unge Wisher) “i Gaera yah) i y? if eat? ‘ ¥ Pa is ’ j ‘ j ‘ ’ f 307 ’ ' - . ~ \ * ne ? 2 7, yn ht: : * ‘ oF ta | i> ry T “re " * Lh ” kK , ; ‘ ; ‘ 4 & i ia ae Vat wT NOTES ON EXHIBITS, By J. DOUGLAS OGILBY. [Read before the Royal Society of Queensland, 5th March, 1906. } Mr. PrestpENT, LADIES, AND GENTLEMEN,— I have the honor to place before your Society to-night the following exhibits of more or less general interest. In the first place I would call your attention to two specimens (Exhibits A. 1 and 2) of an extraordinary egg-case formed by a scyllioid shark, Chiloscyllium punctatum. This case is unique among all other known forms in the means employed to attach it after deposition to some foreign substance, such asa projecting point of coral or the root of a mangrove, and so insure the safety of the young fish from stress of weather during its helpless fetal state. In this egg-case you will readily see that, in place of the long tendriliform tentacle arising from each corner of the “ mer- maid’s purse,’ so familiar to all who know the sho es of the British Isles, we have a cunningly fashioned handle attached to one of the longer sides of the case, thus form- ing a perfectly appointed “ mermaid’s bag,” as shown in exhibit A. J., while A. 2 is the case from which the fetal shark (Exhibit B) was taken. This discovery, for which we are indebted to the patient research of Mr. John T. Jamison of Woody Point, is the more interesting because it proves the oviparity of the typical hemiscylline sharks, and necessitates a rearrangement of the scyllioid families, and incidentally confirms my long-expressed opinion of the generic validity of Hemiscyllium modestum, which I have placed with the ’‘ wobbegongs ”’ (Orectolobide) under the new generic title Brachelurus. My views on the sub- ject will be fully set forth in a paper now in preparation, which I hope soon to lay before the Society. 98. NOTES ON EXHIBiTS My next exhibits consist of specimens of small fresh- water fishes belonging to the family Gobiide, subfamily Eleotrine. These are chiefly remarkable in having been participators in the recent aerial escapade reported in the ‘‘ Telegraph,” where it was stated that during a heavy thunder-storm they came down alive in large numbers on Mildura Farm, Cooper’s Plain’s, last Monday; these specimens were in excellent condition, one in fact having survived its perilous journey through the air, and even more perilous journey corked up in a small medicine bottle for twelve hours in its captor’s pocket. I may here state that though I have frequently read of these ‘“‘showers of fishes,” this is only the second au- thentic instance which has come directly under my notice, the earlier of these being a couple of specimens in poor con- dition sent from Killarney to the State Museum by our late Premier, the Hon.’Arthur Morgan. These belonged to quite a different species from the Cooper’s Plains’ fishes, being examples of the pretty little Carp-Gudgeon (Caras- siops compressus, Ogilby), so common in all the creeks and water holes in the vicinity of Brisbane. And here I should like to direct your attention to the two very dissimilar forms of this fish which exist in Southern Queensland. The typical form, originally described by Krefft, from the Clarence River, is a short, stout fish, livingin sluggish, muddy creeks and swamps, and said to bury itself in the mud when pursued, as it habitually does during the winter months ; the second form is long, slender, and half-starved in appear- ance, so that, if it were not for the absolute s milarity of such structural charaters as the fin-formula and lepidosis as well as of the pattern of coloration, it might easily be taken for quite a distinct species ; it may conveniently be separated as C. c. montanus. To this latter form (exhibit D) the Killarney examples belong, and, as I am in- formed by my friend Mr. Joseph Lamb, this variety is only found in the head waters of the Condamine, while in the low-lying lands, near the coast only the robust form occurs. Difference of food and environment alone can account for this diss milarity. The species, which forms the text of the present com- munication, belongs to another section of the same group BY J. DOUGLAS OGILBY. 29 to which the fishes just referred to belong, and has a re- markable, if not a romantic history. Nearly eight years. ago Mr. Alfred Gale, the well known apiarist, iuformed me that he had seena number of fishes in a small stone tank, filled with various aquatic plants, in the Botanie Gardens, Sydney. W.th the permission of Mr. Maiden, we obtained some specimens, which to our astonishment proved to be a perfectly new eeotrin belonging to the Carassiops group, but differing generically in the larger number of dorsal spines and the greatly increased number of vertebre. On these characters with many others of purely specific value, I named the species Austrogobio galii. Exhibit E). I have since found that is it a common Southern Queensland species known to boys as the “ Fire- tail,’ and probable tound its way into the Sydney tank by means of ova attached to the leaves of water plants. Several theories have been propounded to account for the fail of various fishes during heavy rain-storms, the most generally accepted being that the phenomenon is due to a waterspout, but I think that the considerations here put forward will show that such a contention is untenable ; in all authenticated cases the fishes, when ex- amined by an expert—a very necessary proviso*—were found to belong to spec es wholly confined to a fresh-water existence, and it is a matter of common knowledge that we have nowhere in Queensland so large a body of fresh water as to be capable of giving birth to a water spout of such di- mensions as to draw up withit hundreds of fishes ; besides, a waterspout would not dissolve in rain but would come down en masse, to the destruction of the district on which it fell ; also in both the cases of which I have cognizance the species affected were bottom-feeding fishes which would hardly come under the influence of a waterspout as would such high-swimming fishes as the fry of mullet or bony bream. It seems to me that a much more feasible method of ac- counting for the phenomenon is to be found in the accom- panying explanation, which is, I believe, here suggested for the first time: Given that the cyclonic wind that usually precedes and, at least during its earlier stages, accompanies *The Cooper’s Plains’ -fishes were supposed to be young whiting (Sillago). 10) NOTES ‘ON EXHIBITS ‘a thunder storm in these latitudes, enters the foot of a gully down which a small creek flows, and gathering strength both from its confined position and on account of the enormous pressure both behind and above it, compelled to take the only available duection—forward—it would, as the gully grew narrower towards its upper end, be forced more and more down to the surface of the ground, with the effect that all movable objects thereon would be carried along, and on reaching the head and meeting a contrary current of air would be whirled up to the skies to come down again per- haps many miles from their point of departure ; a small stream of water flowing in an opposite direction to such a storm would be easily sucked up with allit contained. For the sake of comparison I exhibit a fine specimen of the “‘ Crim- son-spotted Trout-Gudgeon ” (Krefftius adspersus, Ogilby), which is also abundant in the creeks round Brisbane (Ex- hibit F). If this beautiful species be kept in an aquarium, it should, when full grown, be associated only with fishes as large or larger than itself, as it has cannibalistic propensities, which lead it to devour its own and other fry, while speci- mens of two inches and even more are not immune, as it will attack them and gnaw off their fins. My last exhibit (G) is a remarkable bone from the head of a selerode matous fish (either Balistes or Monacanthus), which appears to be an excrescence resultant on an injury, as it is not equally developed on both sides. The curious trigger-like apparatus by which these fishes are enabled to lock the first dorsal spine in an erect position for defensive purposes, is well shown in this exhibit, which has been lent to me by Mr. Squires. A NEW TREE FROG FROM BRISBANE, By J. DOUGLAS OGILBY. HYLA LUTEIVENTRIS, sp. nov. Tongue subcircular, moderately notched and_ free behind. Vomerime teeth in two very small groups, in the middle between the choanze. Head moderate, a little wider than long; snout subtriangular, rounded in front, much longer than the diameter of the eye, which equals its dis- tance from the nostril; canthus rostralis obtusely angular, loreal region oblique, conspicuously concave close behind the nostril. Interorbital region flat, its width equal to 24 diameters of the eye ; tympanum distinct, ? of the diameter of the eye. Three outer fingers ex- tensively webbed, the membrane reaching the disks of the second and fourth; no distinct rudiment of pollex ; toes nearly entirely webbed; disks rather more than half the diameter of the eye; subarticular tubercles moderate. Tibio-tarsal articulation reaching beyond the tip of the snout. Exposed upper surface of head and body finely, belly and hinder surface of thighs coarsely granulated. Upper surface of head, body, forearm, tibia, and tarsus, green, the head darkest ; a greenish yellow band from the nostril to the tympanum, passing below the eye, where it is widest; a similar spot on the occiput; an_ indistinct streak of the same color along the canthus rostralis and above the tympanum; upper surface of thighs vinous ; entire under surface and rest of the limb orange Male in breeding season with the outer edge of the first finger rough and brown, strongly contrasting with the rest of the hand. (luteus, orange-colored ; venter, belly). A NEW TREE FROG, BY J. DOUGLAS OGILBY. Measurements in millimeters. Length from snout to vent ste .. 44 Length of head < Me - ». 14-5 Width of head 33 ns As Beers | Length of snout of a as i per d Diameter of eye oF : $43 ee BN ee Width of interorbital region = 2” 10 Length of fore limb ee 28 a 3) Length of hind limb Ss ey ee a. Type in the Museum of the Amateur Fishermen’s Association of Queensland. Brisbane ; picked up in Wickham Street by the author. Belongs to the gracilenta-chloris group, Though I have followed Boulenger’s example, as typified in his Hyla chloris, in describing this form as a species, I consider that all the requirements of the case would be amply met if the three were looked upon as varieties of a single species. Their close relationship may be seen at once by a reference to the following key :— Snout shorter than diameter of orbit; tympanum dis- tinct ; tibio-tarsal articulation reaching to tip of snout ; upper arm and throat yellow; belly white. 1. (gracilenta) chloris. Snout as long as diameter of orbit; tympanum rather indistinct ; tibio-tarsal articulation reaching to between eye and tip of snout ; lower surface immaculate white. . 2. gracilenta (typica). Snout much longer than diameter of orbit ; tympanum dis- tinct ; tibio-tarsal articulation reaching well beyond tip of snout ; entire lower surfaces orange. ms 3. (gracilenta) luteiventris. While lately preparing a rough lst of the Queensland batrachians I discovered that two of the genera involved were masquerading under names to which they had no legal title. These are Chiroleptes and Cryptotis, both of Dr. Giinther. The former is preoccupied in Hemiptera by Kirby, 1831, and shouid be replaced by Phractops, Peters ; while the latter is similarly rendered unavailable through its use in Crus- tacea by Dana, 1852. I, therefore, propose as a substi- tute Adelotus. NOTES ON LEPIDOPTERA. FRoM THE VICINITY OF BRISBANE, THE LARV oF WHICH FEED ON LORANTHUS. By R. ILLIDGE. Read before the Royal Society of Queensland, 5th March, 1906. Tur fleshy foliage of the Mistletoe is subject to the attacks of a large number of lepidopterous insects, a great many being wholly attached to it; to the latter we confine our attention, commencing with the Rhopalocera, or true butterflies. Delias (Pieridz).—This genus is represented by four species, viz.—Argenthona, Aganippe, Nigvina, and Har- palyce. Argenthona and Nigrina are common, the latter especially so. Aganippe is rare about Brisbane, and Harpalyce I have never taken, but know oct instances of its capture by others; it 1s the common species in Southern N.S. Wales and Victoria, and is said (McCoy) to spin a curious tough silken web, on which all the larve pupate gregariously. The pupa of Nigrina is strongly bifid in front. In these four species the upper surface of the imago is rather plain, the under possessing all the gay colour. There are several broods of Nigrina and Argenthona during the year, and a winter form of the latter having much more black than in the summer, and the basal yellow strongly irrorated with black scales. Aganippe and Argenthona are sometimes greatly affected by parasitic insects, and probably the extreme rarity of the first-named is so caused. Of Argenthona we lately bred out a batch of 18 totally unaffected, but of the next brood of about the same number all were affected, but c 34 NOTES ON LEPIDOPTERA two. The third batch of about 15 closely following those parasitised, developed a fungoid disease, and were all lost, some not even having the power to pupate* Nacaduba (Lycenide) is represented by the very rare little butterfly N. palmyra, Feld.; but few specimens of which are to be found in Australian Cabinets, probably from want of knowledge of its habits. Pseudodipsas (Lycende).—Of this genus we find two representatives, P. digglesi and P. brisbanensis, both rare, the latter extremely so. Ogyris (Lycenide)—The members of this genus hitherto only known from Australia (a species has since been found in New Guinea) are undoubtedly all attached to the mistletoe (Loranthus), the larve being nocturnal, hiding in crevices during the day. In brilliancy they are probably only equalled amongst Australian butterflies by one or two species of Miletus. They are rapid flying insects, and usually very shy and wary, keeping near the tops of trees. Heterocera. Antherea.—Of this genus our mistletoe species Antherea loranthi is certainly the finest of the known Australian forms. We took its caterpillars many years ago in great number from a loranthus, on a high gum tree, attention being drawn to the insects through a storm having blown some down; an examination upward discovered the depleted foliage of the mistletoe, and a stiff climb resulted in our obtaining both larve and cocoons. IJt has the habit of spinning its cocoons of strong brown silk in a large mass, not singly, as our other species do. Teara Edwardsi is a species the larva of which should be handled with great care, as it sheds its hairs when touched, and these cause extreme irritation to the skin. The larve are strongly gregarious, and sometimes con- gregate under a shelter of loose silken web, which if you happen to get under and shake, loose hairs fall and cause exceeding discomfort—chillies rubbed on the skin will,. *Of the chrysalices that were formed, a couple were exhibited, in which the fungus could be distinetly seen in the abCominal seements. BY R. ILLIDGE. 85 perhaps, give some idea. It is the most destcuctive of all the insects attacking Loranthus, occasionally com- pletely denuding it of foliage and even killing the plant. The moth is rarely seen. Agarista contorta is, next to Agarista agricola, perhaps the finest of the genus, which is largely represented in Australia. They are day-flyng moths, the present species being velvety black with zig-zag yellow markings, and a red-tipped body. It is seldom seen, for it frequents the tops of the Casuarina trees. The larva is a very hand- some one, and is coloured somewhat like the imago, velvet- black banded with yellow and orange red. Ophiusa tirrhaca and Ophiusa parcemacula are two pretty noctuid moths, ochreous or greenish-yellow, with black markings. They are amongst those that perforate and suck the juices of fruits. Xylorycta heliomacula is the imago of a larva that bores the stems of the mistletoe, and is richly adorned in shining fuscous purple and bright ochreous yellow. Delias argenthona Teara Edwardsi ,, higrina Agarista contorta », aganippe Antheraea loranthi ,», harpalyce Ophiusa tyrrhaca Nacaduba palmyra 9 parcemacula Pseudodipsas Digglesi Xylorycta heliomacula Brisbanensis Ogyris amaryllis genoveva abrota NOTE ON THE DISSEMINATION OF THE MISTLE- TOK BY BIRDS. The most active agents in the dissemination of the mistletoe are birds, chief amongst which is undoubtedly the Swallow Dicaeum (Dicaeum hirundinaceum). The steely blue and vivid crimson plumage of the male of this makes it a most conspicuous object amongst the mistletoes in flower and fruit. It swallows the berries whole, and the undigested seeds pass through still covered with much of the viscid matter characteristic of the fruit of this plant. 36 NOTES ON LEPIDOPTERA, BY R. ILLIDGE. When dropped on the branch of a tree they adhere by reason of the glutinous substance noted, and winds and rain fail to dislodge them. Germination soon takes place for the passage through the bird’s body seems to specially fit them for that purpose, and if the tree prove a suitable host they thrive, otherwise the young plant dies off before attaining any size. ON A NEW TERAPON FROM THE STANTHORPE DISTRICT, SOUTHERN QUEENSLAND. By J. DOUGLAS OGILBY. Read before the Royal Society of Queensland, 31st. August, 1906. TERAPON IDONEUS, sp. nov. Wuite’s Prercu. D. xi 10: A. in 8; Sc. 8-54-22; Ll. 46. DeprH of body equal to length of head, 34 in the total length Dorsal profile much more strongly arched than the abdominal. Upper profile of head obliquely linear, the snout somewhat pointed. Diameter of eye 5$ in the length of the head and 13 in that of the snout. Interorbital region flat, its width 33 in the length of the head. Jaws equal. Maxillary extending to the vertical from the middle of the eye, its length 25 in that of the head, the width of its distal extremity 3 of the diameter of the eye. No vomerine or palatine teeth. Preorbital in- distinctly roughened posteriorly. Preopercle very finely serrated on and above the rounded anyle, smooth below, with 9 or LO series of small scales ; interopercle with 3 series. Opercle with a pair of strong bony prominences, which hardly constitute true spines, the lower much the Jarger. Free edge of the coracoid bone finely and evenly denticu- lated. Gill-rakers, 4 + 11, mostly tubercular, the longest but 7 ; of the diameter of the eye. Dorsal fin low, originating well behind the base of the pectorals, the spines increasing in height to the 5th. and 6th., which are 25 in the length of the head and about equal to the longest soft ray; first spine about half the length: of the last, which is shorter than the penultimate and half 38 ON A NEW TERAPON the height of the soft fin. Anal fin as long as its distance from the caudal; the 2nd. spine much stronger and a trifle longer than the 3rd., 4 in the length of the head. Outer borders of soft dorsal and anal fins convex. Caudal fin subtruncate or very feebly emarginate with the angles rounded, the outer rays 54 in the total length; caudal peduncle rather slender, its least depth 14 in its length behind the dorsal fin and 22? in the depth of the body. Pectoral fin rounded, with 15 rays, 73 in the total length. Ventral fins somewhat pointed, originating well behind and rather longer than the pectorals, 1} in the head, and not nearly reaching to the vent. Back blackish, washed with deep purple; sides grayish, each scale with a dusky border ; under side of head, throat, and abdomen silvery white, slightly tinged with yellow. Dorsal, caudal, and pectoral fins with a greenish yellow wash ; anal pale bluish, edged with white ; ventrals white, tipped with yellow (idoneus, serviceable, suitable : that is, as food). Length of type from tip of snout to end of middle caudal ray 238 millimeters. Type in the Queensland Museum, Brisbane. Upper Condamine River, Southern Queensland. The type specimen of this handsome Terapon was brought to the Museum by Mr. D. O’Connor, who had received it from a correspondent at Stanthorpe. The example was almost immediately placed in my hands by Mr. de Vis for report thereon, with the result that I am, though reluctantly, constrained to consider it an undescribed species. I say “reluctantly” advisedly, because it seems to me that there are already an undue number of local species belonging to this genus described from the fresh waters of Queensland ; nevertheless, as this fish differs considerably from all the forms hitherto recorded, I have no option but to give it a provisional name. The nearest allies then of this new species are T'erapon truttaceus', Macleay, from the Endeavour River and (1) Terapon truttaceus, Macleay, Proc. Linn, Sce. N.8. Wales, v, 1881, p. 366; Endeavour River, Queensland. BY J. DOUGLAS OGILBY. 39 T. longulus?, Macleay, from ‘“ Fresh waters inland from Port Darwin.” From the former it differs in the more slender body, the narrower interorbital space, the much larger mouth, the two opercular spines, the finely and evenly denticulated coracoid, the strength of the second anal spe, and the greenish yellow coloration of some of the fins. From the latter it differs in the more robust body and larger head, the wider interorbital space and longer and sharper snout, the feebler denticulation of the preopercle and the coracoid, the shape of the spinous dorsal, the strength of the second anal spine, and the coloration. The species also bears some resemblance to 7. elphin- stoniensis®, de Vis, a lacustrine form from Lake Elphin- stone’, from which it differs in the rather larger scales, deeper body, larger head, nearly smooth preorbital, much wider gape, double-spined operculum, and _ finely denticulated coracoid. Personally I was much pleased to obtain this speci- men, since it has been the means of clearing up in part the mystery hanging round a fish of which I had previously received reports from various sources. The most circum- stantial account given to me was by Mr. George Robinson and his father. These gentlemen tell me that about eighteen years ago when they were living on Gowrie Creek, near Toowoomba, after a heavy flood, the creek was found to be positively swarming with a fish which had been never previously known .in that district. So plentiful and voracious were they that the very children could pull them out by the score of an afternoon, using as bait a small worm or piece of meat. It was particularly remarked that these fishes were never caught in the deeper pools, but were confined to the swift running streams where the water was barely sufficient to cover them, but being discolored they were invisible until hooked. The Messrs. Robinson, who, on being shown the Stanthorpe (?) Terapon longulus, Macleay, l.c., p. 367; Fresh waters inland from Port Darwin, Northern Territory, (*) Lerapon elphinstoniensis, de Vis, Proc. Roy. Soc. Queensland, i, 1885, p. 57; Lake Elphinstone, Queensland. (*) Lake Elphinstone is a muddy sheet of water about six miles long by two wide, lying landlocked between the watersheds of the Nebo and Suttor Rivers, inland from Mackay. 40 ON A NEW TERAPON, BY J. DOUGLAS OGILBYe fish, at once recognised in it their old friend of Gowrie Creek, further told me that they rarely grew to a pound in weight, while some were but three inches long, the average being about midway between these two extremes. They added, too, that the fishes were most delicious eating. As Gowrie Creek takes its source from a swamp, it is plain that this incursion of fishes, which may be com- pared to the hordes of bush rats and mice which occasionally devastate our inland districts, had made their way up Gowrie Creek from the Condamine, into which it flows. Three months after their arrival, when many thousands had been captured without any appreciable diminution in their numbers, another flood came, and on its sub- sidence it was found that they had disappeared to the last fin as suddenly and mysteriously as they had come ; nor, so far as [ can ascertain, have they ever again appeared in that locality. It will be be very interesting, therefore, to note whether the arrival of this fish at Stanthorpe is the precursor of a sporadic invasion there similar to that which took place at Gowrie eighteen years ago. The thanks of the community are due to Mr. White, of Pikedale, the collector of the specimen above described, who, on finding that the creek, in which they had so mysteriously appeared, was drying up owing to the prolonged drought, promptly set to work and caught as many individuals as possible, and transferred them to the main river. It is to be hoped that other gentlemen, when brought face to face with a similar problem to that which confronted Mr. White, will emulate his excellent example, and by acting with equal prompitude not only save the lives of scores of useful food fishes, but be the means of disseminating them over a wider area. No praise can be too great to offer to anyone, who, in this country where the great object of many of the inhabitants appears to be how most quickly and surely to exterminate the wonderful native fauna with which the land has been so richly endowed, expends time and money on such a cause, even though, putting utility aside, it be one of common humanity alone. MENTAL DEVELOPMENT IN ANIMALS. With Locat ILLUSTRATIONS (LANTERN SLIDES). By HON. A. NORTON, M.L.C. Read before the Royal Society of Queensland, 4th Oct., 1906. As I walked round what, in domestic language I understand is technically called the “drying ground ” at my own home, a few months ago, a small bird suddenly fluttered down beside me from a bushy shrub, and then, with every symptom of fear, it continued to flutter along the ground as though its wing was broken. In a moment there flashed through my mind the remembrance of a time when the world was young ; a time when I discussed, with companions of about my own age, this device which many birds practice in order to lure away from their nests the unwelcome human bipeds who they do not wish to interfere with their young. How had birds learnt this trick ¢ we asked ourselves wonderingly. When we sought for an explanation from an older boy, he said, « Why, it’s instinct, don’t you know?” A still older boy and more learned, told us patronisingly that it was “a hereditary practice which had come to them through their parents from a long lineage of parents’ parents.” With such explanations we had to be content, for we couid get no other; but neither of them settled the question, and we continued still to wonder where or how the birds had acquired the trick. In after years, as I wandered through the country, sometimes alone, often with com- panions who gave less attention to such subjects than we boys had done, I looked for some better explanation of the birds’ sagacity. “Instinct”? was not sufficient ; for although instinct explains much, there is an obvious 42, MENTAL DEVELOPMENT IN ANIMALS method in their actions; they know they want to lead the intruder away from their young, not towards them ; and they know also when they have succeeded as much as they think necessary. Are we justified in going somewhat deeper into the subject and asking ourselves if such obviously intentional effort to deceive does not indicate the dawn of thought in what we are pleased to speak of as “the inferior animals ”’ ? Closely associated with this peculiarity is another of exceptional interest. I refer to what is termed ““Mimicry in Nature.” This faculty, if I may so call it, must be regarded as of twofold character. There is that kind of mimicry by which an animal imitates in its form or colouring something quite different from itself. An insect, for instance, may through a series of gradations resemble more and more closely another insect. the imitation becoming almost complete in the course of evolution extending over a longer or shorter period. This, I am advised, is the case with some butterflies which are greedily sought after by birds, the change in their colour and markings being such as to give them the appearance of other butterflies which birds do not care for; in other respects the distinction between the two is rigidly main- tained. JI am not sufficiently acquainted with the subject to speak of it from my own knowledge. But we have many familiar instances in which insects assume the appearance of pieces of bark of trees which they frequent. On the trunks of many of our native trees insects may be observed which cannot readily be distinguished at first sight from scales of bark; caterpillars, which represent part of the branches, or leaves, or flowers ; locusts, whose colouring readily deceives even careful observers. Very noticeable in this class of mimetic insects are the so-called stick mantis, the leaf mantis, and the leaf butterfly. The mimetic character is found also in shells, crustaceans, spiders, frogs, reptiles, birds, quad- rupeds etc. In most cases the mimicry is acquired without any effort or even knowledge on the part of the imitator ; this may be treated .as unconscious mimicry im contra- distinction to that which is intentional and may therefore BY HON. A. NORTON, ML.C,. 43 be spoken of as conscious mimicry. This classification has been suggested by Romanes. In the first-named, the imitation, however it arises, depends upon conditions which cannot be influenced by the mimic, its shape, colour, etc., having been determined before, or at the time it began its career in the world. I p-opose to show some instances of this kind which are wonderful in their resemblance to the objects imitated; they are taken chiefly from exhibits in the Queensland Museum. I admit at once the difficulty of drawing a distinct line of demarcation between the two classes I have referred to. This I will try to explain by taking as examples what are familarly called the stick, or walking-stick, mantis, and the leaf butterfly ; the former is commonly spoken of by boys as the ‘“ jackstraw.” This insect has the dull brown colouring of a dead twig, but the resemblance. to. a dead or leafless twig is largely aided by the attitude it generally assumes when resting on the branch of a tree or shrub. The leaf butterfly when it flits through the air, shows only the upper surface of its wings, and this in no way resembles a leat; when, however, it alights upon a branch, it raises its wings so that they close together above its back. The under surface only is seen when it is in this position, and it is the under part of the wings which have the colour and markings from which its name is derived. The head and upper part of its body are raised above the twig, and the front edges of the forewing are brought forward until the insect’s head rests against them. The back part of the body, on the other hand, lies close to the twig, and a small projection from the back of the wings just touches it. These represent the leaf stalk, and from that point a line of darker colour extends up- wards through both wings until it reaches the most prominent point of the fore wings, the line becoming thinner and fainter towards what thus appears to be the tip of a dead leaf. In this case, while the marking and colour are similar to the object imitated, the effect would not be complete but for the action of the insect. Now, the raising and folding of the wings above the body can scarcely be regarded as a movement designed to complete the deception. The butterfly probably does not know 44 MENTAL DEVELOPMENT IN ANIMALS that the under surface of its wings resembles a dead leaf ; nor does there seem to be any suggestion of design in the attitude it takes up. That is one of the habits of its life, and if it had no leaf-like marking, the position it places. itself in would probably be the same. The protective colouring and altitude combined have resulted, no doubt, from the fact that they have saved its progenitors, when others of its kind have fallen a prey to their hungry enemies. It is a case of the survival of the fittest, which, continuing with slight variations through generation after generation, has at last become almost identical in appearance with the object imitated. This interpretation of the phenomenon, inferential though it necessarily is, has now been generally accepted. One case of conscious mimicry I have already touched upon in the beginning of this paper. I have observed some very marked instances of this kind among the smaller birds which live hy the sea, and lay their eggs in the drift which accumulates just above the high-tide line. Some of these have that mimetic colouring which I have referred to as unconscious : so much so indeed that as they sit upon their eggs they may be passed within a few yards without exciting notice. In some cases their eggs are mimetic in their colouring, while the young chicks are brown in colour and marked with stripes of a darker shade, which extends from the neck lengthways along the body. The effect of this is that when the parent bird by her pretences has induced intruders to follow her away from her young, these can more readily conceal themselves. The eggs of plovers, including the stone plover, or curlew as it is commonly called, are similarly marked, as are also the chicks, while the mother plover is an admirable pretender. In the case of other animals, the mimicry assumes another form. Many spiders bear a very marked resem- blance to the plant they consmonly frequent, and some of these construct snuggeries for themselves by so twisting a leaf that its two edges meet ; they then bind these together with their web. I wish, however, more particularly to refer to our trap-door spider (atrax robustus), a specimen of whose nest with the trapdoor attached was brought BY HON. A. NORTON, M.L.C. 45 me not long since by a young friend. The spider, a specimen of which is shown on the slide beside the nest, is a female; we have no male of this kind in the Museum. The male is much smaller than the female, and is looked upon by his mate as an unfit animal to be entrusted with the care of their offsprmg; so much so indeed, that if he approaches too nearly to the sacred precincts of the nest, she will attack him without mercy. The deep black colour of these spiders contributes to their protection ; but the nest is so remarkable that it seems almost impossible to attribute to mere instinct its wonder- ful mechanical contrivance. For the construction of the nest, the spider sinks a hole almost vertically in the ground. This is lined most carefully with web, through which no sand or dirt can fall. The orifice is covered with the trapdoor as closely as a shell’s mouth with a tight-fitting operculum. It, too, is carefully lied with web, the outer surface being made snug with a covering of fine moss. Then the trapdoor or lid is attached to one side of the nest by a strong hinge of web, which admits of the door being lifted without difficulty from within or without. In this carefully prepared chamber the eggs are deposited and guarded by the mother. Spiders are humble animals in appearance, but when the good lady is disturbed while she keeps watch over her offspring, the anxious expression of her eye reveals the fact that a fixed thought fills her mind, and that she is prepared to take immediate action should the occasion for doing so arise. Are we. then, justified in assuming that the careful mechanism of the nest and the fierce determination of the mother to protect it, are the result of instinct unaided by reason ? I will now pass on to other cases which suggest conscious mimicry. With our native pigeons, and I refer particu- larly to the peaceful little squatter (geophaps scripta), a disposition to hide is manifested on the approach of one whose presence is regarded with suspicion. It is im- possible not to feel that these birds try to hide, and so firmly do they rely upon the success of their design, that they will scarcely move out of the way of a _ passing traveller, merely squatting down behind a tuft of grass, 46 MENTAL DEVELOPMENT IN ANIMALS or a stone, or beside a fallen branch until he has gone by. On one occasion a blackboy, who accompanied my stock- man in his rounds, cut down three with his stockwhip out of a group of eight. Many squatter pigeons lose their lives in this way, through their too great confidence. The morpork (podargus), of which we have several varieties, and of which I exhibit a specimen, forms another marked example. The colour of the bird’s plumage and its markings, resembling as they do the dry bark of some of our eucalypts, would, one would think, afford a large amount of protection: but added to this is the conscious mimicry which prompts the bird to place itself in such a position that only an observant passer-by would see it. Even the bush curlew, or stone plover (adicnemus grallarius) will posture in such a manner that it may easily be taken for a stump or part of a fallen branch. I will now call attention to a different form of mimicry which birds have recourse to. I mean the building of their nests. Passing by the clever arrangements of stick or grass as one of minor interest, I may refer to the mud nests of the common house swallow (hirundo neoz:ena). These they love to build up in our verandas, where they sometimes become a great nuisance. In such positions they are easily seen ; but once there were no houses, and then the birds had to look for a hollow in an old tree or in a log; sometimes they build their nests under over- hanging rocks, or on the side of a rough-barked tree. In unfrequented localities these may still be found, and it is obvious that the leading thought of the builders has been the concealment of their temporary home. A yet more remarkable evidence of thought is the playground of certain of our native birds. Many of these are simple structures, made of twigs, placed in an almost upright position, and between too such rough fences the birds amuse themselves by running backwards and forwards. A much more striking one is that which some years ago was found on the Bellenden Ker Mountain ; it is sometimes called after (Mr. Archibald Meston,) Meston’s Bowerbird (priondura newtoniana). I understand that Broadbent, of the Museum, first brought it under notice. In this case, as will be seen by the illustration, the first business BY HON. A. NORTON, M.L.C. AT has been to select a tree suitable for the builder’s purpose. Around this a number of sticks are piled, the ends so over- lapping each other that the tree is surrounded completely, the curious edifice being kept in an upright position by the tree which supports it; shells and moss are freely used for ornamenting it. On and around this structure the birds collect and amuse themselves somewhat after the fashion of children when they play “ King of the Castle.’ The specimen in the Museum is about four feet in height, and two feet in diameter at the base. I will here quote one other case which seems to indicate a decided reasoning power in birds. I refer to the Laughing Jackass (Dracelo gigas). Commonly these birds, soon after daybreak, commence their day’s business by chanting, if I may so express it, their peculiar hymn of praise. Then, perched on a tree from which they have an uninterrupted view of the ground, they look thoughtfully round. Suddenly one of them swoops down, having caught sight of an earth- worm, which, after its noctuial wanderings, has begun to burrow itno the sand. It must not be supposed that Jackie clutches the worm with his little feet ; his feet are not made for that purpose, but with his strong beak he seizes the tail end of the worm, of which only an inch or two may be visible. Firmly he holds on, not trying to pull the worm back, for then it would break, and he would lose part of it. It is the worm that pulls, but to no effect ; thea it wriggles, and this brings a little more to the surface. The bird draws his head back enough to take in the slack, and the worm wriggles more, each time it wriggles coming back a little and the bird draws his head back further. At last the whole of the worm comes to the surface, and Jackie makes his early meal. The bird’s action and his delibera- tion supply him with the maximum amount of food which each worm can supply; may not this carefully planned scheme of his furnish us with food for reflection ? Are we to accept this illustration as evidence only of instinct, or must we treat it as the result of reason ? I am disposed to accept the latter alternative, not merely because of the evidence in that direction which the Laughing Jackass supplies, but because by following the subject further, the evidence of thought and of reasoning power in the in- ferior animals grows continually stronger. 48 MENTAL DEVELOPMENT IN ANIMALS One phase of mimicry is spoken of as “ feigning death.” Beetles and moths commonly have recourse to it, and it is said that birds occasionally allow themselves to be handled without making an effort to free themselves. I have not seen it amongst birds, but most old bushmen know how cunningly a native dog will lie as though dead, when he has fallen into the hands of his pursuers. I do not pretend to be able to explain such tricks, for that it is a trick, cannot be doubted. In the case of the dingo, it seems to be fear that excites his cunning, for so well are his devices understood, that his hamstrings are often cut before he is left to himself. It does not seem possible that he can understand the meaning of death. Some years ago a curious case came under my notice, and I may as well place it upon record here. In some paddocks near Gympie which I at one time rented, was a roan milker that I had had brought down with other cattle from my Rodd’s Bay Station. Her dam was a fairly well-bred Durham cow, her sire a three-quarter bred Durham and Devon, the latter predominating. After she had been in the Theresa Vale paddocks for eighteen months or two years, she gave birth to “identical twin ” heifers. Oddly enough, these in their genetal character were like the wild Chilingham Park catt]e. In colour, they were creamy-white, with black muzzles ; the inside of the ears and about a third of the outside from the tip downwards was red; the horns, as the calves grew up, were white, with black tips turned upwards, and they were small in diameter; a distinct case of atavism. The mother was unused to taking care of more than one calf at a time, but at first she took kindly to both. When two or three days old, however, one of the calves crawled through the paddock fence, and wandered away with some other cattle. Two days later, my stockman, Phil Rafferty found the waif, and brought it in, but the mother then refused to let it come near her. The forlorn little creature was therefore allowed to take milk from its mother when she was in the bail: this she resented, and always tried to kick and butt the unfortunate when she had a chance. Having other milkers, old Phil let the calf suck them also when they were in the bail, and it soon grew and equalled BY HON, A. NORTON, M.L.C. 49 its sister in size and condition. Still the mother hated it, and she gave all her love to the other. One day, however, a notable thing happened. Both twins had been let loose in the yard before their mother was released trom the bail, but no sooner was she free that she rushed at the waif as she thought, and knocked it over. Then, and not until then, she discovered her mistake ; it was the child of her affection that she had knocked down. Poor Daisy was greatly disconcerted at the untoward event, and the end of it was she let both calves take her milk, and afterwards treated them as equals. In no other instance have I observed so marked a resemblance between twin calves that their mother found a difficulty in distinguishing between them even when their size and condition were practically equal. That the cow, having made a mistake, should afterwards have received the twins on equal terms, suggests to my mind a further explanation than that afforded by instinct. For the first time, apparently, she realised how greatly they resembled each other ; and how could she continue to make a difference between them when she could not with certainty distinguish between them. The atavistic phenomemon in this instance is remark- able, the two calves showing so plainly a resemblance to an ancestor from whom they must have been separated by at least several generations. The circumstance, how- ever, emphasises a fact which is often allowed to pass without comment. In the prosecution of their business, breeders of pure bred stock have discovered that by “ in- breeding ” certain marked characteristics may become ‘fixed’; not absolutely fixed, but fixed in a majority of cases, and some of them have persevered in an otherwise pernicious practice w th the expectation of increasing that majority with each cross. It is in this way probably that the types of each class of wild animal has become a type. But ‘‘in-breeding ” has its disadvantages also, tor by the crossing of near relatives, the characteristics which it is desired to breed out, may also be developed, and reversion to the original type may be effected unintentionally. I refer to this aspect of the case, because where the instinct or the mental power of animals are looked for as the result D 50 MENTAL DEVELOPMENT IN ANIMALS of careful crossing, there will be some cases of reversion to the ancestral type. On the whole, however, there seems to be a continuous increase in the intelligence of animals, which, having been carefully trained, are brought together under a well-considered scheme of selection. We find amongst all classes of domesticated stock a generally continued advance, both physically and mentally. I do not propose to mention many cases to illustrate my con- tention. Most of us, I suppose, can call to mind some facts in connection with this phase of the question. Breeders of horses are aware that certain strains of blood are likely to lead to the development in individual animals of greater sagacity than is common to all. In the case of dogs this is particularly noticeable. One old cattle dog I had, when I lived at Rodd’s Bay, knew as well as any of us when a bullock was to be slaughtered. He was full of excitement when cattle, including a beast for slaughter, were driven into the yards where the killing took place. He anxiously watched the men as they ground the knives, and collected the required butchers’ implements ; and, other preparations having been completed, he waited outside the back door of the house until I came out with the gun. Then, with marked approval, he excitedly preceded me to the slaughter yard. So far as one could judge from his actions, there was no detail which the old fellow did not know and keep in his mind. So too, an old cat. As a rule he waited at the garden fence, and looked towards the yard in which were the cattle ; but when I walked down with the gun, he perched himself on top of one of the posts and there awaited my return, expressing in his own feline fashion his thanks for the feast of fresh beef which I brought back with me. Most people have read or heard of the marvellous intelligence of sheep dogs and cattle dogs. I will limit myself to two cases. A friend of my own, named Brown, went to Gloucester, in New South Wales, to select some cattle which he wished to purchase. One of the stockmen went round with him to collect the cattle in a large paddock. This man made signs to his dog, and told him what was expected of him. He rode up one side of the creek with Mr. Brown ; the dog BY HON. A. NORTON, M.L C. 51 went across the creek alone. After two or three hours ridmg the cattle were all put on to their camp—by the stockman on one side of the creek, by the dog on the other, the work having been done quietly and without excitement. Mr. Brown’s offer of a first-rate horse in exchange for the dog was instantly and unhesitatingly refused. The dog was not only well-trained, but had well-bred parents of exceptional intelligence. When I lived on New England, the sheep were washed in a somewhat primitive fashion before being shorn, the yards by the washpool not being too well constructed. On one occasion, Alexander Grant, a Highlandman, who spoke the Gaelic, came in with a flock of strong wethers, one of which jumped the yard, and was immediately chased by two or three yelping curs, which seemed intent upon hunting the wether into the bush. Sandy and his dog were. however, equal to the occasion. The dog understood no language but the Gaelic, but he obeyed the words of command as his master yelled at the top of his voice. Sometimes pressing in close to the wether, at other times keeping wide, according to instructions, he brought it back to the yard and through the gate in spite of the yelping curs which persisted in getting in the way. This dog was not by any means well-bred ; on the contrary, he had the appearance of having a kangaroo dog for one of his parents. Most of us who have had to work a sheep station know how wonderfully collies do their work, and how collie pups which have never before had anything to do with sheep, will take to it—“‘ instinctively,’ we usually say—-when they see sheep for the first time, although they have not been with their parents or any other sheep-dog from the time they could lap milk for themselves. Are we justified in speaking of this as instinct ? Can the inheritance from their parents of an acquired knowledge be regarded merely as instinct ? Even if it be instinct, it is instinct of a far higher description than that which comes as an inheritance from untaught parents. The cases I have quoted may not immediately concecn us who are here this evening, even if they are accepted as evidence of that mental development which I believe the lower animals are capable of. We know, however, 52 MENTAL DEVELOPMENT IN ANIMALS, BY HON, A. NORTON, M.L.C. that they have mental qualities, memory and thoughtful- ness, for which they rarely get full credit, and that in innumerable instances they exhibit a bright intelligence which surpasses that of many human beings. That, under natural conditions, they do not display this to a larger extent is not surprising. For untold ages, man, with his’ higher type of brain, made little advance, and was scarcely superior to some of the animals amongst which he lived ; and even now the world contains tens of thousands of savages who are almost as ignorant as the beasts. Keeping in mind. then, the vastness of time which must have elapsed before the human race had begun to feel their way through the darkness which enshrouded them towards the approach- ing dawn of civilization, shall we shut out from our hearts the hope that a brighter time may come for what we regard as the inferior animals, a time when their advancing mental powers will insure for them a larger share of consideration from mankind than they now receive. Of one thing I think I may speak with some certainty ; it is, that those who love animals most will heartily join me in the hope that the suggestions I have given voice to to-night may not be without some justification, but that the mental develop- ment of the lower animals will, in course of time, raise them to a higher plane by means of which their enjoyment of life will be increased, and their place in nature materially advanced. NOTES ON AN APPARENTLY NEW SPECIES OF HYALINE DAPHNIA, By W. R. COLLEDGE. Read before the Royal Society of Queensland, 27th October, 1906. In examining the pond life around Brisbane, I have found a very interesting and unusual species of Hyaline Daphnia. A great deal of systematic work has been done on these insects in England, Europe, and the States of America. But none of the forms illustrated resemble this species. It stands out distinctly trom all others by its peculiar shape, and unusual size. The same species has been noticed in Victoria by Mr. Hallam. the Secretary of the Hawthorne and Camberwell Microscopical Society, but that is the only reference that I have been able to find upon the subject The Daphnias, or Water Fleas, belong to the order of Entomostraca, or shelled insects. The branched antennz places them in the sub-order of the Claderocera. The Hyaline species were discovered by Professor A. Lehdig, in the Lakes of Switzerland, and are so named on account of their pellucid character. Seven species are known in England, and two more in America. The variations of form in each species is considerable. The typical character, of which I give an illustration taken from the Year Book of Microscopy, is “ Daphnia Hyalina.”” Two other forms are also figured from America. One from Lake St. Clair, the other from Lake Gogebic. Some of the varied forms that have been noticed may be of the same species, only taken at different periods otf their development. Their transparency renders them objects of great interest, as 54 NEW SPECIES OF HYALINE DAPHNIA their internal anatomy, the process of deglutition. mastica- tion of food, its progress through the gullet into the stomach, the perisaltic movement of the digestive canal, the beating of the heart, and the circulation of the blood, are al) visible under the microscope. The peculiarity of this species is. the enormous prolongation of the posterior part of the head. This organ occupies fully two-thirds of the body of the insect. A line drawn from the point of the beak to the occiput, would form with the upward curve, a half-circle. The whole body is compressed, more especially its cephalic portion, the sides of which are almost in apposition, so that it resembles a thin sharp plate growing a little more convex at the base of the antenne. The anterior part is pro- longed into a sharp curved beak. The body below this forms a somewhat obtuse angle. On the dorsal line projects a long, serrated shell spine. This is straight, but occasion- ally curved, and sometimes the tip is broken off, this has been the case in Figure No. 1. The representatives of the superior antenne (unless these are olfactory sete) are found in two flask-like cells, bearing each a bundle of papille, and situated on the inferior border of the beak, about one-third from the point. The edge of the beak from here to the brain ts thickened, probably by nervous structures. The second antenne, as in all species of this order, are highly developed. The broad, flat, radiating muscles which unite them to the inner carapace are very prominent. The basal joint is large and rounded. From it proceeds two branches, each having three joints, the first being the longest. Each extremity is adorned with a serrated collar. From the inferior border of each joint droops a filament very delicately feathered, the end jcint possessing three of similar character. These organs are theic means of locomotion. Being of greater specific gravity than water, and so compressed, they offer little resistance to the force of gravity, and naturally sink to the lower depths, unless they actively use the antenne. These organs project forward, separated by an angle of about 45 degrees. They progress by a series of short jumps. During day- light they are usually found in the deeper parts of lakes, BY W. R. COLLEDGE. 55 but in the morning, and towards evening, likewise on cloudy days, they may be found near the surface. I have noticed that frequently a little air finds admission beneath the shell in some instances, and they seem to lie in conse- quence helpless on the surface of the water. The outer carapace covers the whole head and body in one piece. It is thin and transparent, of a reticulated structure. the cells being square, and occasionally, of oblong forms. It is open frentally from the base of the second antennze down to near the origin of the shell spine. Within this. is a second shell free over the abdomen, united dorsally, and lining the whole of the cephalic portion. It is denser than the outer coat, and is dotted with stellate and irregular marks. It contains’on the pleura the convoluted shell gland. On turning the flaps of these two coats back, there is seen the branchial feet. These consist of five pairs ranged on each side of the abdomen. The first, second and fifth differ from each other, but the third and fourth are some- what similar in structure. The muscular portion is formed like an elongated plate, while from the outer edge droops a deep fringe of closely set setce. In the third and fourth pairs there are nearly a hundred lying side by side in one foot, all set at a regular distance from each other. Under a high magnification, each proves to be a delicate feather, so airy and perfect as though it belonged to some fairy world, such as Shakespeare imagined in his dreams. Each edge of these dainty elfin feathers slightly overlaps its neighbour, thus presenting a close network to the water. At their base the filaments are united each to its neighbour. Ceaselessly do they move with a graceful rhythmic move- ment. An essential part of their work is to supply the respiratory pouches with fresb currents of water, but a no less important function they have is in procuring food. The continual motion creates a current, which sets in towards the body. Vegetable spores. volvoces and other minute organisms, which serve as food, are borne along by it. The water filtering through the fine network leaves the residue beneath the first and second pairs of feet. If the mass is too large, or not good for food, then the tail-piece. armed with its two pectinated claws, is drawn in between the two rows 56 NEW SPECIES OF HYALINI: DAPHNIA of feet until it rests against the abdomen, then it is forcibly thrust out, expelling the material into the water. On the contrary, if the residue is suitable, then the labium or upper lip, shapen into a broad fleshy plate, with bordered hairs, and hinged by its upper part to the chest, is lifted, and a portion of food enters the mouth. The lip, like a trap-door, then falls down over the orifice. Beneath lie a pair of minute but powerful jaws, with four semi-circular teeth, directed towards each other. These tear the mass, and force it towards the mandibles. These are peculiar in shape, and interesting in their operation. They li parallel, and in front of the alimentary canal. In shape, conical, with the extreme point pivoted, leaving the body free to rotate. The sides of the cones which face each other are somewhat flattened, but basally are rounded, and hardened with chitine. On the ends of each, which face, is developed a hard oval plate, grooved with parallel bars, three stout teeth also project on the edge. A second set of teeth in the form of a comb, with the longest teeth set in the centre, the others gradually diminishing as they approach the sides, is set at an angle of about thirty degrees from the surface. By the action of the jaws, the food is forced towards these rasp-like plates and teeth. Then there comes into play a peculiar muscular mechanism. The cones, pivoted at their further pointed ends, and held in place by bands of muscles, are given a quarter of a revolu- tion in one direction ; then reversed in the opposite way, and so they rock back and forward, with the regularity of a pendulum. By this means the food is crushed into a fine pulp. As I watched the process there came to mind the quotation :-— “The mills of God grind slowly, But they grind exceeding small.” On the inner surface of the labium the cesophagus opens: and ascends to the large curvature of the digestive canal ; throughout its length, thick, transverse muscles surround it- By their contraction the comminuted food can be seen forced in little jets on its upward way to the stomach. On the back of the labium, a stout cord-like muscle rises in the median line. At its origin is a tuft of tactile papilla, continuing to the head it divides, a branch running to each BY W. R. COLLEDGE. 57 side of the beak for a considerable distance before insertion. It is evidently the adductor muscle of the organ. The digestive canal commencing in the lower portion of the head curves upwards, where it receives the ends of two tubes, the hepatic diverticula. Its walls are thick and muscular, the central cavity being smaJl in comparison. In health it is always undergoing a rhythmic contraction and expansion, the movement commencing anteriorly, and continuing the whole length of the canal. The lower end of this is closed by a strong sphincter muscle, which opens into a second oval cavity terminating in the anus. The aperture for the ejection of the contents being placed at about the fifth tooth of the telson. The dark eye is very prominent. It consists of a large mass of black pigment, and on each side seven or eight lenses are placed on the lateral periphery. In some of the English species the lenses are more numerous. The organ seems to rest in a large cavity, and is not fixed, for it can be rotated to some extent, the motion giving it a characteristic tremulous appearance. A bundle of muscles and nerves connect it with the brain, and on the latter is seen the macula nigra, or eye spot. This is absent in some forms. One of the most noticeable things about it is the move- ment of the heart. It lies near the dorsal line on the opposite side, and in a line with the beak. Oval in shape, it is quite transparent, and furnished with strong, circular and longitudinal muscles. It contracts with great rapidity. There are two slits in a transverse direction on the opposite sides.. In contracting, these slits are closed, and the blood is forced into an arterial vessel, which curves backwards to run by the side of the digestive canal. No general venous system is traceable, but the blood, which is colour- less, can be traced by the particles which float in it. There is a canal proceeding from the region of the heart towards the lower part of the occiput. Along this the blood flows, and passes by a channel formed around the edge of the carapace by the juxtaposition of the inner shell. Around the eye a broad current flows, freely bathing all the tissues. The ovaries or egg sacs lie along the abdominal canal, a duct opens from them into the space on the back, called 58 NEW SPECIE~ OF HYALINE DAPHNIA the- Brood Pouch, beneath the outer shell. There they remain until they are hatched, and the young are able to care for themselves. The eggs at first are round, with a central nucleus surrounded by oily globules. Gradually they elongate, and the young insect assumes shape, and gradually matures. Ultimately they may be seen moving independently in the pouch. A curved hook, arising from the back of the tail.piece, keeps them imprisoned. When the mother considers them old enough to fight life’s battle, she lowers the hook, and the young slip from their nursery into the water. When newly-born, the long shell-spine is bent round the abdomen, the tip being attached to the back of the head. This is freed in a few hours by its struggles, leaving a little ragged spot at the point of its attachment. The spine now looks so long that the body seems disproportioned to it. Gradually it assumes a more natural shape, and in two days is like the third form depicted. So far there is no sign of the peculiar elongation of the bead, so characteristic of this species. It approaches the shape of species found in Lake Henrietta, in America. At intervals of growth, the whole of the shell with the coverings and feathered sete of the feet are thrown off entire, and within seven days the peculiar form of the head appears. At first, it is not quite so pronounced, but grows more so at each successive moult. There is a good deal of variation in individuals in the depth of the cephalic cueve, and also in the length and curve of the shell-spine, In England, and on the Continent of Europe, about the month of October, they begin to lay a different kind of egg. These are called the winter or Ephippial eggs. A dark saddle-shaped organ begins to form on the back; it bears, usually, two very large elongated eggs. This saddle slips off at the next moult, and either floats, or sinks down into the niud. I have found these eggs floating among the decaying refuse on the surface of a pool. In cooler climates they remain during the winter, their cover- ing being sufficient to protect them from the frost, antil favourable conditions occur, when development begins, and the insects once more appear. It is somewhat peculiar that in the month of September, when I began to find them, many of the females bore their usual summer eggs, but oso”? BY W. R. COLLEDGE. 59 in October, some were found bearing the winter eggs, and these increased rapidly until the majority were of that kind. . Then the insects disappeared for nearly five months. It seems a peculiar coincidence, that the same changes they undergo in colder climates should take place here, under such opposite conditions. My own observations may be of too limited a nature to form a general conclusion, for I have only found them in one place, and in one pool ; but the fact is interesting, and doubtless, will help to direct attention to them in the future. Unfortunately, their entire disappearance has prevented the continuance of my observations for the present. Measurements of Hyaline Daphnia— Brisbane Species : Millimetres. Inches. Across Head from beak to occupit 2-9 mm. "116 Length of Body, excluding Shell-spine Sonn. - 1492 Length of Shell-spine.. Sic AC 2°x'066 “OSx* 00264 ‘Telson or Caudal Lamina err ne les 052 Length of Pectinated Claw only 3 79 “036 Antenne 2°66 “1064 Bye .. he 3: ad Nr Ae “9 “O36 Heart Vs oF az a are “43x33 “O172x-° 132 Mandible .. ie 6 A is -62x°13 “0248x0052 Jaw as 65 bf Ss Ne 2 “008 Length of third Branchial Foot we Hea “O44 Length of Fifth Branchial Foot ak 9 “36 Length of New Born Daphiia 33 "4x26 -O16x° 0104 Length without Shell-spine when twelve hours’ old... ie ne ye =i 028 Length of Shell-spine when twelve hours’ old) ~~... Ac a se a el “O44 60 13 16 1s 19 wo wo Ww =— © mt ww Po NEW SPECIES OF HYALINE DAPHNIA, BY W. R. COLLEDGE, List of Illustrations of Hyaline Daphnia : Daphnia Hyalina x 10 New born x 20 12 hours old x 20 2 days old x 20 7 days old x 20 With Ephippium, Brisbane x 10 Typical European Species Common Daphnia Pulex x 10 Antenne, Digestive Canal, Heart, etc. Fringe of No. 3 Foot x 200 Eye with Nerves Reticulation of Outer Shell x 158 Caudal Lamina x 20 (with Serrated Claws) Lake St. Clair form, U.S. Lake Gogebic form, U.S. First Branchial Foot Second Branchial Foot Third Branchial Foot Fourth Branchial Foot Fifth Branchial Foot Labium Jaw Mandibles Heart Proc. Roy. Soc. Q’Lanp, Vou. xx oh hat Proc. Roy. Soc. Q’nanp, Von. xx Prats If. Prate III. Proc. Roy Soc. Q'nanp, Vou. xx. NX s NI? ‘I S LOT N Y OES ta, AS TST QUEENSLAND GEMS. By MAJOR J. R. SANKEY. Read before the Royal Society of Queensland, 22nd December, 1906. I FULLY appreciate the honour paid me when asked to read a paper before this Society, but I do not come here as a scientific man, I merely bring forward a general know- ledge of the Precious Stones of Queensland, acquired during many years of working amongst them. I am convinced that Queensland contains a greater variety of gem stones than any other country in the world, the following being a list of those which have come to me from different parts of this State, all of which have been authenticated, and which leave a very small balance of the full catalogue of precious stones known to be accounted for :— Actinolite (Cat’s Eye) Adamantine Spar (Corundum) Adularia (Moonstone) Agate (Quartz)— Eyed Fortification Banded Moss, ete. Almandite (Garnet) Amethyst Quartz Sapphire Asterla— Quartz Sapphire Avanturine (Quartz) Azurite Balas Ruby (Spinel) Beryl— Aquamarine Emerald Bloodstone (Quartz) Cacholong (Quartz) Callainite (Turquoise) Carbuncle (Garnet) Carnelian (Quartz) Cassiterite Ceylanite (Spinel) Chalcedony (Quartz) Chrysoberyl Chrysolite Chrysoprase (Quartz) Cinnamon Stone (Garnet) Citrine (Quartz) Corundum— Ruby Sahppire Oriental Emerald Oriental Peridot Oriental Amethyst Oriental Topaz Asteria or Star Stone White Sapphire Orange Sapphire Adamantine Spar Particoloured Sapphire, etc. Diamond Emerald 62 QUEENSLAND GEMS Fluor Quartz (Gann Bloodstone or Heliotrope Grossularite Cairngorm Cinnamon Stone or Hyacinth Cat’s Eye Pyrope (Ruby Garnet) Chalcedony Almandite (Carbuncle) Chrysoprase Gold i Citrine Gypsum Hyaline Alabaster Jasper Satin Spar Moss Agate Selenite Morion Heliotrope— (Bloodstone) Onvx Hyacinth (Zircon, Garnet) Plasn a Jacinth (Zircon) Prase Jargoon (Zircon) Rock Crystal Jade ; Rose Quartz Jasper, various Sagenitic Lapis—Lazuri Sard Malachite Sardonyx Marble : Water Bubble Mocha Stone (Quartz) Ruedas Moonstone Rabe Morion (Smoky Quartz) Peat Obsidian Setpentine Olivine Spinel Peridot Almandine Onyx Balas Ruby Opal Rubicelle Precious or Noble Sapphirine Harlequin Pleonast Pin-Fire Nonaz ais tash-Fire ' Gouttes d’ Eau Black, etc. Blue Cacholong Green Wood Yellow Girasol Pycnite Hydrophane Pans i ydro} : Tourr aline—— Sen.i-opal, ete. Pearl Green Sarr Peridot (Olivine) Tadeo Plasn a (Quartz) an Pleonast (Spinel) Turquoise— Pyrope (Garnet) Blue Quartz Green Agate Zircon— Amethyst Hyacinth Asteriated Jacinth Avanturine Jargoon Basanite (Lydian or Touch- Green Stone) Lim pid Dramonps.—In considering the stones of the State, I will commence with the diamond, being the most popular of all gem stones. Hardness, 10. Composition : Carbon, Fracture, conchoidal. Lustre, Adamantine. BY MAJOR J. R. SANKEY. 63: Thirty-five years since, the firm of Flavelle Bros’ purchased a‘ rough diamond, found at Stanthorpe. tor £30 ; from, time to time other rough diamonds have been found casually, but no systematic working appears to have taken place. The writer recently purchased a rough diamond, of four and a-half carats, which had been picked up by a washerwoman in the bed of Quart-Pot Creek. Mr. Barton, M.L.A., representing Stanthorpe, has recently exhibited several good diamond crystals found at Stanthorpe, weighing from one up to about five carats. A diamond matrix, such as that existing in South Africa and Brazil, has not yet been discovered in Queens- land. but it must be borne in mind that beyond casual exploration, such as that carried out by Professor Skertchly, of the Queensland Geological Staff, no determined effort has been made to find where the stones, casually picked up, have come from. One or two small diamond crystals have been found at Anakie. The diamonds found in this State, so far, have not been of sufficient value to cause any excitement, and this, together with the fact that the European gem merchants, in repeating the tactics which their class had in turn applied to the diamonds of other Countries, that is, accusing them of inferiority, has probably hindered exploration. In 1772, when diamonds were found in Brazil, the report was spread that they were very inferior, that, in fact, they were the refuse stones from India, which up to then had been the main source of supply ; this was com- bated by the mine owners sending the stones to India and obtaining Indian values, after which Brazilian diamonds were admittedly the choicest stones. Then, with the discovery of diamonds in South Africa, a repetition of this treatment came and Cape stones were stated to be “no good,” and the story was so well believed that every person buying a diamond of any size wanted a guarantee that it was a “ Brazilian.’ The African miners then sent their stones to Brazil, to be forwarded to Europe, and so overcame the oppo- sition. Now, in the same way, Australian diamonds are said to be “inferior” and unworthy, and 64 QUEENSLAND GEMS the European merchants decline to manufacture the stones, to use their own term, while at the same time they offer to buy all one can send at their own price, which is about half what they pay for Cape stones. No doubt, it is onlya matter of a short time before the Aus- tralian diamonds will be admitted to be what they really are—that is, good stones, and this little encouragement will stimulate the search for diamonds. So far the diamonds found have been of very good colour. SAPPHIRES.— Next to the diamond, in hardness, comes the corundum, which includes the sapphire, the ruby, the oriental amethyst, the oriental topaz, the oriental peridot, ete., ete. Corundum crystallizes in the six-sided prisms belonging to the hexagonal system, but gem stones are chiefly found as rolled pebbles. The specific gravity is 4,about. The lustre is vitreous, but the basal planes are occasionally pearly. Composition.— Alumina. The stone is strongly Dichroic. Sapphires were ficst discovered in Queensland | by Mr. A. J. Richardson at Anakie, in 1873, since when they have been found at many other places, including Stanthorpe, Herberton, Nanango, Logan River, Kilkivan. Johnstone River, etc. The only systematic mining for the gem is at Anakie, where over 400 miners are at present engaged in the industry. The Sapphires at Anakie are of every shade of blue, of green and of yellow, many of the yellows and greens are equal in quality to anything the world produces, and, in my opinion, no finer gems exist than the brilliant limpid-yellow sapphires of Queensland. They combine the brilliancy of the diamond with most beautiful shades of rich golden-yellow, and occasionally appearing of true orange colour. The green sapphires are most remarkable for the great variety of their tints, ranging from very pale green through all the shades of bronze, olive, and russet to bright green, bordering closely on the emerald, and continuing into the deepest luscious greens, and all combined with brilhancy. BY MAJOR J. R. SANKEY. 65 The blue sapphires are not equal to those of Siam, and they have received a bad name owing largely to defective cutting. I have possessed royal velvety-blue Queensland sapphires, equal to any I have ever seen from other Countries. Parti-coloured sapphires are frequently found, many blue stones having strange triangular markings of yellow due to peculiarities of crystallisation. On the whole it may be said that the sapphires of Queensland are now equal to those of any other part of the World. Very large stones are found, and recently some of bigh value have been unearthed. It is reported that within the last three months £250 was refused for a rough yellow sapphire on the Anakie field, the miner sending it to London, with a reserve of £500. Queensland also produces star sapphires. These have a silky structure which, by cutting en cabochon, developes a 6-rayed star of wavy light. The Queensland sapphire has had a hard struggle (commercially) for existence; only a few years ago leading residents of Queensland declared openly that it had neither beauty nor value, and nearly the whole jewellery trade was against it, but, fortunately, its claim to beauty is now recognised. Buyers from all parts of the World are visiting Anakie, and a great future awaits the gem. “ Finger-Ring Lore,” by William Jones, F.S.A., re- ferring to the sapphire as the ecclesiastical gem, says ‘* Cardinals, on their creation, receive a ring, in which is usually a sapphire.” Amethyst, however, is more the favourite episcopal ring-stone. Alhed to, and in very many cases overlapping, the above description of Queensland sapphires are :— Oreintal Amehyst, which is frequently a combination crystal of ruby and sapphire, in alternate layers of red and blue, thus producing a rich purple. Oriental Emerald, which is the green-sapphire, color as near as possible to that of the Emerald. Oriental Peridot in like manner, is sapphire with the color of peridot. E 66 QUEENSLAND GEMS Yellow Sapphire is sometimes known as the oriental topaz. Other varieties of sapphires are also occasionally known as oriental jargoon, and oriental hyacinth. Rev. C. W. King writes—‘‘ Episcopal rings were usually set with sapphires, probably from a popular belief that this precious stone had the power of cooling love, owing perhaps to the coldness of its touch, due to its density.”” The real symbolic reason was the heavenly- ble colour, which denoted celestial purity. Corundum (Rusy ).—The true ruby has been found in this State at Anakie, Stanthorpe, and near Herbecton ; colors have been good, but stones not Jarge; however, quite sufficient indication that the genuine gems are there. The true pigeon’s-blood ruby is at present. the most. valuable of gems, and it is to be hoped that miners and others will miss no opportunities of discovering them. Like all corundum, they are six-sided pyramidal crystals, and, owing to their beautiful bright pink color, cannot well be mistaken. When last in London the writer was shewn a flawed ruby of 43 carats, valued at £250. The merchant stated that if free of flaws, £1,000 could be easily obtained for it. At present Burma is practically the only source of the true ruby, those of Siam being far inferior in color. Though even these surpass those of Montana. Every assistance and inducement should be given to our miners to persevere in their search for this gem, as the discovery of fair-sized stones of good color will probably do more towards the development of gem-stone mining within the State than the finding of large stones of any other gem. Zircon.—Composition: Zirconia, 67%; silica, 33%. Hardness, about 7.5. CrystaJline system, Tetragonal. Color ranges from pure limpidity, like the diamond, through all yellows, browns and reds. Different varieties are known as jargoons, hyacinths, jacinths, cinnamon stones, etc. BY MAJOR J. R. SANKEY. 67 Owing to their extraordinary lustre, small white zircons are frequently mistaken for diamonds, but the difference in hardness is sufficient to distinguish them. Many very fine hyacinths have been found on the Anakie field, and stones have béen cut up to 24 carats in weight. Zircons are tound at Anakie, Nanango, Toowoomba, Stanthorpe, Herberton, Eungella, Boonah, and many other places in this State. Owing to the richness of color, the great range of delicate hues, combined with its fire, which comes next to that of the diamond, the zircon is an exceedingly attractive gem, and will no doubt. soon become very popular. Owners of good zircons should be careful not to mix them with sapphires,rubies or diamonds, as, owing to their interior hardness, they may be easily scratched. So little is known of the distribution of gem stones in Queensland that it may be mentioned that zircons, sapphires, topaz, garnets, tourmaline, crystal and cal- cedony may be picked up in the gravel of any railway platform between Brisbane and Ipswich at the present time. OLIVINE.—Composition: Silica, 41; Magnesia, 50; Fer- rous Oxide, 9. Hardness 6.5. Spec. Gravity, about 3.4. Crystallizes in the orthorhombic form. Color, rich leek green. It is essentially the gem of basalt. Found in Queensland on the Main and MacPherson Ranges, and also in the Logan District, and may be sought with fair probability in any basalt country. This is a most lovely green gem, and is frequently mistaken for the emerald, the difference being that while the emerald is a bluish green, the olivine is a rich golden green. This gem was very popular early in the 19th Century, but, owing to the turn of fashion’s wheel, it fell into dis- favour, but again became popular at the time of the Queen’s Diamond Jubilee. 68 QUEENSLAND GEMS Preripot.—A variety of olivine of a delicate green yellow, sometimes spoken of as the “evening emerald.” The antiquity of this gem is proved by the following passage in an old book—‘‘ Adam Sadbury, 53rd Abbot of Glastonbury, gave tothe Abbey, among other precious gifts, a gold ring with a stone called peritot, which was on the finger of St. Thomas the Martyr, when he fell by the swords of wicked men.” PrEARL.—Probably the pearl is the best known of all gems to Australians. For many years Queensland has produced thousand of pounds worth of pearls. The oyster fisheries of Thursday Island have been the chief source of supply, but pearls are found practically right round the coast, many good pearls having been found even in Moreton Bay. Prior to the Japanese War, pearls brought very high prices, running to hundreds of pounds, according to size, lustre and perfection of shape, good symmetrical lustrous whites of good orient are always in demand, and both black and white pearls of good color, shape and lustre always command very high prices. The most remarkable pearl the writer has seen was a pearl blister, exactly lke a small crayfish. This was described to Mr. Saville Kent, the great expert, who also owns a similar one, and says that it undoubtedly is an embalmed crustacean, having been coated by the oyster with a nacreous shroud. OpaL.—Composition ; Hydrous silica. Proportion of water, from 2 to 13%. Hardness, 5.5 to 6.5. Spec. Gravity, 1.9 to 2.3. The opal is par excellence the Queensland gem, and is found throughout the Western Districts of the State, from Kynuna to the Southern border. The value of the opal, so far found in Queensland, has in all probability 1eached the sum of a quarter of a million pounds. It is found in most picturesque country, the isolated flat topped hills weathered into the appear- ance of ancient fortresses recall all one’s recollection of the romantic history of feudal times. BY MAJOR J. R. SANKEY. 69 The name of Herbert Bond is closely associated with opal mining, he having developed the industry by floating a company in London, and so getting capital to work the mines. Mr. C. V. Jackson, in his official report on the opal mining industry says: “‘ Precious opal occurs in Queens- land in two geological formations, viz.: In sedimentary rocks of upper cretaceous age, known as the Desert Sand- stone formation, and also in vesicular basalt of later geological age.’ The geological conditions under which opal occurs in the former is wholly distinct from any previously known opal deposit in the world. The latter mode of occurrence in a vesicular basalt is analogous of those of Hungary and Mexico, but, so far, Australian deposits of this kind have not heen worked commercially.’ The opal is found in matrix of ironstone, of sandstone, and occasionally in pipe-clay, and is roughly classed as boulder opal, sandstone opal, and pipe opal. Practically, every variety of opal is found in Queensland, including the noble opal, the harlequin opal, the fire opal, the pin- fire opal, ete., etc.. the miners having many terms of their own indicative of quality and peculiarities, and there is no doubt that the opal of Queensland has excelled in beauty and abundance that of the whole world. I remember well when very few people would look at Queensland opal, because Hungarian opal was the standard of that time, and now the Hungarian opal is hardly ever heard of, and in the trade is quoted at less than half the price for Queensland opal. The opal is certainly the most beautiful stone the World has ever seen, and in Pagan times was said to be the residence of the Gods, for being the most beautiful thing on earth, the Gods would naturally take it for a home. Then the modern novelist (Sir Walter Scott) came along and, reviving an old legend, wrote a little fiction which spoilt the old pagan idea and the reputation of the opal at the same time, and the gorgeously beautiful opal was for a time relegated to the limbo of speckled hens, spilt salt, jackdaws, and other omens of ill luck, and this, in 70 QUEENSLAND GEMS spite of Royal patronage, as it was always a favourite with our late Queen. who invariably chose it for presents to her relatives. Biack Opau.—A variety of opal recently discovered is the black opal which has aptly been described by a New Zealand journalist who visited the Exhibition at Christ- church, and saw Messrs Flavelle, Roberts and Sankey’s exbibit of Queensland gems, as “it combines the iridescence of the dewdrop, with the color of the rainbow set in the blackness of night; it is a smothered mass of hidden fire.” QuaRTz.—The many varieties of Siliceous gem stones are all found in Queensland, and are very widely dis- tributed. Quartz crystallises in the hexagonal system, commonly as a six-sided prism, terminated with a six-sided pyramid and striated transversly. These crystals according to color are termed amethyst, cairngorm, rockcrystal, smoky quartz, and are all found at Stanthorpe, Bowen, Anakie, and many other places within the State. For other forms of silicious gem stones found in Queensland see list. All the crystalline varieties of silica occur in Queens- land, but unfortunately they are almost invariably ignored by miners in the search for gold, and so it is difficult to obtain good specimens ; some of those obtained have been cut, and produced very fine gems. CARNELIAN.—One of the forms of chalcedony. Car- nelian in all its forms, white, red, carnelian-agate, etc., are found from Humpybong to Cunningham’s Gap. from Mt. Lindsay to Cape York. SARD is the very clear orange to vermillion carnelian, and is largely used for gentlemen’s signet rings. When banded with white it is gardonyx, and is usually cut, showing two strata of the stone. AGatE.—In all its forms of banded agate, fortification- agate, carnelian agate, moss agate, eye agate, etc., etc., is found throughout the State, as indicated by the vast number of ‘‘ Agate Creeks ” in Queensland, and thousands of tons of the stones are obtainable. They all consist of crypto-crystalline silica. with coloring oxides, and generally with centres of crystalline quartz. BY MAJOR J. R. SANKEY. fll THe CHaLcEeDony of Jewellers is a pale variety, it is the “patra dura ’’which the Italians use for the stone cameos. CHRYSOPRASE.—Of rich apple green colour, is found in the Logan and Yaamba districts, also about Springsure. This stone, which until recently, was only procured from one locality in Bohemia, is said to ensure good luck, and was formerly used for green and white cameos, it is far superior in richness and colour to the New Zealand green- stone. It owes its peculiar soft hue to nickel oxide. AmETHYST.—Crystals of amethyst are found in many districts in this State, including Stanthorpe, Kilkivan, the Burnett, Bowen, Anakie and Herberton; they are simply quartz crystals coloured purple; they are very beautiful, and those of good rich colour, clear and free of flaws, have considerable value. The amethyst is another of the ecclesiastical gem stones, and is even now worn by nearly all bishops. In ancient times it was valued on account of its mystical properties and as an antidote to drunkeness. THE CAIRNGORM is another of the varieties of quartz crystal, it ranges from yellow to deep brown, and is found practically throughout the State. JASPER.—Is found on the Gympie goldfield, Stan- thorpe, Oxley, and other districts. Moss Acate.—Found on the Burnett Water-shed, at Stanthorpe, and many other places; in appearance it is as though moss had been imprisoned in the clear stone. Morion.—A variety of banded smoky quartz crystal ; is very handsome, and found on many of our gold and tin fields. Rose Quartz.— Quartz of rosy hue is frequently found in the State. SAGENITE.—Sagenitic quartz, sometimes called grass stone by the miners on account of its appearance, which is peculiar owing to the inclusion of asbestos fibres in the crystals ; on some of the fields these grass-stones have con- siderable local value. This stone was formerly known as the Venus’ hair stone. and also as Cupid’s arrows, Marmor’s hair, etc. 72 QUEENSLAND GEMS All the other varieties of quartz stones, including avanturine, bloodstone, cat’s eye, citrine, hyacinth, plasma, prase, rock crystal, sardonyx, etc., are found widely dis- tributed throughout Queensland. EMERALD.—Composition : Silica. ‘Alumina. Glucina Hardness, between 7.5 and 8. S.G., 2.7, about. Form, regular six-sided prism. The prism is often striated both internally and externally, parallel with its sides. Emeralds have been found near Herberton, and a further find has been reported in the far North West, exact locality unknown. The crystals shown in the collection are from Emmaville. Brryu.—lIs found in several places in this State. The crystals exhibited are from near Texas. It is often found in the tin wash about Stanthorpe, and near Herbeton. TuRQUOISE.—Has been found at Keppel Bay, and also in one or two other places in the State. Stones exhibited are green turquoise in matrix. colour being a very pleasant, rich green. No deep sinking has been done on this find of turquoise, and it is fully anticipated that the quality will improve as they go down. Topaz.—-Crystals are prisms usually having one end regularly terminated. Basalt cleavage highly perfect, Refraction strong: The topaz occurs in many different districts in Queens- land, has been found close to Brisbane, Toowoomba, Stanthorpe, Boonah, Mount Lindsay, Kilkivan, Nanango, Herberton, and many other places. It is found of pure limpidity, both as crystals and pebbles, also of different shades of yellow and many shades of light bule. Some of the blues found have been almost like pale blue sapphires. My firm has cut a magnificent and flawless stone, of 78 carats, for Mrs. Skertchly, which is probably the largest blue topaz found since the beginning of the last century. The white topaz, when brilliant cut, can easily be mistaken for the diamond, the only difference being that the diamond is iridescent. BY MAJOR J. R. SANKEY. 73 Lapis Lazuxti.—Has been found near Herberton. It will be well-known as the chief constituent of the genuine ultramarine. once so much used by artists. MoonstonE.— The moonstone is invariably associated in the minds of Australians with Ceylon, as the whole of the moonstones sent here are from Ceylon. Moonstones have been found in Queensland, near Nanango. Moonstones are the milky and _ transparent varieties of several species of felspar, remarkable for the pearly reflection of light. They are generally looked upon as lucky stones by the natives of India. The hardess is about 6, specific gravity about 2.6; composition is silicates of alumina with silicates of alkali and silicates of lime. The colours of gem stones in Queensland are quite a revelation to the popular mind, and in order to show the wonderful range of colour which our gem stones possess, I attach the following list of stones arranged under different colour headings. By these it will be seen that the sapphire, which popularly is a blue stone, is in this State found of every hue of blue, green, yellow and orange. I also exhibit a colour star diagram of Queensland gems, which proves that practically every colour and every shade and tone of colour is represented by the gems of this State. ‘ »¢ c}} We ~ she i 3Aotemboltlsaeio taile (|g iin nviLidiven ds Aa Pe ies vidas "a 4 i ; ee Sai} F 2\0 > sa fy ae hay ety yin! y P if f Pas é P t Lh ONY ty A L ee if JA PW dl Af Aat it unt tee 4 P(t Lainey tia j Ait Ge id p foth oat) , aft i if ' P ‘ yo tie l J ; f Lae, j ' ‘ A) ad! wiry ra; Die 1 TOG? ee ee : p' FLEW 2 t j eer ds Fi AT f i 4 tes el © u o , - * Zs 7 \ A ey Proc. Roy. Soc. Q’nanp, Vou. xx. Prats IY. COLOURS or GEMS ; LIMPID op COLOURLESS a ircon (Jargoon ). aie Spinel. Diainond. is Tourmaline. Beryl. Quartz i Crystal). ae Zircon Vacinth), Sapphire (Orental /abax) Garnet (Essoniteo- Connemon Stone, Wgbaxdlite « Crossularie), Chrysoberyl (Oreeretad Chrysolr/e). Spinel. Topaz. Diamond. Olivine (Chrysolite). Tourmaline. Beryl. Quartz (Crtrane o Scotch, spanish, Saxon o False [opar). | BROWN Zircon Vacinth). Saphire (Adamantine Spar). Garnet (Essonite o Connamon Otone), Diamond. Tourmaline. Quartz (Carmgorm). Proc. Roy. Soc. Q’LAND, Vou. xXx. Prats V. GREEN Zircon. Sapphire (Oriental Emerald « Peridot). Garnet (Qemantad, Quvarovite).Cheysoberyl. Alexandrite). Spinel. Topaz. Diamond. | Olivine @rdot), Tourmaline Grazlian Emerald). Beryl (Gmerald, Aquamarine). Quartz (hrysoprase. Plasma, Frase. Jasper). Turquorse. | BLUE Sapphire. Spinel. Topaz. Diamond. Tourmaline (/ndicolite). Beryl (Aquamarine). lolite (Water Sapphire, Dichroite), VIOLET Sapphire Oriental Amethyst). Carnet. Spinel. Diamond. Tourmaline. Quartz Amethyst). Proc. Roy. Soc. Q’Lanp, Vou. xx. Puate VI. Beg) Zircon (Hyacinth). Ruby. Carnet (“yrape, : Fhodolite, Almanatite. Essonete| Carbunete|}. Spinel Galas Ruby, Aubrcelle, Spinel Auby). Orvameond. Tourmaline (Azdellite). BON Sapphire (Ady). Carnet (Crossularite). Chrysoberyl. Spinel (Rulicelle) ae Diamond. Tourmaline (Audellite). Beryl. Ps ORANGE ae Uaernth). Sa apphire (Oriental iypax). Carnet ( Cent ssonite). Chrysoberul . woicell ). Topaz. Utamond. Tourmaline. - 7 Spinel ( ? eS a Pruate Vil. Proc. Roy. Soc. Q’Lanp, Vou. xx. PPR bs, Cher ae ont SANOUDOROOTONOATOUMUTOAUANOARUNUE ond AL = - = a - sa} a — _ - Pa J J iy fe (Pa ole aNinw Wyn Soe es Pe —} tee eh = | <1 = "ALIAVU W41I3dG » eC fe © of “ 1°) ry ea | -~ SB» . , ' a] (Ye eed Cee |e Po B | > ssaNaquvy auinvdyS a J A z ’ 7 QNo | | a | Be | i A a ee CO NT ht, en” wee > _ a | | a —s = rr ry ae ‘ : se oh ese ay ra r = PROCEEDINGS OF THE Annual Meeting of Members, Held on Saturday, January 26th, 1907. The Annual Meeting of Members was held at the Technical College, Ann Street, on Saturday, January 26th, 1907. Hon. A. Norton occupied the chair until the arrival of the Vice-President, Dr. A. J. Turner. The Chairman tendered an apology for the absence of the President, who was then in Melbourne. Minutes of last Annual Meeting were read and con- firmed. The Report of Council and Financial Statement for 1906 were read, and, on the motion of Mr. J. Brownlie Henderson, seconded by Mr. R. Cliffe Mackie, were adopted. To the Members of the Royal Society of Queensland, The Council of the Royal Society of queensland have pleasure in presenting their Annual Report, which deals with the work of the Society during 1906. Forty-four new Members have been elected during the year, and the Membership now stands at 115. The following is a list of the new Members :— Wm. Collins, Dr. 4. Sutton, Walter C. Gregory, Chas. W. Costin, Wm. B. Slade, Eric W. M‘Connel, Geo. Fox, M.L.A., Gerard R. Gore, James H. M‘Connel, Hon. Angus Gibson, M:L.C., Hon. EH. De Miles, M-L.C., Wm. Hood, ©. W. Bundock, D. MacTaggart, Hon. G. W. uray, M.L.C., Hon. T. B. Cribb, T. W. Millar, Hon. E. B. Forrest, M.L.A., P. J. Leahy, M.L.A., John Leahy, M.L.A., Major D. E. Reid, Edward J. M‘Connel, Rev. E. C. Ganley, A. Raymond Jones. John Forrest, Hon. E. H. T. Plant, M.L:C.. Hon. F. I. Power, M.L.C., “LORIPNP “UOFT “BNIMLYAA “OMK) “dadnsvady, “UOFT ‘NOLYON “V ‘y001100 PUNOJ puvB pouluIeXG "PO “SPT ‘TRIOL, £86 ‘BuIsseapy { ‘pg ‘se ‘(SurjuIIg) ‘0 =? efog—soryt]IqvIrT ‘L061 ‘huvnuve ysTe@ ‘aungqstag ‘906F “3STE soquiss90q Surpue avexX ey} 10} LNAWALYLS IWIONWNIG "ANWISNAANO AO ALHIOOS 1WAOH FHL POOL Ltrs IES 27 r 0 0 0 80 Te Si ORO SL 5 L LU See g Teg: ee? ae S “Org0ad) 2 ms (stad som oe a a (tno. = oe ORE ton Ne Bee dss0h0") as 4 Oe A) ae ty a 9 rd T ee ee Toa ae us (ea amen n OF GeO Me 99 36is Beas: a O usaer ce Ss ¢ OL nee: ne Bea: as 2 Ip puvy ur yseg Ayaq ** puvyg ut enbeyp y “enbeyp pojueseiduy ssary : "* ood yUvg 19g 906 ‘Q8Tg laquiedaq, sound : sesuedxm Atpung "* PINy) soustog YsHE a0 suid (7, ae ** yoog snboyo os ‘* edivyg yusg ce ** SUISIAVAPY ‘+ Axveiquvy uo souvinsuy 1OJOOT[OD 0} UOISsTUTMIOD uontqryxg Apnyg angen ONSOTRIVH [VUOT}VUIO}UT ysug Ayog pu o8vysog ALOUOTYVAIG puvx suyulg suLoo\y jo yuayy Aq ‘SLNINWGSUNASI(T Lo &i Clls “ee ee » 0) ft} @) © : eS ** ssulpaaoo0rg Jo aeg “ o 9) 2g to an : SUTIYUIIG 0} suoinqiuyuo) ne OP Gileal bee mS ae CONIGIY XO kpnyg angen ‘ ONE, br 2s as ‘* suoyvuog puv suondtiiosqng “ Toe? cee rus ie qtodat ysuy WOAF OOUBlLG OF, uate chs *SLALMO ay "10h REPORT OF COUNCIL ve The following office-bearers for 1907 were then elected - President, A. Jefferis Turner, M.D.; Vice-President, J. C. Brunnich, F.1.C. ; Hon. Treasurer, Hon. A. Norton, M.L.C. ; Hon. Librarian, Frank Smith, B. Sc. ; Members of Council, J. F. Bailey, W.J. Byram, J. Brownlie Henderson, F.I.C. ; J. Shirley, B. Sc.; F. E. Connah; Hon. Auditor, Geo. Watkins ; Hon. Lanternist, A.G. Jackson. Mr. F. E. Connah consented to act as Hon. Secretary (pro tem.), there being no nomination for the position. A vote of thanks to the retiring President, Hon. Secretary and Hon. Librarian, were carried by acclama- tion. Mr. J. Brownlie Henderson urged that the Society should support the movement for the establishment of a University in Queensland. The matter was left in the hands of the Council. - ne 4 Th ; i i 4 ‘isi wala ‘ “y . A - ” citi | ah a END OF VOLUME Xx. x ; . { SLL D IM eee atte Ss at Na a ORE St OR NU ea ‘ Te Re Oe Bel al ae leit ale Se LARA ET es ae a Vihear oe Mey TS ; new ¥ : ; : feuy ’ ER FS as se PROCEEDINGS OF THE ROYAL SOCIETY or ———— ee QU HENSBAN D. — VOLUME XXI. —— I PRINTED FOR THE SOCIETY ti BY ane if H. POLE & CO., PRINTEKS, ELIZABETH STREET, BRISBANE. 1 | 1908. at remanence * PROCEEDINGS OF THE ROYAL SOCIETY OF GOW as eG INS aA IND: VOLUME XXI. PRINTED FOR THE SOCIETY BY H. POLE «& CO., PRINTEKS, ELIZABETH STREET, BRISBANE > . COAnY (aah Ley lhe) “a a Gea PMUTAUEA HAD) ALLS VEOVETN DATE 7% AA aa part (iGacr Me meet = ae oa ae. we AbIe as Koval Socwty of ary SA} neensland, _ & Patron: HIS EXCELLENCY LORD CHELMSFORD. GBA TILO ASI SyS5) ASO) sy President: J. C. BRUNNICH, Esq., F.I.C. Vice=President : J. F. BAILEY, Esa. Hon. Treasurer: Hon. A. NORTON, M.L.C. Hon. Secretary : H. M. CHALLINOR. Hon. Librarian: FRANK SMITH, B.Sc. Members of Council: COLONEL JOHN THOMSON, M.B., P.M.O. Dr. ALFRED SUTTON. W. J. BYRAM, J. SHIRLEY, B.Sc. J. BROWNLIE HENDERSON, F.I.C Trustees: JOHN CAMERON, M.L.A. Hon. A. NORTON, M.L.C. Cot. JOHN THOMSON, M.B. Hon. Auditor: GEO. WATKINS. Hon. lLanternist: A. G. JACKSON. CONTENTS. NEW GENERA AND SPECIES OF FISHES.— il BS Ogilby, March 28rd, 1907 THE GEOLOGY OF THE GLASSHOUSE MOUN- TAINS.—J. Shirley, April 27th, 1907... GRAPHICAL AND MECHANICAL AIDS TO CAL- CULATION.—J. C. Brunnich, May 25th, 1907 AN EFFICIENT AUTOMATIC SAND FILTER.— H. Wastenecys, June 27th, 1907... A NEW TEST FOR MERCURY.—P. W. Jones, June 27th, 1907 THE DETECTION OF MERCURY IN EXPLO- SIVES.—J. B. Henderson, June 27th, 1907 ... THEK BUILDING OF AUSTRALIA, Deatine with THE ORIGIN oF ouUR Cuimmate, Fauna, Fuora, anp Water Suppty.—Professor S, J. B. Skertchly, De- cember 14th, 1907 NEW GENERA AND SPECIES OF QUEENS- LAND FISHES8.—J. D. Ogilby, December 14th, 1907 INSECTS AND DISEASES (Prestentia Apprxss). —Dr. A. Jefferis Turner, January 27th, 1908 ... 27 33 45 49 51 57 87 99 ON NEW GENERA AND SPECIES OF FISHES. By J. DOUGLAS OGILBY. Read betore the Royal Society of Queensland, March 23rd, 1907. AN analysis of the following paper shows that it deals in one way or another with 38 species of fishes, all but two of which belong to Queensland. The addition of these 36 species to the fauna of the State is due to the enter- prise and acumen of the members of the Amateur Fisher- men’s Association of Queensland, and of those friends, equally of both sexes, who, though as yet, unfortunately, not members, have spared neither time nor trouble in collecting and forwarding objects of interest. The fact that such an addition has been made to our fauna during the short space of twelve months through the medium of a comparatively small and struggling Association, calls attention to some points of profound interest to all those to whom the future welfare of our great State is a matter of thoughtful study. Primarily it emphasizes the magni- tude of the work which still remains to be done in eluci- dating the problems connected with the marine zoology of the State ; and it has to be remembered that with this elucidation is intimately connected an industry, which, being unaffected either by drought or flood, is more stable and permanent than either pastoral or mining pursuits which Nature brings in profuse abundance to our very doors—which recuperates itself for the heavy annual toll which we take from it without the cost of a penny piece to the community—and which, though now small and neglected, cannot fail in time to be one of the most reliable as well as the most valuable assets of the State. Secondarily it proves the utility of this and kindred Associations, so long as they keep ever in view that the primal reason of their existence is to encourage the preservation of our fishes, and to foster the development of our fisheries ; these two objects can only be successfully accomplished yA ON NEW GENERA AND SPECIES OF FISHES by increasingly protecting the nurseries of our food-fishes from the onslaughts of ignorance and greed. Finally, it demonstrates in no uncertain way that this Association is worthy of a more intelligent support, both financial and sympathetic, from Parliament and the public, since the work is done in the common interest of all, without reward, save in the consciousness of worthy work worthily per- formed. All the fishes referred to in this paper, whether types or otherwise, are in the collection of the Amateur Fisher- men’s Association of Queensland. The general results attained in this paper may be most advantageously shown by dividing the analysis referred to above into different sections as follow :— a. Proposed new genera (4). BracHZLURUS ; fam. Orectolobide ; type, B. colclought Ogilby ; v. infra. CIRRISCYLLIUM ; fam. ead.; type, Chiloscyllium modestum Gunther, Proc. Zool. Soc., 1871, p. 654, pl. Liv : Queens- land. Prenonotus ; fam. EHxocetide ; type, Hxocwtus cirriger* Peters, Mon. Akad. Berlin, 1877, p. 555, pl.—fig. 1: China. Merrocymnus; fam. Opistognathide; type, M. eximius Ogilby ; v. infra. b. Proposed new species (11). 1. HeTERODONTUS BON2/-SPEI; fam. Heterodontide; Table Bay, S. Africa. 2. BRACHEZLURUS COLCLOUGHI ; fam. Scyliorhinide ; More- ton Bay. DASYATIS FLUVIORUM ; fam. Dasyatide ; Brisbane River. 4. EXONAUTES FULVIPES; fam. Hzocetide: Lord Howe Island. TRACHINOTUS VELOX ; fam. Carangide; Moreton Bay. 6. APOGONICHTHYS NEBULOSUS; fam. Apogonide; Bris- bane River. 7. HYPOPLECTRODES JAMESONI ; fam. Serranide ; Moreton Bay. 8. PARAPLESIOPS POWERI; fam. ead.; Moreton Bay. ad on * This species has so far been recorded from the China Sea only. BY J. DOUGLAS OGILBY. 3 9. MEROGYMNUS EXIMIUS ; fam. Opistognathide ; Snapper Grounds off Moreton Bay. 10. PSEUDUPENEUS JEFFI; fam. Mullide; Brisbane River. 1l. SPHEROIDES PERLEVIS; fam. Tetraodontide ; Moreton Bay. ORECTOLOBID &. BRACHAILURUS gen. nov. Form rather short and stout, the distal region of the tail scarcely elevated above the dorsal plane. Head moderate and but little depressed, with rather short, broadly rounded snout. Nasal valve folded, with a pro- minent cirrus. Mouth inferior, transverse, of moderate size, nearer to the eye than to the tip of the snout, with well developed labial grooves, which are not continuous across the symphysis of the lower jaw, behind which is a conspicuous longitudinal groove. Teeth similar in both jaws, arranged in many series, small, and tricuspid. Eyes small, elongate-oval, with horizontal pupil ; spiracles large, below and behind the eye. Posterior gill-sht largest, rather nearer to the fourth than the remaining pairs are to one another, the three last slits above the base of the pectoral fin. Tail a little longer than the head and trunk. First dorsal fin originating above the base of the ventrals, and subequal in size to the second ; anal fin low, close to the caudal: caudal fin with the upper flap feebly, the lower moderately developed and notched near the tip; a slight notch between the lobes: pectoral and ventral fins large. Skin covered with minute, smooth, lozenge-shaped scales Ovoviviparous. paxvs short ; déAovpos, a cat). Small ground sharks from the coast of southern Queens- land, forming a connecting link between the oviparous Hemiscylliine and the ovoviviparous Orectolobine. Type Brachelurus colcloughi. (v. infra, p. 4). Waite’s family Hemiscylliide, characterized “ mainly - by having the anal fin behind the second dorsal and in being ovoviviparous’”’* will have to lapse, owing to my announcement of the oviparity of Chiloscyllium}, which necessitates a rearrangement of the scyllioid sharks, of * Waite, Rec. Austr. Mus., iv, 1901, pt.i, p. 32. + Ogilby, Proc. Roy. Soc. Queensl., xx, 1906, p. 27. 4 ON NEW GENERA AND SPECIES OF FISHES which I am only prepared to acknowledge two families, the Scyliorhinide with 5 genera and the Orectolobide with 9 genera. It also necessitates the formation of a second new genus for the reception of Giinther’s Chiloscyllium modestum —the very species on which Mr. Waite relied for the founda- tion of his family—but which is not strictly congeneric with Brachelurus and necessarily much less so with Hemiscyllium. CIRRISCYLLIUM gen. nov. Differs from Brachelurus in the larger, wider, and strongly depressed head; in the anterior position of the mouth, which is well in advance of the middle of the eye ; in the ovate spiracles, which are only partly behind the eye; in the more posterior insertion of the anal fin, which is approximate to and far overlaps the caudal ; and in the much larger scales.. (cirrus, a lock of hair, here signifying a ‘‘tentacle” ; Scyllium, an allied genus=WScyliorhinus : in allusion to the great development of the nasal cirrus in comparison with that of the Hemiscylluine). Type—Chiloscyllium modestum Ginther. Coasts of Queensland and New South Wales. BRACHZLURUS COLCLOUGHI Sp. NOV. Body robust, its depth 72 in the total length. Width of head equaling its depth and § of its length, which is rather less than 3 of the trunk and 5% in the total length ; upper profile of head evenly rounded ; preoral length 3 of that of the head. Anterior angle of nostril equidistant from the mouth and the tip of the snout ; internasal width about equaling the preoral length and $ of the width of the mouth ; nasal cirrus # of the preoral length, not extending to the lower labial groove, and 14 time the diameter of the eye in length. Mouth much nearer to the eye than to the tip of the snout, its width 2%. that between the outer angles of the labial grooves 2? in the length of the head. Eye somewhat nearer to the tip of the snout than to the first gill-slit, its longitudinal diameter 62 in the length of the head. Interorbital region flat with a slight median groove, its width 22 in the head. Spiracle subvertical, situated in a deep ovate rimmed pit, its diameter 3 of that of the eye. Branchial region 22 times the diameter of the eye ; width ~ BY J. DOUGLAS OGILBY. ae 5 of first gill-sht % of the diameter of the eye and 3 of that of the last shit. Length of head and trunk ¢ of that of the tail. First dorsal fin originating above the middle of the base of the ventral, its distance from the tip of the snout 24 in the total length ; anterior and outer borders of fin sublinear, the intervening angle broadly rounded ; posterior angle pointed, the hinder border proximally emarginate, its length 14 time the diameter of the eye and rather more than 4 of its basal length, which is 1} time the vertical height of the fin: second dorsal similar to but not quite so large as the first, its distance from the origin of which is 12 in that from the tip of the tail. Distance between origin of anal and second dorsal less than the interval between the dorsals and 43 in its distance from the ventrals ; its height is 2% in its base ; free space between anal and caudal 14 in the base of the anal. Depth of lower caudal lobe 61 in its length, which is 47 in the total length, its extremity rounded; tip of vertebral column not nearly reaching the margin of the fin. Pectoral fin obovate, its distance from the ventral 2 of that from the tip of the snout, its base rather more than 3 of its greatest width and rather less than 4 of its length, which is $ of that of the head. Origin of ventral fin a little nearer to the first dorsal than to the pectoral. A slight but distinct vertebral groove between the occiput and the first dorsal; lateral line strongly marked forming a ridge, connected by a trans- verse line above the spiracles. Upper surfaces, sides, and tail ashy gray ; lower surface of head, throat, and abdomen white. (Named for my friend Mr. John Colclough, late of Brisbane, and now holding a responsible position in the Aru Islands). Total length of type 460 millimeters. Coast of Queensland. Type in the collection of the Amateur Fishermen’s Association of Queensland. Described from an immature male caught at Mud Island, Moreton Bay, on June 8th, 1906, by Mr. F. L. Phillips, and presented by him to the above collection. Cat. No. 410. There is a second specimen of about the same size in the State Museum. 6 ON NEW GENERA AND SPECIES OF FISHES DASYATIDA. DASYATIS FLUVIORUM sp. nov. Disk subcircular, its length § of its width. Anterior borders of disk linear, meeting one another at a widely obtuse angle; posterior borders rather feebly, inner moderately convex ; outer angles broadly, posterior some- what narrowly rounded. Outer border of ventral fin nearly straight, as long as the snout ; hinder border feebly convex, meeting the outer at rather less than a right angle, the point rounded ; inner angle rounded. Width of mouth subequal to the space between the anterior angles of the nostrils. Snout shghtly projecting beyond the anterior contour. Free border of nasal flap minutely fringed. Lower lip corrugated. Diameter of eye 2§ in the width of the inter- orbital region, which is rather more than that of the mouth and 4 of the length of the disk. Jaws undulated, the upper biemarginate, the intervening ridge fitting into the mesial emargination of the lower jaw, which is strongly bent backwards laterally, so that its entire posterior border is emarginate. Upper jaw succeeded by a wide, fimbriated, membranous flap, bearing on its free border 30 cilia. Floor of mouth with 7 papille arranged in three groups; on each side a pair, of which the inner is the longer, the outer sometimes absent or vestigial, and three in the middle, these being more conspicuous and truncated. No rostral groove ; frontal region with a wide shallow tongue-shaped median depression, which is separated by a narrow bridge from a much smaller circular occipital depression. A row of small, open, mucigerous papille, mostly associated in pairs or threes, between the tip of the snout and the frontal depression, immediately in advance of which they form a small cluster ; each preorbital region with a much larger group of similar papille, which extends backwards above and below the eye and is united to the rostral system by an oblique series of single pores ; a small, irregular cluster outside of and partly anterior to the preorbital group ; a semicircular series on either side of and a pair, placed transversely, within the occipital depression; a crescentic biserial band of subcutaneous tubular pores below and well outside the eye; a similarly situated oval cluster below BY J. DOUGLAS OGILBY. F the spiracles. A group of small blunt tubercles above each spiracle, from which a more or less extended series curves forward along the supraciliary edge ; a transverse row of three tubercles behind the occipital depression, from behind the middle one of which a series of retrorse spines extends elong the dorsal ridge and is continued on the tail nearly to the base of the caudal spine ; one of the median inter- scapular spines is slightly larger than the others of the vertebral series; entire scapular region tuberculigerous, the central group quinqueradiate, one branch directed forwards along and converging on the axial series, two directed outwards to a level with the spiracle, and two directed backwards, but somewhat divergent from the axis ; on either side between the basal angles of the outer and hinder branches are two or three enlarged tubercles. Length of tail 24+ times that of the disk ; spinous tubercles of tail, especially the four nearest to the caudal spine, larger than those of the dorsal ridge ; sides of tail with a few scattered prickles; proximal portion of caudal spine laterally granulated, the rest, with the exception of the extreme tip, which is smooth, armed with fine, closely set serre ; length of spine 3 of that of the prespinous portion of the tail, which is 53 in the length of the tail. A short fold, highest posteriorly, on the upper surface of the tail, overlapped in front by the caudal spine ; lower surface of tail with a much longer and slightly higher fold, which originates below the base of the caudal spine. Olive-brown above, the margins of the disk and the ventral fins lighter ; below bluish white with the discal borders pale brown ; tail black, the lower surface and sides of the proximal fourth brown; spine and tubercles whitish (fluviorum, of the rivers). Measurements of type in millimeters. Length from tip of snout to end of anus 250; width of disk 275; length of ventral fin along outer border 60 ; width of mouth 27; between outer anterior angles of nostrils 28; diameter of eye 103; width of interorbital region 30; length of tail 544. , Brisbane River, ascending well above the tideway. 8 ON NEW GENERA AND SPECIES OF FISHES This species is distinguished from Dasyatis gymnura (Muller)* by the shape of the snout, which in that species is “produced and sharp-pointed’’; by the convexity of the posterior border of the disk ; by the much shorter tail, which in gymnura is thrice the length of the disk ; and by its genera] smoothness. In some respects it approaches Dasyatis sabina (Le Sueur), which is, like it, a strictly estuarine and fiuviatile species. EXOCTID. EXONAUTES FULVIPES sp. nov. D. 12; A. 12; Se. 52—7. Depth of body 6, length of head 4# in the length of the body. Head a little wider than deep, its width equaling its length in front of the hinder margin of the eye. Snout + of the diameter of the eye, which is 22 in the length of the head, $ of the postorbital region, and equal to the concave interorbital width. Gill- rakers 19 on the lower branch of the anterior arch, the last 3 tubercular, the longest 4 of the diameter of the eye. Second pair of upper pharyngeal bones separate, armed with slender, conical, setaceous teeth; third pair fused, forming together a half-moon-shaped bone, which is densely clothed mesially with coarse scalpriform teeth, laterally with much smaller tricuspid teeth; lower pharyngeals united to form a sagittate bone, armed with small tricuspid teeth and a few somewhat enlarged and scalpriform teeth posteriorly.— Dorsal fin moderately high, its second and highest ray 4, its basal length * of the length of the head : anal originating below the 2nd. ray of the dorsal, which also slightly overlaps it, its length 2 of the head: upper * Trygon gymnura Miller, in Ermann, Reise um die Erde, p. 25, pl. xiii, 1830, is identical with T. tuberculata (not Bonnaterre 1788) Shaw, Gen. Zool., v, p. #90, 1804 (after Lacépéde’s Raie tuberculée) and Giinther, Catal. Fish., viii, p. 480, 1870. The latter author records it from Sydney, confounding it with one of our eastern species, possibly my D. thetidis. (Mem. Austr. Mus., no. iv. pt. i, p. 46, 1899). + There is abundant evidence to show that all the teeth were originally tricuspid, those which are now apparently chisel-shaped having had the cusps worn down by continuous trituration. BY J. DOUGLAS OGILBY. 9 caudal lobe acutely, lower bluntly pointed, the latter 31 in the length of the body: two upper pectoral rays simple ; Ist. ray } of the 2nd, and 3 of the 4th and longest ray; 2nd. ray 3 of the 3rd, and 3 of the 4th ray; outer branch of 3rd. ray extending to midway between the tips of the 2nd, and of its own inner branch; 3rd. ray of the 4th, which is 4 of the length of the body and reaches to the base of the caudal : ventral inserted midway between the root of the caudal and the gill-opening ; 3rd. ray longest, not quite reaching to the rudimentary caudal rays and 4 of the body- length. Above glossy brown, each of the scales with a lighter border; sides of head and body golden brown ; belly silvery : all the fins pale yellowish brown (fulvus, tawny ; pes, foot). Type in the Australian Museum, Sydney. Total length 310 millimeters. Seas round Lord Howe Island. The specimen from which the above description was drawn up has been the subject of more than one examina- tion and identification. Originally referred by me to the Middle American Exonautes dowit, Waite, during his visit to Lord Howe Island in December, 1902, having obtained several examples through the agency of certain complaisant nesting gannets, re-examined this specimen and decided that it belonged to the Atlantic® EH. rondeletii; from this species, however, it differs among other characters, in its more slender form, longer snout, shorter anal fin (as compared with the dorsal), longer pectorals, posterior insertion, much greater length and uniform coloration of the ventrals. H. fulvipes is in fact the Western Pacific representative of the Atlantic EH. rondeletw, while it is possible that the Eastern Pacific form, as exemplified by the Acapulco specimen, may differ specifically from both, No other known species of Hxonautes, other than H. easiliens and E. rondeletti, can possibly be confounded with * T am aware that Liitken records this species from Acapulco, a sea- port on the Pacific Coast of Mexico, but Liitken himself was in considerable doubt as to whether he was not confusing two or more species under the specific name rondeletii. ‘‘This species is subject to some variation, or else, as Dr. Liitken suggests, we are uncertain as to the number of real species that group themselves around its type.” (Jordan & Evermann, Fish. N. & Mid. Amer., pt. i, p. 733, footnote*). 10 ON NEW GENERA AND SPECIES OF FISHES EH. fulvipes, since all the others have the second pectoral ray divided.* . exsiliens may easily be distinguished by the equality in length of the two first pectoral rays and the anterior position of the ventral fins, which are inserted midway between the root of the caudal and the eye. Described from a fine specimen in the collection of the Australian Museum, Sydney; Reg. No. I. 1955. I have also examined a second specimen (unnumbered and without locality), labeled in Bleeker’s handwriting “ Hxocetus extliens.”’ Under the heading of ‘‘ Hxocetus unicolor? C. V.”t Kner§ records an exoccetid from Sydney; but we know from Bleeker’s personal examination of the three examples upon which Valenciennes established his species, and which are part of the collection in the Jardin des Plantes, that this is a hybrid form composed of two specimens of Cypsilurus and one of Exonautes. Bleeker’s remarks on the three specimens mentioned by Valenciennes are as follows, and in my opinion form * T am unable to speak with certainty regarding Exocetus ilna Clarke, as the author’s long and rambling description gives but little clue as to its position, and the important characters connected with the upper pectoral rays are entirely omitted. Judging from the similarity of the dor- sal and anal fins we believe it to be Hxonautes. + I take this opportunity of publicly thanking the Trustees and Curator of the Australian Museum for their kindness in lending me their valuable collection of fiying-fishes. + + The following is a translation of Valenciennes’ description :— L’Exocet aux pectorales unicoldres. (EXOC@TUS UNICOLOR nob. Another species from the Seas of India— has the occiput flattened and the snout a little compressed, like that of the Mediterranean (Hxocetus volitans), but the eye is much larger and the head longer. The length of the head is somewhat less than } of the total length (c.c.). The orbital diameter is 4 of the length of the head. The dorsal fin is low and nearly equal (in height). DSi eA Lae The color of the back, like that of the preceding species (Hxocetus speculiger) is uniform plumbeous ; the pectorals are violaceous gray, without either the white spot or border of the preceding species. The ventrals are white, with a small gray longitudinal spot near the axil. The specimens are a foot long; they have been brought from Vanikoro and Java by MM. Quoy and Gaimard; a third has come to us from the Seas of India by the courtesy of M. Dussumier. § Reise Novara, Fisch. p. 325. BY J. DOUGLAS OGILBY. Le the crux of the whole question :—* Formerly I believed that my oltgolepis was identical with the wnicolor of Valenciennes, but the examination which I was privileged to make in Paris, of the three examples which served Valenciennes for the establishment of his wnicolor, has convinced me that not only is oligolepis very distinct from it, but also that wnicolor is founded on three individuals which belong to at least two species, whilst it is not mentioned in the description from which of the three that has been taken. All three specimens have about 50 scales in a longitudinal series, which proves that it cannot rationally be confounded with oligolepis. In the individuals from Vanikoro and the Seas of India the dorsal fin commences well in advance of the anal and is composed of 13 rays, and I presume that it is from these examples that the descrip- tion has been taken. These then should constitute the true wnicolor. As for Valenciennes’ third example, which came from Java, it is a very distinct species, with the dorsal fin originating opposite the first anal ray and supported by 10 rays only. This individual appears to me to be indis- tinguishable from Exocetus oxycephalus Bleeker, Valen- ciennes having failed to recognise it as a distinct species.’’* The italics in the above paragraph respecting the origin of the dorsal fin are mine. The above quotation fixes without fear of contradiction the Exocetus unicolor of Valenciennes as a Cypsilurus, firstly because the dorsal formula of 13 rays given by that author belongs (fide Bleeker) to the two specimens in which “the dorsal fin commences well in advance of the anal,” secondly because Bleeker was the earliest author to fix the name uwnicolor on a definite specimen, and thirdly when two of three examples have been proved to belong to a particular genus we would naturally take one of the majority as the type of the species in preference to the single example forming the minority, no type specimen having been designated by the author; and more especially in this case where the arbitrary selection of such a type would wilfully flout the author’s own determination as regards the number of the dorsal rays. Valenciennes’ species should, therefore, be included in the genus Cypsilurus, * Atlas Ichth., vi, p. 70. 12 ON NEW GENERA AND SPECIES OF FISHES taking, for choice, the Vanikoro fish as the type, that being the first specimen referred to by its describer. In Professor Jordan’s recent great work* this fish 1s twice referred to as Hzonautes unicolor, but the above remarks in my opinion clearly prove that this view of its generic position is founded on error. In vol. I, p. 341, an Australian flying-fish is figured with the legend, “ Aus- tralian Flying-Fish, Hzonautes wunicolor (Valenciennes). Specimen from Tasman Sea, having parasitic lJernzan crustaceans, to which parasitic barnacles are attached (After Kellogg).”’ The second quotation, in vol. II, p. 213, is—“ The large Australian species Hxonautes wunicolor belongs to this group.” The undivided second pectoral ray in Kellogg’s figure certainly suggests that it belongs to the species here described, but the fin formula—D. 10, A. 12 —together with the overlapping of the dorsal by the anal, and the extraordinary shape of the latter fin, points to quite a distinct fish; the origin of the anal being distinctly behind that of the dorsal it can not be Valenciennes’ Javan fish in which both fins commence on the same plane, and in which the second pectoral ray is divided (equals Exocetus oxycephalus Bleeker). Taking all things into consideration, I am inclined to believe that the figure is intended to represent Hxonautes fulvipes, which, however, can not strictly be called ‘“‘ the large Australian flying-fish,” since, so far as is known, the limit of its growth is about one foot, while Cypsilurus melanocercus, which inhabits much the same area, and which is the Pacific representative of Cypsilurus lineatus, attains a length of eighteen inches. Before concluding this article there is just one other point to be cleared up, and that is the identity of the Sydney flying-fish referred with a query by Kner to Hxocetus unicolor. There are several features even in his insufficient description which do not agree with the two specimens on which my diagnosis is founded. For instance, there is one ray less in the dorsal and anal fins, the smaller eye is more than the interorbital width, which is flat, and the pectorals are shorter ; while of course we know nothing of the pectoral formula in Kner’s fish. Should, however, Kner’s fish eventually prove to be identical with that described above, * A Guide to the Study of Fishes by David Starr Jordan, 1905. BY J. DOUGLAS OGILBY. 13 which can only be ascertained by a direct comparison of the Sydney fish with my description*, the specific name fulvipes would be superseded by cribrosus Kner, an alter- native name given by that author to his fish, and in that case the synonymy of the species would stand as follows :— EXONAUTES CRIBROSUS. Exocetus unicolor’? C.V.; Kner, Reise Novara, Fische p- 325, 1867: Sydney. Exocetus cribrosus Kner, ibid., p. 326. Suggested new name should the species prove distinct from EF. wnicolor. Exocetus dovi Ogilby, Mem. Austr. Mus., No. 2, Lord Howe Island, p. 71, 1889. Not H. dowti Gill, 1863= E. rufipinnis Cuvier & Valenciennes, 1846. Exonautes rondeletii Waite, Rec. Austr. Mus., v, 1904, pp. 156 & 195: Admiralty Islets. Not Hxocetus rondeletii Cuvier & Valenciennes, 1846. Exonautes unicolor Jordan, Study of Fishes, i, fig. 226 & u, p. 213, 1905. Not Hxocetus unicolor Cuvier & Valenciennes, 1846, which is a Cypsilurus. Exonautes fulvipes Ogilby. Supra. PTENONOTUS gen. nov. This genus is proposed for the accommodation of Exocetus cirriger Peters,t and differs from Cypsilurus and Hxonautes, between which it should be placed. in the elongated hemirhamphiform body, the permanency of the submental appendage, which is of great size and divided distally into numerous fine cutaneous filaments, and in the high, pointed dorsal fin, which extends, when depressed,. far beyond the base of the caudal. (rrpvés, winged ; votos, back.) Hab. China Sea. * Tf, as I presume, Kner’s Novara specimen from Sydney is deposited’ in the collection of the Imperial Museum, Vienna, Dr. Steindachner might. set at rest for ever the identity of Hxonautes eribrosus by making the: suggested comparison. + Mon. Akad. Berlin, 1877, p. 555.. 14 ON NEW GENERA AND SPECIES OF FISHES CARANGID &. TRACHINOTUS VELOX sp. nov. D. yi, 1 25; A. ii, 1 26; Sc. 100 cire. Depth ati bady 22, length of head 3% in the length of the body. Dorsal profile a little more arched than the ventral ; profile of head slightly convex from behind the feebly declivous snout to the nape, thence obliquely linear to the origin of the dorsal fin. Snout as long as the diameter of the eye, which is 34 in the length of the head ; interorbital width rather more than the diameter of the eye. Jaws equal; maxillary reaching to below the anterior border of the pupil, its width at the distal extremity $ of the eye. Jaws with a narrow band of villiform teeth, the outer series slightly enlarged ; vomer with a triangular patch, palatines each with a short band of similar teeth. Cheeks and upper third of opercles scaly ; anterior half of lateral line undu- lating and slightly descending: posterior half straight. Anterior rays of the dorsal fin extending to the tip of the last ray, of the anal fin to the base of the caudal, the former 1£, the latter 12 in the length of the body : upper lobe of caudal fin considerably longer than the lower lobe and a little longer than the produced anal rays: pectoral fin just reaching to the vertical from the vent, 7 of the length of the head: ventral reaching $ of its distance from the vent, its length 3 of the head. Bluish gray above, silvery on the sides and below; a series of from five to seven more or less conspicuous bluish spots above but usually touching and anteriorly sometimes even encroaching upon the lateral line : elongate rays of the dorsal and anal, and the outer rays and tips of the caudal lobes dark leaden blue (velox, swift). Type in the collection of the Amateur Fishermen’s Association of Queensland ; Cat. No. 289. By previous writers on Australian zoology this very distinct species has been confounded with the Indian Trachinotus russellii, the confusion having doubtless arisen through the similarity of the color markings in the two species. The western fish may, however, be easily distin- guished by its deeper body (21 in the length); by the shortness of the dorsal and anal lobes, which do not extend to the end of their respective bases, and of which the dorsal BY J. DOUGLAS OGILBY. 15 lobe is the longer; by the much shorter caudal lobes (232 in the length) ; by the more forward insertion of the ventral fin (below the base of the pectoral) ; etc. Up to the present we have no authentic knowledge of the occurence of either T. russellii or T. baillonit, which are certainly distinct, in the seas of the Commonwealth, and all records of these two species eastward from a line drawn between the West Coast of Australia and the Moluccas must be looked upon with grave suspicion. Described from a half grown example, caught in the South Passage, Moreton Bay, and presented to the A.F.A.Q. Museum by Mr. Willie J. Howes. FAMILY APOGONID A. APOGONICHTHYS NEBULOSUS sp. nov. 1D: vitesse Anji 8.3 Se.) 25, cires; Ly le 9. Depth) of body 22, length of head 22 in length ot body. Snout 4 longer than diameter of eye, which is $ of length of head. In- terorbital region convex, its width 5? in the head. Mavxil- lary extending to below middle of eye, the width of its distal extremity 3 of the eye ; lower jaw the longer. Lateral line ceasing below the spinous dorsal. Spinous dorsal originating behind base of pectoral ; second spine highest, 24 in length of head and not quite so high as the soft dorsal : anal originating slightly behind and somewhat higher than soft dorsal, its basal length 34 in the head : caudal rounded, # in length of body : pectoral 3 of length of head and as long as the ventral, which reaches to the vent. Pale greenish gray, marbled with olive green; upper surface of head darker; a pair of short, broad, posteriorly convergent, brown bands on the occiput: tips of anal and ventral fins dusky. Inrides silvery, strongly suffused with umber brown. (nebulosus, clouded). Dimensions of type in millimeters.—Total length to end of middle caudal ray 57; to end of hypural bone 45 ; depth of body 17:5; length of head 19; of snout 6°25; diameter of eye 4°75; width of interorbital region 3°5; of maxilla 3; height of 2nd dorsal spine 8°5; of soft dorsal 9°5; length of anal 6; height of anal 10; length of caudal 12°5; of pectoral 12; of ventral 12. 16 ON NEW GENERA AND SPECIES OF FISHES Type in the collection of the Amateur Fishermen’s Association of Queensland. Distribution.—Brisbane River. Type locality, Ed- ward Street Baths. FAMILY SERRANID. HYPOPLECTRODES JAMESONI sp. nov. D. x 20; A. im 8; Sc. 3—$3—14; L. 1. 40. Depth of body 24, length of head 22 in length of body. Snout 2 longer than diameter of eye, which is 43 in length of head. Interorbital region flat, its width about § of length of head. Maxillary extending to below middle of eye, the width of its distal extremity 2 of the eye; lower jaw the longer. Preopercle with 3 strong antrorse spines on the lower border; subopercle denticulated ; upper opercular spine much the longer. Scales of cheeks, opercles, nape, and breast much smaller than those of the body ; lateral line tubes simple, short anteriorly but gradually increasing in length so that posteriorly they extend nearly along the entire scale. Dorsal originating in advance of base of pectoral ; 5th. dorsal spine highest, 23 in length of head and a little more than the highest soft rays; 10th. spine nearly as high asthe 2nd, 3 of highest soft rays: 2nd. anal spine very strong, higher than the 3rd, and than the highest dorsal spine, the rays about as high as the 2nd. spine: caudal truncate, 43 in total length: pectoral with 16 rays, 3 of length of head and longer than the ventral, which just reaches the vent. Dark olive brown above the lateral line, the trunk and tail with about nine narrow gray bands, which are inconspicious anteriorly ; below the lateral lne the gray predominates the dark markings taking the form of seven or eight irregular, transverse, slightly oblique bands. any two of which may be wholly or partially con- nected, and which only become annular on the tail: sides of head with three longitudinal series of brown spots, the first from below the eye to the preopercular border, whence it curves upwards behind the eye; the second from the maxilla to the middle of the base of the pectoral ; the third from the angle of the mouth to below the same; chin blackish ; a black band behind the chin and a pair of similar spots below the corners of the mouth; opercles BY J. DOUGLAS OGILBY. 17 marbled. Spinous dorsal and basal half of soft similar to the back ; outer half of soft dorsal and of caudal lighter with a distinct reddish tinge ; anal violaceous gray, with two dark basal spots; pectorals strongly, ventrals faintly tinged with red. Irides dark purplish brown. (Named for Mr. Jonathan Thompson Jameson, an enthusiastic col- lector, who has brought me many interesting zoological specimens. )* Dimensions of type in millimeters.—Total length to end of middle caudal ray 85; to end of hypural bone 70 ; depth of body 28; length of head 29; of snout 8:5; dia- meter of eye 6; width of interorbital region 3°25 ; of maxilla 5; height of 5th dorsal spine 11; of 2nd anal spine 12°5 ; length of caudal 15; of pectoral 21; of ventral 18. Distribution.—Moreton Bay. Type locality, Woody Point ; other specimens seen from Sandgate. This very distinct species belongs to the Guilbertia group of Hypoplectrodes, and is most nearly related to H. semicincta, from which, however, the much larger scales and more strongly developed anal fin at once distinguish it. The pattern of coloration also is widely different from that of the other members of the genus. PARAPLESIOPS POWERI. D2 xn 105° A. 10, «Se, 2—33—12-; » Le le 38. Depth of body equal to the length of the head, which is 4 of that of the body. Snout short and rounded, 1 of the diameter of the eye, which is 4 of the length of the head. Interorbital region narrow and feebly convex, its width 5? in the head. Jaws equal; maxillary extending to below the hinder border of the eye, the width of its distal extremity 3 of the diameter of the eye. Angle of preopercle with several stout spines. Several series of small scales on the cheeks and _ postorbital region; opercular scales large. Gill-rakers 12 on the lower branch of the anterior arch. Last dorsal spine the highest, 1,% in the length of the head and 24 1n the 6th and highest ray : 3rd anal spine the highest, as high as the last dorsal spine, the 6th soft ray as high * Tam the more pleased at this opportunity of naming so handsome a species after my friend Mr. Jameson, because it was through my instru- mentality that the supposed species named by Macleay Atherinosoma jamesoni was reduced to a synonym of Pseudomugil signifer. B—Royat Soc, 18 ON NEW GENERA AND SPECIES OF FISHES as the highest dorsal ray and 24 in the length of the body, as also is the pointed caudal fin: pectoral with 18 rays, the middle the longest, extending to the vertical from the origin of the anal and a little longer than the head : ventral reaching to the base of the first soft anal ray, 24 in the length of the body. Uniform greenish brown, the upper surface and sides of the head with a purplish gloss: all the fins blackish, except the pectorals and basal third of the ventrals, which are pale yellowish brown. The description is taken from a fine example, 172 millimeters in length, caught at Mud Island, Moreton Bay, by Mr. Percy Power, to whom I have great pleasure in dedicating this handsome and very distinct species, which he kindly presented to the collection of the Amateur Fishermen’s Association of Queensland. Cat. No. 224. OPISTOGNATHID &. MEROGYMNUS gen. nov. Differs from Gnathypops in having the greater part of the trunk naked, the teeth subequal in size, without any conspicuously enlarged series, and the gill-rakers more numerous, longer, and slender (pépos, in part; yupvés, naked); East Coast of Australia. Two species. MEROGYMNUS EXIMIUS sp. nov. D. xi13; A.i12; Sc. 85 cire.* Width of body 7}, depth of body 33, length of head 2,% in the length of the body. Width of head 3 of its depth and 2 of its length. Length of snout #, interorbital width ? of the diameter of the eye, which is 3} in the head. Maxillary extending less than a diameter of the eye behind the eye, its length 3 of that of the head, the width of its distal extremity $ of the eye. Jaws with broad bands of small subequal curved teeth ; one or two teeth on the vomer. Nasal tentacle minute. Gill-rakers 26 on the lower branch of the anterior arch, the longest # of the snout. Anterior half of the trunk naked, the rest of the body covered with minute seales, * Between the base of the caudal fin and the vertical from the vent, in front of which they are mostly irregular, non-imbricate, and deeply imbedded. BY J. DOUGLAS OGILBY. 19 which become increasingly distant and imbedded towards the front ; lateral line ceasing below the 5th or 6th dorsal ray. Dorsal fin originating above the middle of the opercle, the length of the spinous portion but little less than that of the soft ; height of the last dorsal spine about 2 of that of the longest (8th or 9th) dorsal ray, which is # of the head : anal originating below or but little behind the commence- ment of the soft dorsal and about as Jong as it: caudal Jong, its length } or rather more, that of the pectoral + of the length of the body : ventral produced, nearly reaching to the vent, % of the length of the head. Golden or golden brown, the sides and lower surface of the tail with two series of large round or oval, golden spots, separated by broad blue interlacing bands ; abdominal region and end of tail violet, with splashes of greenish gold : head Jilaceous, with irregular violet spots and bars; a deep blue blotch, prolonged upwards as a zig-zag violet band on the opercle ; branchiostegal region blackish: outer half ~ of spinous dorsal dark olive green, narrowly bordered above with purple, below with pale blue ; the latter band is continued to the end of the soft dorsal, the outer half of which is pale olive green with many of the membranes blue, as also is the base ; anal blue, with a median and a basal series of golden spots ; caudal rays olive green or purple, the interradial membrane blue ; pectorals pale yellowish brown, the base with one or two vertical blue bars ; ventrals bluish black. Iris hight blue, with a narrow golden brown rim; pupil dark blue (eximius, beautiful). Type in the collection of the Amateur Fishermen’s Association of Queensland ; Cat. No. 320. Presented to the Museum by Mr. J. Stitt. Total length 285 millimeters. Snapper Banks off Moreton Bay, Queensland. FAMILY MULLIDZ. PSEUDUPENEUS JEFFI sp. nov. D. vii, i 8; A. 11 6; Sc 23-28 + 3*—6}. Depth of body 34, length of head 3} in length of body. Diameter of eye equal to width of rounded interorbital region and & of snout, which is 2} in head and is deeply grooved trans- * On the base of the caudal. 20 ON NEW GENERA AND SPECIES OF FISHES versely above the anterior nostril, from whence the head rises rather abruptly. Teeth stout and conical, in a single series in both jaws. Maxillary extending to midway between anterior nostril and eye, the width of its distal extremity 3 of the latter; lower jaw included ; barbels extending to below posterior border of pupil. Opercular spine conspicuous. Cheek-scales in three series; 2 com- plete scales between the dorsal fins ; tubes of lateral line with from 3 to 5 tubules, mostly on the upper side.* Spinous dorsal originating above base of pectoral, shortert but higher than soft dorsal; 3rd spine highest, + of head : middle caudal rays 4 of the outer, which are % of head ; caudal peduncle rather slender, its least depth % of its length and $ of that of snout : pectoral with 17 rays, reaching to 11th scale of lateral line, and a little shorter than ventral, which is # of head. Reddish, the median line of the back darker ; two broad curved bands on the upper half of the sides greenish yellow ; below them a third narrower linear yellow band ; these bands extend forwards to the snout and maxillary, the upper passing through the eye and uniting with the dorsal band behind the soft fin, the median ter- minating at the base of the caudal fin, the lower above the end of the anal; these bands are separated by narrow bars of shining pink ; lower surface pearly white ; a dark spot on the upper lateral band close behind the eye, and a second at the angle of the preopercle, the two connected by a lighter band; a larger black blotch on each side of of the upper half of the caudal peduncle, united above by a broad brown band. Fins red, the proximal half of the rays paler ; soft dorsal and caudal narrowly tipped with yellow ; base of pectorals dark reddish brown; ventrals with or without a golden submarginal band. Inides fiery orange, clouded above with olive. (Named for Mr. Vincent Henry Jeff, a most generous donor to our Museums).t Total length of type to end of middle caudal rays, 121 millimeters. * Asis often the case some of the posterior tubes may be simple; in this instance 5 on the right side are simple while all on the left are branched. + Membrane of terminal spine not included. + Mr, Jeff’s numerous and valuable donations, both to the State Museum and to that with which I am specially associated, entitle him to the warmest thanks of all who are interested in our marine zoology. BY J. DOUGLAS OGILBY. mal | Type locality: Brisbane River. Jeff’s Red Mullet is closely related to Upeneus signatus, Gunther, but the pattern of coloration is so widely different that I deem it better to call attention to it thus, more especially as Gunther’s species has never been recorded from this State, nor in fact, further north than the Port Jackson District, where it is common. Nine species of “‘ red mullets ”’ have up to the present been recorded from the Queensland Coast, but this number will doubtless be largely augmented when our northern waters shall have been more critically exploited, since at least ten other Indo-Malayan forms have already been noticed from British New Guinea, the Solomon Islands, and the New Hebrides, namely :—Upeneus sulphureus, Mulloides ruber, Pseudupeneus cherserydrus, P. filamentosus, P. barberinoides, P. indicus, P. malabaricus, P. bifasciatus, P. trifasciatus, and P. pleurostigma. Our recorded species are as follow :— i. UPENEUS Cuvier, Régne Anim., ed. 2, ii, p. 157, 1829 (vittatus). Bands of villiform teeth in both jaws, on the vomer and the palatines. 1. vittatus Forskal, Descr. Anim., pak; WTS: 2. tragula Richardson, Ichth. China & Japan, p. 220, 1846. 3. roseus Castelnau, Res. Fish. Austr., p. 11, 1875. ii. Muxtorpses Bleeker, Nat. Tijds. Ned. Ind., iii, 1852, p. 697 (flavolineatus = auriflamma). Bands of villiform teeth in both jaws ; vomer and palatines toothless. auriflamma Forskal, ibid., p. 30. 5. armatus de Vis, Proc. Linn. Soc. N. S. Wales, ix, 1884, p. 458 (2 samoensis). il. PSEUDUPENEUS Bleeker, Mem. Poiss. Cote de Guinée, p. 56, 1862 (prayensis). A single series of stout conical teeth in each jaw ; vomer and palatines toothless. . barberinus Lacepede, Hist. Nat. Poiss., iii, p. 406, 1802. . rubroniger de Vis, ibid. jefft Ogilby, ut supra. porosus Cuvier & Valenciennes, Hist. Nat. Poiss., iil, p. 455, 1829. > OMI 22 ON NEW GENERA AND SPECIES OF FISHES FAMILY TETRAODONTIDA. SPHEROIDES PERLEVIS sp. nov. D. 8; A. 6; P. 16. Body robust, evenly tapering from behind the eye, its depth 33, length of head 3in length of body. Width of head 13, depth of head 1% in its length. Eye moderate, free below, its diameter 24 in length of snout and 42 in that of head. Interorbital region feebly convex, its width 7# (including eyelids 24) in the head. Lips equal, papillose within; lower jaw included; chin prominent. Teeth with slightly uneven edges and well marked sutural grooves. Width of gill-opening % more than diameter of eye, its inner fold slightly protruding upon the inferior half. Skin entirely free from spinules, everywhere longi- tudinally striated ; lateral ridge strongly developed, but less conspicuous on head and distal end of peduncle. Lateral line gently curved and slightly undulating to a point midway between tip of pectoral and origin of dorsal where it descends more abruptly ; thence nearly straight to base of caudal ; a transverse line, divided mesially, above base of pectoral ; a short branch curving behind the eye ; another between hinder margin of eye and lateral ridge ; main line carried forward from below hinder third of lower eyelid in a wide curve to the nostril; a short disconnected line, divided mesially, in front of nostril ; a second line below lateral ridge from extremity of pectoral to base of caudal. Dorsal fin pointed, its length 24 in its height, which is 2 in the head, its distance from the caudal 32 in total length : anal fin originating below the middle of, shorter and lower than, the dorsal: caudal fin feebly rounded, 43 in total length; depth of caudal peduncle immediately behind base of dorsal 4 of its width at the same place, its least depth 42 in the head: pectoral fin rounded, with the upper angle slightly produced, 1% in length of head. Upper surface lilaceous brown, mottled with gray, and closely dotted and lined with darker brown; lower half of sides gray with larger violet spots; below pearly white; an irregularly oblong, narrow, silvery ring in front of the dorsal.* Dorsal and caudal fins violaceous; anal and pectorals whitish. Iris golden. (perlevis, very smooth: in reference to the complete absence of dermal spinules). * Perhaps an individual peculiarity. BY J. DOUGLAS OGILBY. 23 Type in the collection of the Amateur Fishermen’s Association of Queensland, to which it was presented by Mr. Chris. Dahl, who caught it at Sandgate, Moreton Bay. Finally, I have much pleasure in recording the follow- ing fishes, examples of which are in the collection of the Amateur Fishermen’s Association, as new either to the Commonwealth or to the State Fauna. To the Australian fauna should now be added— Paraplotosus albilabris Cuvier & Valenciennes, Hist. Nat. Poiss., xv, p. 427; 1840: Batavia. A single specimen from Dunk Island; E. J. Banfield ; Cat. No. 469. Sphyrena brachygnathos Bleeker, Nat. Tijds. Ned. Ind., vu, 1854, p. 368: Batchian. Occurs in Moreton Bay ; Chris. Dahl ; Cat. No. 439. Apogon endekatenia Bleeker, ibid., in, 1852, p. 449: Banka. Several specimens from Green Island (Cairns District) and Dunk Island, collected respectively by Messrs. BK. J. Lyons and E. J. Banfield ; Cat. Nos. 198 & 472. Apogon macropterus Kuhl & van Hasselt: Cuvier & Valenciennes, ibid., 11, p. 160, 1828: Java. A single specimen from Dunk Island; E. J. Banfield ; Cat. No. 474. Stethojulis renardi Bleeker, ibid., u1,-1851, p. 253: Banda. Two specimens, one from Green Island, Cairns, K. J. Lyons, and one from Dunk Island, E. J. Banfield ; Cat. Nos. 199 & 485. Teuthis nigrofuscus Forskal, Descr. Anim., p. 64, 1775: Djidda. One specimen from Dunk Island; E. J. Banfield ; Cat. No. 481. Pterois lunulata Schlegel, Faun. Japon., Pisce. p. 46, 1843: Nagasaki. One specimen from Mooloolah; J. H. Stevens; Cat. No. 421. Addenda to the Queensland fauna. Galeus australis Macleay, Proc. Linn. Soc. N. 8. Wales, vi, 1881, p. 354: Port Jackson. I have examined two specimens of this shark from Moreton Bay. The most northerly locality previously reported was “ off Morna Point to the south of Port Stephens ” (Waite, Mem. Austr. Mus). Engraulis antipodum Ginther, B. M. Catal. Fish., vu, p. 386, 1868: Tasmania and New Zealand. Visits our 24 ON NEW GENERA AND SPECIES OF FISHES southern shores in large shoals during the winter months. Southport, J. Douglas Ogilby ; Cat. No. 686. Hyperlophus copii Ogilby, Proc. Linn. Soc. N. 8. Wales, xxi, 1897, p. 72: Maroubra. Same as preceding. Mud Island ; J. Douglas Ogilby ; Cat. No. 413. Aulopus purpurissatus Richardson, Icon. Pisc., p. vi, pl. iu, fig 3, 1843. Occasionally taken on the Snapper Grounds off Moreton Bay, and ranging northward to Laguna Bay, Tewantin, whence I received a specimen through the courtesy of Mr. V. H. Jeff; Cat. No. 156. Also one from Mount Tempest ; C. Russell ; Cat. No. 339. Thunnus thynnus (Linneus), Syst. Nat., ed. 10, p. 297, 1758. I have examined two specimens of Thunnus, the first taken in Port Jackson, the second in Moreton Bay, and was unable in either case to find any characters by which they might be differentiated from the Mediterranean fish. Trachurus declivis Jenyns, Zool. Beagle, i, Fish. p. 68, 1842: King George’s Sound. Visits our coast during the winter months. Cape Moreton; C. Sigley ; Cat. No. 95. Apogon roseigaster Ramsay & Ogilby, Proc. Linn. Soc. N. 8S. Wales, xi, 1887, p. 1101: Port Jackson. Abundant in the Brisbane River. Apogonichthys auritus Cuvier & Valenciennes, Hist. Nat. Poiss., vu, p. 443, 1831: Mauritius. Two examples ; Dunk Island ; E. J. Banfield ; Cat. No. 473: One example ; Bell’s Swamps, in fresh water ; W. Weatherill. Acanthistius serratus Cuvier & Valenciennes, ibid., ll, p. 399, 1828: King George’s Sound. Two examples ; Point Lookout ; E. H. Shearwin ; Cat. No. 425. Chilodactylus fuscus Castelnau, Proc. Linn. Soc. N. S. Wales, ii, 1879, p. 376: Port Jackson. One specimen ; Moreton Bay ; V. H. Jeff ; Cat. No. 172. Verreo oxycephalus Bleeker, Notices Ichth., p. 7, 1862: Japan. One example; Arkwright Shoal; H. W. Haseler ; Cat. No. 269. Acherodus badius Ogilby, Edib. Fish & Crust. N.S. Wales, p. 134, 1893: Port Jackson. Not uncommon in the shop windows during the winter of 1906; not observed during that of 1907; again common in 1908. Platyglossus immaculatus Macleay, Proc. Linn. Soc. N. 8. Wales, 11, 1878, p. 363: Port Darwin. One specimen ; Dunk Island; E. J. Banfield ; Cat. No. 484. BY J. DOUGLAS OGILBY. 25 Pseudolabrus gymnogenis (Gunther, ibid., iv, p. 117, 1862: Port Jackson. One specimen; Mooloolah;: C. Sigley & H. W. Haseler ; Cat. No. 178. Pseudolabrus nigromarginatus Macleay, ibid., iii, 1878, p. 35: Port Jack on. One specimen ; Caloundra Banks ; W. H. Sidle ; Cat. No. 158. Olisthops cyanomelas Richardson, Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. (2) vu, 1851, p. 291 : King George’s Sound. One specimen ; Southport ; H. Myers; Cat. No. 568. Cesiosoma equipinnis Richardson, Zool. Erebus & Terror, Fish. p. 121, 1848: King George’s Sound. Not uncommon on the Snapper Banks off Moreton Bay, but apparently not found inshore as is its habit further south. Atypichthys strigatus Gunther, ibid., 11, p. 64, 1860: Swan River. Large examples are occasionally taken in the same localities as the preceding species. Parachetodon ocellatus Cuvier & Valenciennes, ibid., vil, p. 229, 1831: loc. ign. One specimen; Morteon Bay ; Miss Gwendoline Fitzgerald ; Cat. No. 446. Pseudorhombus nove-cambrie Ogilby, Proc. Linn. Soc. N. 8S. Wales, xxii, 1898, p. 296: Port Jackson. Not un- common in Moreton Bay. Aserragodes macleayanus Ramsay, Proc. Linn. Soc. N. 8. Wales, v, 1881, p. 462: Port Jackson. I have seen specimens from the Brisbane River and trawled a pair off Caloundra. Synaptura nigra Macleay, ibid., vi, 1881, p. 49: Port Jackson. Not uncommon in our southern estuaries. Addenda to the New South Wales fauna— Spilotichthys labiosus Macleay, Proc. Linn. Soc. N. S. Wales, vili, 1884, p. 202: Wide Bay. Occurs at least as far south as the Tweed Heads. In addition to the above, I provisionally refer to Odontaspis tricuspidatus Day (Fishes of India, p. 713, pl. elxxxvi, fig. 1, 1878: Karachi), a pair of large sharks captured in my presence some years ago on the coast of New South Wales in the course of a visit of inspection to the Manning River oyster beds by the late Hon. J. Want, Dr. James Cox, and others. Day’s description agrees fairly well with my notes taken from the specimens in 26 ON NEW GENERA AND SPECIES OF FISHES question, except in respect to color, mine being of a dark steel blue above, whereas Day describes his as being “‘ brown superiorly.” The original specimens came from the coasts of Sind and Beluchistan, but Day mentions one in the British Museum from South Australia. They attain a length of twenty feet. Note a:—In September, 1906, [received from Mr. T. F. B. Mullin the jaws of a shark captured in Table Bay by one of his employees, who had recently arrived from South Africa, having sailed direct from Capetown to Brisbane. On examination these proved to belong to a cestraciont shark belonging to the Heterodontus philippi group. As I am unaware that the family Heterodontide has as yet been recorded from the seas of the Cape,* and as it is extremely unlikely that the Australian species should range so far westward, I propose to distinguish the South African form as Heterodontus bone-spet. Note b. :—Mr. J. T. Jamison, of Woody Point, having kindly obtained for me some of the fishes on which Macleay founded his Atherinosoma jamesonit I am_ reluctantly obliged to announce their identity with Pseudomugil signafer, Kner.t * Shortly after receiving the specimen I wrote to the Curator of the South African Museum on the subject but have not as yet received an answer; 23rd June, 1908. + Proc. Linn. Soc. N. S. Wales, ix, 1884, p. 171: Bremer River. t Reise Novara, Fisch. p. 275, pl. xiii, fig. 5, 1867: Sydney. THE GLASSHOUSE MOUNTAINS. By JOHN SHIRLEY, B. Sc. District INSPECTOR OF SCHOOLS. A Paper read before the Royal Society of Queensland on April 27th, 1907. THe Glasshouse Mountains were discovered by Captain Cook in May, 1770, during his first voyage to southern seas. They were so named from their resemblance, at a distance, to the glass furnaces or glass houses with which Cook was so familiar in Northern England. They were sighted by Flinders in July, 1802, and are mentioned in his “ Voyage to Terra Australis in H.M.S. The Investigator.” Mr. Stutchbury, who visited the Caboolture district in August, 1854, gives the following description of these strange peaks:—The special forms and characteristics which the Glasshouse Mountains present are peculiarly interesting. At first sight, hand specimens might be taken for a fine grained granite ; but on examining these en masse and carefully viewing all the attendant circumstances, there can be no doubt that they are metamorphic sandstones. It is evident that no granite masses could have been pro- jected in the form they now assume ; they must have been surrounded by some supporting material such as the con- tinuation or extension of the same strata would give, now removed by denudation. Upon careful examination, lines of stratification can yet be traced. The largest of these mountains, ‘‘ Beerwah,” presents precipitous faces, especially on the northern and eastern faces, exhibiting semi-basaltic columns leaning from the base towards the centre.” ‘“* We can easily imagine that at a period subsequent to the coal measures there were as many foci of heat as there are now mountains.” 28 THE GLASSHOUSE -MOUNTAINS The last part of Mr. Stutchbury’s statement should have given him the clue to the formation of these remarkable mountains. He tried to account for their formation as masses of plutonic rocks, as igneous rocks which had crystallized at depths, and failed. If he had tried to account for them as volcanic rocks, he would have been more successful. He recognized that “there were as many foci of heat as there are now mountains,’ but he went no farther. The simplest explanation of their origin is that each marks the site of a volcano, once standing as a truncated cone, its sides built up of alternate layers of tuff and lava, and having a crater at its blunt apex. Below the crater and piercing the central axis of the mountain was the pipe up which molten matter made its exit at each volcanic outburst. After the last explosion, this pipe was filled with a plug of solidified lava that formed the hardest rock of the mountain. By denudation through successive ages all the softer parts of these volcanoes have been swept away. Theslopes of tuff, or volcanic ash, and lava have gone, the crater has gone; except in the case of Crookneck or Coonowrin nothing is left but the plug of volcanic rock which filled the volcanic vent. Even this is now suffering denudation in turn. Round the base of each mountain is a talus of blocks, detached from its surface by the action of frost, running water and the daily variations of temper- ature. With one exception, they rise baldly from the coast plain on. which they stand. This exception is Crookneck, which has as its base a small collar of Trias-Jura rocks. The continuous rains of the first quarter of 1893 brought about an immense landship on Crookneck, and the booming and rumbling of the rock slide caused some alarm in the neighbourhood ; the fissure produced by the fall of this immense mass is plainly visible on its 8.E. side. In 1875, the late Sir Augustus Gregory, in his report on “The Geology of Parts of the Wide Bay and Burnett Districts,” classes the Glasshouse Mountains with Mounts Cordeaux and Mitchell and Spicer’s Peak in the Main Range; and with Mount Lindsay and Mount Barney in the Mac- pherson Range. He calls the rock in each case a porphyry, and says, “The porphyry consists of a pale brown paste with minute felspathic crystals, though it sometimes varies BY JOHN SHIRLEY, B. SC. 29 so as to consist of very small grains of quartz with minute cavities, containing oxide of iron, resulting from the decom- position of pyrites. Occasionally, it is vesicular, and has the aspect of trachyte.”’ In speaking of the rock as con- sisting of a brown paste, Mr. Gregory must have had rocks of the Beerburrum type in view, and he very nearly gave their true composition when stating that they had the aspect of a trachyte. As a matter of fact, all these mountains are built up of forms of columnar trachyte in six-sided prisms. Leichhardt compared the Glasshouses to the Puys of Auvergne, a group of detached cones scattered over the centre of France, some of which still retain their cone-shaped slopes and central crater, while others have reached the state of denudation shown in our Glasshouses, and are reduced to the central plug of crystalline rock. The Puys are also columnar in structure, as may be seen in the illustra- tion handed round. A letter of Leichhardt’s, dated September, 1843, says : Last Saturday I returned from a trip to the Glasshouses ; the highest, Beerwah, is about 1,000* feet high, and is com- posed of a rock entirely different from the surrounding mountains; I have seen similar mountain features in Auvergne. Geologists have called this rock domite, because of its affecting the form of a dome. This domite belongs to the trachytic group. The Rev. J. E. Temison Wood believed the rocks of the Glasshouses to be basalt, and in his paper on the “ Desert Sandstone of the interior of Queensland,’ published plates showing ‘‘ Prismatic Basalt, Glass House Mountains.” Mr. Henry G. Stokes, formerly a member of this Society, was the first to show conclusively that the rocks of the xlasshouses belonged to the Trachyte class. Recently, Dr. H. I. Jensen, a Queenslander, and former resident of Caboolture, an ex-scholarship winner, and holder of a travelling science scholarship from Sydney University, has written two exhaustive papers for the Linnzan Society of New South Wales, in which the structure of the mountains, and the nature of their minerals have been fully discussed. * The true height is 1,760 feet. 3) THE GLASSHOUSE MOUNTAINS Visitors to the mountains should stay at Bankfoot House kept by Mr. Grigor,* an old resident, who can supply horses and guides. The nearest railway station is Glass Mountain Station, distant about 45 miles north of Brisbane. Bank- foot House stands right in the centre of the Glasshouses. The mountains lie roughly on north and south lines in groups of three ; each group of three les on a transverse axis, cutting the N. and S. axis almost at right angles. Taking the three lying immediately north of Grigor’s— Ngungun, Coonowrin and Beerwah—it will be found on ascending Ngungun, an easy feat by climbing round its south-eastern face, that the points of the other two lhe from Ngungun in one and the same straight line. North of these, Mount Mellum, Mt. Blanc and Candle Mountain lie along a parallel straight line, and to the south on a third parallel lie Barren Mountains, Tibrogargan and Mt. Ewan, while south again on an east and west line are Beerburrum and the twin peaks of Toonbubudla. The theory advanced by Mr. Lionel Ball, and by Mr. Jensen is that the north and south lines represent immense faults or fractures or lines of weakness in the rocks north of Caboolture, and that these fractures when formed along north and south folds cause smaller cross fractures. If we press with a straight piece of wood on the surface of a pie crust, the crust will not only break along the line of pressure, but also in numerous places at right angles to the main fissure. Mr. Stokes asserted that there were two or three main lines of fracture parallel to the coast, and that each extinct volcano was placed where the cross faults or fissures cut these. The columnar structure of these mountains is evident from a distance, on each mountain the columns in the centre are vertical, but on the slopes are parallel to the angle of slope, and all converge towards the summit. The columns on Toonbubudla, the twin peaks, present a very curious structure. Where the end of a prism is exposed, it looks like a gigantic honeycomb, each column is again divided into many smaller prisms, which are similar in shape to the parent mass. The various peaks do not show the greatest effect of denudation. on the side facing the sea, * Since writing the above news of Mr. Grigor’s death has been received. BY JOHN SHIRLEY. B. SC. 31 and the prevailing winds. Ngungun is weathering most rapidly from the south, Coonowrin from the south-west, Beerwah from the north, and Toonbubudla from the north- west. Toonbubudla and Beerburrum seem to weather almost equally towards all points of the compass. The columnar structure may best be studied in the caves at the foot of the column on Coonowrin. Though they are usually six-sided, there are exceptions to the rule in four and-five-sided prisms. The most porphyritic rocks are those of Beerburrum and Ngungun. The formerly usually weathers a rich red- brown. Specimens from Beerwah and Beerburrum have been classified by Mr. Jensen as Trachyte; those from Coonowrin, Tibrogargan and Ewan as Comendite; and those from Ngungun as Pantellarite, a soda trachyte in which the percentage of silica ranges from 66.8 to 72.5, and alkalies, principally soda, amount to 10 p.c. The heights of the principal peaks are :—Beerwah, 1760 feet ; Coonowrin, 1170; Toonbubudla, 1020; all the others are below 1000 feet. The Glasshouses arise from Trias-Jura beds, while immediately to the west of them are rocks of Carboniferous age. With regard to the age in which they were formed, all that we can say is that they are more recent than the Trias-Jura, and older than the surrounding basalts. GRAPHICAL AND MECHANICAL AIDS TO CALCULATION. By J. C. BRUNNICH, F.L.C. A Paper read before the Royal Society of Queensland on May 25th, 1907. In every station of life arithmetical calculations are abso- lutely indispensable: no trade, no profession, no calling, however humble it may be, can exist without a continual practical application of one of the three great R’s in the solving of arithmetical problems. Such calculations become in many cases a monotonous mental drudgery, and from the earhest times mathematicians have tried to invent instruments and tables which should minimise such work in all scientific, commercial and industrial calculations. In our present state of civilisation, in which the keen industrial competition becomes a veritable struggle for life, with ‘“‘ time is money” as its principal motto, such aids become more than ever invaluable, and I can positively state from my own experience, that with the help of graphical tables and more particularly with the use of slide rules, I have saved 75% of the time otherwise spent in calcula- tions. The object of this paper is to spread the knowledge of such instruments and to awaken the interest of a few, so that they lke myself become apostles advocating the employment of graphical tables and of slide rules. This paper does not claim to be a scientific treatise on the subject, neither can I enter into explanation of the more expensive instruments, like arithmometer, used _ for complicated astronomical calculations, and the elaborate adding or counting machines, which are more and more introduced into the offices of our larger banking institutions. C—Rovat Soc. 34 GRAPHICAL AND MECHANICAL AIDS TO CALCULATION I shall first treat briefly with graphical tables or dia- grams, also called graphs, and show one of the oldest graphs in existence: Pythagoras table of multiplication (Table [., Plate 1). The construction is of the simplest, on a horizontal line ten equal divisions are traced, numbered from 0 to 10, the same is repeated on a perpendicular line erected on the zero point, and the whole square completed. Every pro- duct of multiplication is indicated by the poimt where the horizontal line of a given number crosses the vertical line of another number; by connecting all products of equal numerical value, a system of curves will be obtained, with the help of which the product of any two factors may be read off. Every line representing the same quantity is called an “‘ isoplethe”’ (this term was first proposed by the German mathematician, Vogler, and has been universally adopted by others), and we find on this graph three series of isoplethes, two systems of straight lines representing the factors and a system of curves representing the products. To obtain the products with fractions of whole numbers, the values must be estimated by interpolation, which makes the table of little practical value. This table serves to illustrate the simplest of forms applied to three variables, in which two given values determine a third unknown. The celebrated French engineer, Leon Lalanne, dis- covered the principle of anamorphosis, by which the con- struction of graphs is simplified, and their utility greatly increased. This principle is based on the following con- sideration :—Each scale must be considered extensible, as if drawn on a sheet of rubber, each scale can be so stretched and transformed that the curves become straight lines, which not only simplifies the construction, but greatly facilitates the reading. Lalanne thus modified Pythagoras table of multiplication by stretching the horizontal and the vertical scales in a peculiar manner with the result shown on the left of Table I. that the isoplethes of products become straight lines running diagonally, and cutting both the horizontal and vertical isoplethes at the number of their actual value. On this improved table of multiplication, the squares and cubes of numbers are easily found by drawing diagonal lines, for the squares trom 1 to 100, and for the cubes from | to 3.162 (= v 10) and from 3.162 to 100, and reading the results at the point of intersection of ver- BY J.C. BRUNNICH, EMG. 35 tical lines and diagonals. Lallemand, another French mathematician, was the first to construct hexagonal graphs, in which, with the aid of a transparent sheet, on which the three diagonals of a hexagon are drawn, the value of an unknown may be found from two given variables. He further extended the principle by making each of the scales a system of two variables and thus producing a graph on which the relation of six variables is recorded. On Table IT., Plate I), which represents one of Lalanne’s hexagonal graphs, we have thus three double systems, one with the variables, u and v, the second with the variables, y and z, and the third, with the variables w and 2, and for uw=30, v=20, y=50, z=20 and w=20, we find z=4. In the reading of these hexagonal graphs, attention has to be paid that the diagonals of the transparent sheet cut the systems perfectly perpen- dicular. With the help of similar tables, Lallemand succeeded in the general topographical survey of France to reduce to quite simple reading off, long complicated calculations, which previously occupied for days the time of several persons. As a practical example of such a hexagonal graph, I give here a Table (III., Plate I), for the calculation of com- pound interest, constructed by Prévot, which for a given amount of capital, a given rate of interest and given time in years, allows to read off the amount of capital plus compound interest. For instance, £225 at 3 per cent. will increase in thirteen years to £328. One of the greatest authorities on graphical calculations of the present day is the French enginneer, Maurice d’ Ocagne, who proposed the term Nomographie for this science, which term is now generally used in Europe, on which he published several works. He was the first to extend and simplify the principle of graphical calculations by inventing a system by which the three factors are read off on a straight line. I will give here an instance of this principle by showing a Table (IV., Plate 1), published only a few months back, constructed by Fischer for the calculation of the amount of alcohol in wine. A wine with a specific gravity of 1.0520 yielded an alcoholic destillate with a spec. gr. .9778, con- tained in accordance with this table 13.84 per cent. by weight of alcohol. 36 GRAPHICAL AND MECHANICAL AIDS TO CALCULATION D’Ocagne exiended the science of nomographie in every direction and he succeeded in laying before the French Academy of Science a method by which he constructed nomographs with ten and more variables. I will give here another example of one of d’Ocagne’s nomographs, as applied to higher mathematics, the graphic solution of the cubic equation, z?+pz+q=0, we find from Table VII. that for p=2, and q= —6, 7=1.46. As another instance of reading a result with the aid of a straight line, I will give here a very simple graph, which I constructed for use in sugar laboratories for the calcula- tion of the well-known value Pure Obtainable Cane Sugar, or P.O.C.S. in sugar cane (Table V., Plate II.) In cane juice, the amount of total solid matter is determined by a density determination with the aid of Brix or Beaumé spindle. The degree Brix express the percentage of total soluble solid matter in the cane juice, which value is read off in our table on the third perpendicular scale on the right. The amount of cane sugar in the juice is determined with the help of the saccharometer or polariscope, the value found is read off on the centre scale, by connecting the per cent. of brix and per cent. of cane sugar by a straight line, the amount of P.O.C.S. is read off on the left hand scale where it is cut by this straight line. I may be allowed to explain that the amount of sugar obtainable by the process of manufacture not only depends on the actual amount of cane sugar in the juice, but also on the amount of soluble impurities, and from practical experience the manufacturer estimates that one-half of these impurities have to be deducted from the per cent. of cane sugar in the cane. We have for instance two cane juices both nineteen degrees Brix, one with seventeen per cent., and the other with fifteen per cent. of cane sugar, the former has sixteen per cent. and the latter only thirteen per cent. P.O.C.S. I will now show a chart which I constructed for the use of dairies and butter factories, by the aid of which for a given quantity of milk containing a certain per centage of butter fat, the amount of commercial butter which should be obtained by churning, may be read off. (Table VI., Plate Il). A cow’ giving, say, 2llbs. of milk with a 3.8 per cent. test, would yield 140zs. of commercial butter a day. The formula BY J. C. BRUNNICH, F.1.C. BW used. for the calculation of the result is not a sunple one, as shown on the top of the table, but by the aid of this nomograph correct results are obtained, without turning over pages and pages of tables of the tabulated works generally used in our factories, which tables moreover give the results in pounds and decimal points of pounds which values are not so intelligible to our farmer. A similar chart I constructed for the calculation of commercial butter from given quantities of cream. As a further instance, I will show here a table used for the calculation of the amount of water evaporated to concentrate a sugar juice of a given degree Brix into a syrup of certain degree Brix. The original table gave the amount of water evaporated in per centage of weight of the original juice, I extended the utility of the table so as to be able to find directly the gallons of water evaporated per 100 gallons juice. With the graphical aids to calculations may be included an ingenious little instrument, costing only a few shillings : the mathematical Cinderella, or Engineer's Messknecht (measuring or rather computing servant), so called by its inventor, Hofrath Prof. Max Pressler. This table of handy pocket size, constructed of strong card board, has on one side a complete table of logarithms from four to five places, with many other useful data and constants with reference to weight and measures, etc. On the other side are other graphical tables of reciprocals, circumference and surfaces of circles of various diameters, squares and cubes of numbers, chords, arcs, sines, cosines, tangents and secants of all angles. The instrument may be used, like a regular multum- in-parvo, for rough surveys and levelling, for the estimation of true sun time, the estimation of heights of trees and mountains, for the estimation of the cubic contents of standing and felled trees. To give an instance how handy the arrangement of these tables are for calculations, which otherwise would require large volumes of tables, I will give an example taken at ‘random from the httle pocket book, issued with the instrument. In a railway to be constructed, the line of rails has to change its direction by an angle of 31.4 degrees, and the lines have to be connected by a curve 200 yards radius (See Plate Il.) The surveyor wishes to know : — 38 GRAPHICAL AND MECHANICAL AIDS TO CALCULATION 1. Length of chord BC=200 x chord 31.4 degrees=2 x 54.12 =108.24 yards ; 2. Height of arc FS=200, height of arc 31.4=2x3.73= 7.46 yards , 3. Length of arc, curve CFB degrees=200 x are 31.4= 200 x .548=109.67 yards ; 4. Surface of segment=200? seg. 31.4 degrees = 40000 x .0134=536 sq. yards ; 5. Distance CD and DB=200 x tang. 15.7 degrees = 200 x .281=56.2 yaras ; 6. Distance DM=200 x sec. 15.7 degrees=200 x 1.038 x 207.6 yards. 1 will now pass to the mechanical aids to calculation and draw first attenticn to the simplest of all such instur- ments the ordinary ball frame, which is still extensively used in all business houses in Russia, and is also in common use in China and a few other countries. It is quite a reve- lation to see a Russian bank clerk doing all his adding up and other calculations with the help of a ball frame, with the greatest of speed and absolute accuracy, and with the great advantage that he may be interrupted at any time during his calculations without affecting the result. Some years back a small portable instrument was patented in America, the ‘‘ Locke Adder,’ which is based on the same principle as the ball frame, and is worked in exactly the same manner. It is of great advantage for adding up, but not so easily applicable to our system of money with its pound, shillings and pence. With practice any arith- metical operation addition, subtraction, multiplication and division may be done with the little instrument. By far the most general usefu] of all the mechanica] devices invented to aid calculation are sliderules, of which a great many forms exist. In 1624, ten years after the invention of logarithms by the Scotchman, John Napier, who published the first table of his natural or hyperbole logarithms in 1614, the English mathematician, Edmund Gunter, constructed a rule which he divided in proportion with the Joragithms of numbers, with which he used a pair of compasses to obtain results of multiplication and division. Gunter was a colleague of Prof. Henry Briggs, of Gresham College, London, who was the originator of the more gener- BY J. C. BRUNNICH, F.I1.C. 39 ally used decimal or common logarithms. Already in 1657 Seth Partridge constructed a logarithmic slide rule with Gunter’s scales, which is really the forerunner of all the sliderules in use at the present day. Although England is the home of the original inventors, the use of sliderules made very little progress in the country, and only within recent years more attention has been given to the little instrument, which is becoming of more general use. In France, Germany and other European countries sliderules are very much more extensively used, and are not only used by nearly every scientist, but are found in the hands of every artisian, mechanic and engineer. The reason that sliderules are less used in England and its Colonies lies unquestionably in the fact that the ordinary worker on account of the complicated system of weight, measures and monies, is not so accustomed with the use of decimals, but does most of his calculations with vulgar fractions. The principles, a mechanical and mathematical one, on which the use of sliderules are based, are exceedingly simple and easily understood. We will first consider the mechanical principle, which is easily demonstrated by taking two ordinary scales divided into 10 equal parts, in contact with each other (Table VIII., Plate III), by now moving the lower scale until the zero falls below a certain number, for instance three, in the upper scale, we will find that every other number on the upper scale is equal to the sum of the coinciding number on the lower scale plus three. This gives a simple method of adding a number taken on one scale to any number on the other scale. Similarly substraction may be demonstrated by placing the number to be de- ducted underneath the number from which it has to be substracted, for instance, four from seven, and to read off the result of the substraction over zero of the lower scale on the upper scale, which equals three. For certain operations the lower scale may be inverted, and in this case we will find that the sum of all the coinciding figures on the two scales is constant, and as an example we find on our table that this sum of numbers is seven. We now see that with the slide inverted the sum of the numbers is constant, whereas with the slide direct the difference of numbers is constant. 40 GRAPHICAL AND MECHANICAL AIDS TO CALCULATION The mathematical principle is equally simple, and is based on the theory of logarithms, in accordance with which multiplication of numbers is simplified into the addition of their logarithms, division into subtraction, the raising of a number to the mth power by multiplying the logarithm by n, etc. Ona slide rule the two principles are combined, the scales are divided in accordance with the logarithms of numbers, and we find at once that the mode of division is exactly the same as on Lalanne’s table of multiplication. If we have now two such logarithmic scales in contact with each other, and place for instance the index 1 >f the lower scale under the 2 on the upper scale, we find that in all pairs of numbers in coincidence the number on the upper scale is the product of the number of the lower scale multiplied by two. Again we find that all pairs of numbers are in direct proportion with each other, in our case 2+1= 4+2—6+3=8+4=10+5. If we invert the slide or lower scale, we willj find in accordance with the mechanical principle that the products of all numbers in coincidence are constant, in our case 5X 1=2x2.5=2.24x2.24=7.07 X 7.07, which latter num- bers are on the square roots of 5 and of 50. On the ordinary Mannheim sliderule of 25 centimeter or about 10 inches length we find two scales of divisions from 1 to 10 each on the upper part of the rule, and a scale from 1 to 10, but of double length on the lower part of the rule, and similar scales on the upper and lower part ofthe movable slide. With this rule only approximate values (A, Plate III), can be obtained, which for most calculations is quite sufficient. The reading of the sub- division requires some practice. Ona sliderule all operations of calculations are made irrespective of the decimal point, and for instance the values of .0265 or 2.65 or 2650 are taken on the same place on the scale. Rules exist to ascertain the position of the decimal point, but they are rarely re- quired, as in practical calculations the position of the decimal point is generally self-evident. As the accuracy of the results of operations made by the aid of a slide rule depends entirely upon the number of subdivision on a given length of scale, sliderules of great length up to three feet have been constructed, which how- BY J. GC. BRUNNICH, F.1.C. 4] ever, on account of their length, become unwieldy. The lengthening of the scale may also be achieved by dividing the seale into two halves, with the first half of the scale on the upper part of the rule, and the second half on the lower part, and to make the instrument with two slides, as in the slide rule invented by E. Peraux, which although only 25 centimeter long, corresponds in accuracy with a rule 1 metre long, and gives results accurate to at least four figures (Plate I11., B.). Of still greater accuracy 1s the cylindrical slide rule of Prof. George Fuller, in which a logarithmitic scale over 40 feet long, is wound round a movable cylinder, and with which calculation with an approximation of 1+10,000 are obtained. On this imstru- ment we have only one scale of numbers and the operations are based on the same principle as originally employed by Gunter, by taking the first factor from the scale with the aid of two indices, and then moving the scale and reading off the result on the scale with one or the other of the indices. This shderule gives by far the most accurate results, but has the disadvantage that if several operations with a constant factor have to be made, the scale has to be shifted every time. This drawback is avoided in the horizontal cylindrical slide rule by Thacher, which has a scale of 30 feet length, divided into 40 parts of equal length arranged parallel on a moving cylindrical slide, which is surrounded by a framework of triangular bars carrying similar scale. With this rule nearly the same approximation as in Fuller’s rule is obtained, but with the great advantage that a series of multiplications or divisions in which one of the factors is constant can be made with only one setting of the slide. The bars further carry a scale of squares which gives a much greater range of possible calculations. Futhermore the shde has two series of scales running parallel so that the results may be generally obtained at two different places, and unnecessary shifting and drawing out of the slide is avoided. Both Fuller’s and Thacher’s rule are only for office use. Quite of late years the ordinary Mannheim rule has been greatly improved by Prof. A. Beghin, who introduced his new slide rule (Plate III., D and E.) towards the end of 1898, and which now almost entirely replaces the older 42 GRAPHICAL AND MECHANICAL AIDS TO CALCULATION sliderules, as it gives much greater accuracy than any other rule of the same length, is easier to work, and has a far greater range of possibilities in calculations, as for instance it allows with only one setting of the slide direct multipli- cation of three numbers or the finding of the quotient of a number divided by the product of two numbers. Calcu- lations like w=a.b., w=a.b.c., x=a.b.+¢, x=a+b e, a= ya, £=Va, xz—a.b?, x=a2~b, x=a: Vb, x= Vab, Me oa 7b, x=* Vad, x=a?—b?, r= Va?+b2, x= (va+ vb)? can be solved with the greatest of ease with one single movement of the slide. Special scales on the reverse of the slide give natural sines and tangents of angles, and allow trigonometrical calculations. Just to give one example of the use of the sliderule in technical calculations. In order to make the results of analyses strictly comparable the results of the analysis are calculated on to the percentage of dry substance. We find for instance a sample of sorghum containing after air drying 10.15 per cent. of moisture, to contain starch 23.80 per cent., soluble carbohydrates 10.65 per cent., fat 2.56 per cent., ash 7.06 per cent., woody fibre 36.60 per cent., nitrogen 1.225 per cent., and proteins 7.35 per cent., and with one setting of the slide by setting the 10 on the rule to 89.85 amount of dry substance on the slide (as on top of double rule, Plate 1II., B), we can read all the results off from the amounts taken on the shde with the coinciding figures on the rule and get 26.50 per cent., 11.86, 2.85, 7.86, 40.75, 1.364, 8.18 per cent. respectively. Practical calculations are very much simplified by using conversion factors or gauge points, for instance, to convert feet into metres we use the proportion feet : metre as 292:89 or the factor .3048. The relation between the cir- cumference of a circle and its diameter is very accurately expressed by the factor 710:226. If we read an Kuropean work on agriculture we find all the results of harvest expressed in hectolitres per hectare, and we can convert this into bushels per arce by multiplying the numbers by the factor 1.1133, or setting the slide to the propor- tion 180/167. Every user of the sliderule, after becoming once familiar with the instrument, will find that certain factors are mostly BY J. C. BRUNNICH, F.1.C. 43 used in his calculations and he can fix them by making marks either on the rule or on the slide. Movable metal runners, called cursors, which have a fine vertical line marked on a piece of glass, facilitate in many cases the »perations and the setting and reading off, but are particularly useful in continuea operations like a.b.c.d.~e.f.g. I may here add that for office use slides with the scales arranged on circles have been constructed, which, however, have no advantage over the slides already mentioned. Another pocket arrangement is a scale invented by Proell, on which we have a scale divided into ten equal parts printed on a small card, and a similar scale printed on a transparent sheet of celluloid, which is moved on top of the scale on the cardboard. I trust that the examples I have given are sufficient to clearly demonstrate the value of mechanical and graphical aids to calculations, and so that they may be more commonly be used as time and labour saving inssruments. In order to enable any student to get some more in- formation on this interesting subject, J will enumerate a few of the publications dealing with graphic calculations and slide rules :— L. Lalanne.—Memoires sur les tables graphiques et sur la géométrie anamorphique. do. Méthodes graphique pour l’expression des lois & trois variables. Lallemand.—Les abaques hexagonaux. Feuilles litho- graphiées en 1885. M. d’Ocagne.—Nomographie.— Paris, Gauthier Villars. do. Sur une méthode nomographique. ‘‘ Comptes rendues de l’académie des science,” juillet 1893. L. Lalanne.—Instruction sur les régles a calculs. —Paris. Quintino Sella.—Teorica and pratica del regola cal- colatore. Torino. Elhot.—A treatise on the slide rule. London. A. Beghin.—Régle a calculs. Paris. C. N. Pickworth.—The Slide Rule.—Emmott and Co. Manchester and London. MS) BR: Pressler. — Mathematisch — Polytechnische Brieftasche mit Ingenieur Mess-Knecht.—Wien. Moritz Perles. Qbague Fewagonat a WS alComvana Prats I. PL vente ee Seetet 7 ‘ Fee! ie wire : TOON =I if “Y 4 L> yi / z / \ a ; : ze ee es ericees =< Ee HI SASSO eas fr aae eee cr a ROSES HS SSaSCS Saeco Saepec) koe SMmesneee SEIS ENC Vou. xxtI. “easy ie SEptEs strc eigteceeasee (esate eee | Eeteite +4 i | t=} Ota LAT } Proc Roy. Soc. Q’anp, Poco, Roy. Soc. Q’uanp, Vou. xxI. Prats II, Me oe oe ee a P. ON S.% oO | or {N | \ = = = = = 4 & ee Sao A Cane Sugar% 2 Tha ie) a B x i] ‘i | OF GSES Sie n Sathe vt Graphic Butter Chart. 1% —'25]<100 x [bSx 16 85 x 100 25 MSs 02s. Butt.= 4 cu HD 30LLU Fat = See ee Puate III. Proc. Roy. Soc. Q’Lanp, Vou, XXI. , 2 7 a oTAUEATASPATI Wi ; fT A ont nterterrhre eters tert mg UL ALAIN oy ba LLL eat Lata tt phat tnt ttt i fe ues eae Pe We q oe i nial tl fl if iy Tae a UT ITU) pe WY t \ ju USUSUUDUDODUOONNONDSUUUDODOODUDUUEEEOEUNTE. VU HUATE NI IOWA HAH S MY Ue Olt to 7 mie a Suwa Scr ae ORE =n ro HAGAN f i eT 9 S v 1 £ 2 (6/6 “ ° a v c c ‘ t ° %) i WNL ss Fe ag ha t pay, PAGO GNF noni +00t 06 O08 OL o9 0s AN AUTOMATIC HOUSEHOLD FILTER. A Paper read before the Royal Society of Queensland, on June 27th, 1907. By J. BROWNLIE HENDERSCON, F.IC., (GOVERNMENT ANALYST), and H. WASTENEYS, F.CS., (Anatyst To THE BrispanE Board oF WATERWORKS.) Owi1ne to the water supply of Brisbane being delivered in an unfiltered state, and to its being at times of drought or flood undrinkable and exceedingly dirty, an attempt was made at the house of one of us (Mr. Henderson), to establish an automatic filter for the filtration of the water, which is delivered there from the Brisbane River supply. A similar filter had been found to give very good results with the “soft”? Enoggera supply at the Reservoir, but this was the first attempt to treat the “ hard” Brisbane River water by this method. A corrugated galvamzed-iron tank was made as in the diagrammatic sketch, with outlet pipe for the filtered water, wash out pipe with cock at the bottom, draw-off pipe with cock at the centre to run off water when cleaning top sand, and overflow, in case of flooding, at the top, the three latter openings being connected to the waste discharge. A perforated galvanized-iron pipe, three inches in diameter, was put down for the underdrain, and over this there was carefully packed washed gravel and sand as per sketch, to constitute the filter. The sand reached up to the level of the draw-off cock. A float in this filter was connected by a cord running over two pulleys to a swing arm attached to the outlet pipe, and to the storage tank pipes by barrel unions, as shown in sketch. To prevent syphon action, 46 AN AUTOMATIC HOUSEHOLD FILTER a small pipe is let in at the top bend of the swing arm to admit air. By this means a rise of level of water inside the filter lowers the outlet, so that each inch increase of rise in water level gives virtually two inches more pressure on the filter, thus practically doubling the head of water that can be obtained in the filter. The fall of the swing arm also calls attention to the fact that the filter is choking, but the fall is so gradual that a month can elapse after the arm starts to fall ere cleaning is necessary. Before the filtered water pipe enters the storage tank, there is a draw- off pipe with cock connected to the waste discharge, so that the filtered water can be run to waste for two days after cleaning off the top sand, and thus save the contamination of the clean water already in the storage tank. As the filtered water is always found to be absolutely devoid of oxygen, it is run over an aerator before going into the storage tank. The stored filtered water in the tank 1s always saturated with oxygen. The pipe from the water main passes close up beside the storage tank, and a floating ball connected through a slot in the tank with a ball cock on the pipe, controls the supply to the filter. The drawing off of water from the storage tank lowers the ball, opens the cock, and water is delivered on the filter until the filtered water again rises sufficiently to close the cock. To regulate the supply to the filter, a small cistern, just large enough for a ball cock, is placed over the filter. In our case, nine inches of water was the depth obtained in this cistern. In the bottom of this cistern there is a standard orifice, with about quarter of an inch of pipe around it to ensure the water dropping straight down and not running along the under side of the cistern. The diameter of the orifice is so adjusted that with the head of water obtainable in the cistern, it delivers water on to the filter at the standard rate of three million gallons per acre of sand surface per twenty-four hours, and cannot possibly deliver faster than this. As the ball cock in the cistern of course delivers. at a much greater rate than this, the cistern is nearly always full when the filter is working. The water delivered from the main is practically devoid of oxygen, so we erate the water by running it down a ripple on to the side of the tank, and find by that means that the water on top of the filter BY J. BROWNLIE HENDERSON AND H. WASTENEYS. 47 is saturated with oxygen. By this arrangement of controll- ing the supply first from the storage tank as to quantity, and secondly, from the cistern as to rate, we have found that the filter works quite automatically. It has been in use for over twelve months with no attention, save that on one occasion, after running nine months, the top quarter- inch of sand on the filter was removed and thrown away. The storage tank, filter and cistern were covered, and made mosquito proof, and the inside of each painted with “ bitumen ”’ paint. The chemical analysis of the filtered water shows that there is always a large decrease in the albuminoid ammonia and in the “ oxygen consumed,” and the color is almost entirely removed Saprophytic bacteria only are found in the filtered water, averaging from 50 to 100 per c.c. The intestinal bacilli, especially coh communis, are always present in the main supply, but have never been found in the filtered water On one occasion, when the Brisbane River wasin high flood, and dark brown, muddy water was being supplied, the filtered water was slightly opalescent, and had a yellowish colour, but that disappeared in a week. As a result of the use of this filter, there is always on hand a supply of 600 gallons (the capacity of the storage tank) of pure, clear filtered water, which is used for drinking, cooking, and the bath. The advantages of a pure, clear water supply need not be pointed out—they have been well-known for many years. By the use of a filter of this kind, which only costs comparatively a few pounds, such a supply is always assured, while none of the small domestic filters generally in use, although requiring constant atten- tion, can give a supply for the kitchen and bath room, very few of them remove the bacilli present, and a large proportion of them serve as breeding grounds for objection- able microbes. Proc. Roy. Soc. Q’Lanp, IMET > iy event 7M. DARD, Leena oe ee Se ie gee | Eliane ae | $990 One J | pms —> i (7 (7 _ Cyst ee CAIEL HE £4 Eas Proc. Roy. Soo. Q'tanp, Vor. xxr. Lye 2 FEET | TIE 2 has AE Ca || Xe 2cus_ fap Aik 2ucnis + is AY OmcHtS + Jas Dyn ies Puare IV. HOUSIHUD Filth, suray Te FuUTER Bye Cock fer ANEW TEST FOR MERCURY By P. W. JONES, A.I.C. A paper read before the Royal Society of Queensland, 27th June, 1907. Tue test is really the application of the action of mercury upon aluminum. When aluminium is rubbed with wash leather impregnated with mercury, combination takes place, forming an amalgam. This action is materially assisted and hastened by placing a drop of a solution of a caustic alkali on the aluminium before rubbing. When exposed to moist air, the alloy loses its lustre and the surface becomes oxidised with the formation of concretions of white aluminium oxide, and the liberation of mercury, at the same time evolving a considerable amount of heat. The test as applied in Toxicology is of considerable value in that very small quantities may be readily detected ; thus, a convenient portion of the sample is taken, placed in a flask together with a small strip of copper foil attached to a platinum wire and boiled as in Reinsch’s test. The copper is then taken out of the solution, washed lightly with hot water, then with alcohol, and ether, dried, and cut into strips and placed in a small hard glass tube, sealed at one end and the mouth expanded. The tube is then sus- pended in a hole in a stout brass or copper plate. Over the mouth of the tube is placed a piece of metallic aluminium, previously cleaned, and a drop of water on the top of the aluminium to prevent the temperature rising too high. The bottom of the tube is then carefully heated to a dull red heat, kept at that temperature for a minute or two, then allowed to cool. Take off the aluminium strip, and rub the part where the mercury may be deposited with a wash leather moistened with a drop of caustic alkali, allow to stand in a moist atmosphere for a few minutes, charac- D—Rovyat Soc. 50 A NEW TEST FOR MERCURY. teristic growths of Al, 03 will be seen if mercury is present. 1-500th of a grain of mercury may be detected in viscera, etc., by this method. The advantage this method has, is that small quantities of impurities such as fatty matters do not interfere. To detect small quantities of mercury in an ore.—Take from 0.5 to 1 grm. of the thoroughly sampled and finely ground ore and mix with about an equal bulk of lime and a little reduced iron (or other reducing agent), and place it in a small combustion tube placing a strip of aluminium, previously cleansed, over the mouth, and heat the mixture to dull redness, keeping the aluminium cool with a few drops of water. Then rub the aluminium with a wash leather moistened with a caustic alkah solution. If mercury, is present in the ore, there will be the characteristic growth of alumina. Puate V. Proc. Roy. Soc. Q’nanp, Vou. xx1. i; a ee 7 id 1 ; t _ 4% A a ee) bi on a ' + i 7 = ed oe 2 A ‘ > rte 4," 4 7 2 4 eA G« ' a Re, i ATs 9 Ms = na a ' 7 AS f i 1? a w rT > - 7 : ; “ei = ‘ { — we ‘ if, \ | : 2 ‘ - ‘ 7 Oo I z A = 0 = ; oi 6 ¥ ; : - A | "s . = a L , £ x4 : eS : dae . > 2: i ; ~~ if 4 fs @ “we < ; \ owt ¥ THE DETECTION OF SMALL QUANTITIES OF MERCURY IN EXPLOSIVES. J. BROWNLIE HENDERSON, F.I1.C. and P. W. JONES, A.I.C. A Paper read before the Royal Society of Queensland, 27th June, 1907. CONSIDERABLE trouble has arisen recently through the use of mercuric chloride by certain manufacturers in making up explosives, and this addition as is well-known masks the Abel Heat Test. So far as we have heard in Brisbane, both from pub- lished accounts and from private sources, no satisfactory chemical method of detecting the small quantities of mercury present in the explosives has yet been discovered, and in some prosecutions in London for the presence of mercury in explosives, the Government witnesses, including among others, Dr. Dupre and Sir Wm. Ramsay, relied solely on the spectroscopic method for the detection of mercury. In communicating with Mr. W. A. Hargreaves, Government Analyst of South Australia, on this subject, he informs us that the following method has been found to work well qualitatively in his Laboratory : 100 grammes of the explosive was ground up with 100 grammes of french chalk and heated in a flask in a water oven. Air was drawn through the flask gently for two hours, and then passed through dilute sulphuric acid to absorb the mercuric chloride vola- tilised. This acid was subjected to electrolysis, using a gold cathode and platinum anode. The gold was then dried and heated in a small combustion tube and the mercury _volatilised on to a microscope slide and examined under the microscope. We had succeeded in detecting traces of mercury by one or two rather long and unsatisfactory wet methods, but on getting this information from Mr. 2 THE DETECTION OF MERCURY IN EXPLOSIVES ot Hargreaves, we also adopted the volatilisation method, that he and Dr. Dupré had found useful, and with our method of abstracting the mercury from the vapour found the detection of mercury easy both qualitatively and approximately quantitatively. A number of preliminary experiments were made and we determined that mercuric chloride could be easily and completely volatilised at 100 degrees C., that a very small quantity of silver foil absorbed the mercuric chloride vapour quantitatively at 100 degrees C., and that on heating the silver after the >xperiment in a combustion tube in the usual manner the mercury could be readily recognised even in smali feactions of a milligram. The apparatus shown in sketch was then construct >d. The water bath is 450 mm. long by 150 mm. wide and 150 mm. deep, cn legs 200 mm. long. At each end is a hole 70 mm. diameter, with a short collar projecting 20 mm. An indiarubber cork fits each hole, and a glass tube 30mm. in diameter and 510 mm. long passes through the rubber corks, thus enabling the tube to be surrovnded with boiling water. 100 grammes of the explosive to be tested is ground up with 100 grammes of the French chalk prepared for heat test work, and the mixture run into the tube while it is held nearly vertical, a temporary stopper being put in the tube 60 mm. from ore end. We found it convenient to do this while the tube was in place in the bath. The 200 grammes of mixture then loosely occupy about 350 mm. of the tube. At the shorter unoccupied end of the tube, a glass “‘thimble”’ about 25 mm. in diameter is inserted close to the mixture to prevent back currents and in the end of the tube is inserted a cork and through the cork passes an open glass tube of about 5 mm. diameter. This provides for the inlet of air. A perforated cork is fitted into the other end of the large tube and through the perfora- tion is fitted a small glass tube about 5 mm. diameter and 140 mm. long. Close to the inner end of this narrow tube there is a constriction and pushed up against the constric- tion so as to loosely fit the tube are two leaves of silver foil, occupying about 15 mm. in length of the tube. By this means the mercuric chloride vapour never comes into eontact with a cold surface, the tube and silver foil being BY J. BROWNLIE HENDERSON, AND P. W. JONES. RS of course also at 100 degrees C., thus preventing loss by condensation. To prevent back currents into the colder end of the wide tube, a section of cork about 5 mm. thick that just fits snugly into the wide tube is fitted over the inner end of the narrow tube, and the tube pushed in till it nearly touches the explosive mixture. There is thus no “dead air”’ in the large tube and the air sucked through it does the maximum quantity of work in sweeping through the vapour of mercuric chloride. When the apparatus is fitted together, the bath is filled with water, and the water boiled. The “silver”? end of the tube is connected to a small wash bottle containing water to control the rate of flow by observing the air bubbles, and the wash bottle connected toa graduated aspirator so that the volume of air drawn through can be measured. We found by experi- ments that no mercury escaped the silver foil when the rate of suction was not greater than eight litres per hour, and this rate was adhered to in all our experiments. b] In testing the method, an explosive was first taken which, from its normal heat test (17 minutes) and British origin was presumably free from mercury. The tube con- taining the silver was weighed before starting the experiment. The explosive mixed with the chalk was heated for two hours and 16 litres of air drawn through. On withdrawing the tube containing the silver, drops of liquid which proved to be nitro-glycerine were noticed in this (and in every other experiment) on the inside of the outer portion of the tube. The tube was therefore washed out with ether (care being taken that no silver was removed) dried, and weighed. In two experiments with this explosive there was no alteration in the weight of the tube and no mercury was recovered from the silver on heating in a com- bustion tube. The silver was, however, slightly discoloured in each case, probably due to a trace of oxidation, but as there was no increase in weight, the oxidation must have been very slight. 100 grammes of this same explosive were then ground up with 100 grammes of French chalk which had been thoroughly mixed with two ccs. of a solution containing 1 milhgram of mercuric chloride per cc. This was equivalent to 1 part of mercuric chloride in 50,000 parts Di THE DETECTION OF MERCURY IN EXPLOSIVES of explosive. At the end of two hours heating the tube containing the silver had gained 1.4 milligrams, and after another two hours had gained a further 0.4 nulligrams or 1.8 milligrams recovered from two milligrams added. The silver foil was transferred to a small combustion tube 40 mm. long by 5 mm. diameter with ground top, which fitted into a hole in a thick copper plate in the usual way. A microscope slide was placed on top of the tube and a little water on the slide to keep it cool. The tube was heated to redness, and the sublimed mercury condensed on the microscope slide. It was visible as a grey stain to the naked eye, and with a power of 118 diameters under the microscope, the mercury globules were easily dis- tinguished. Several other experiments were made with the addition of known quantities of mercury chloride, and in every case a recovery of nearly 90 per cent. in 3 hours heating was obtained. | This experiment was repeated with French chalk, to which had been added 1 cc. of mercuric chloride solution containing 0.1 milligram per cc. .equivalent to one part of mercuric chloride in one million of explosive. No attempt was made in this case to weigh the tube, nor was a stain visible to the naked eye on the microscope slide, but under a power of 118 diameters many globules of mercury were distinctly visible, so that even smaller proportions than one in a million could be detected with certainty. A sample of explosive which gave no reaction in the Abel Heat Test in three hours, but which gave the reaction in 17 minutes when thoroughly ground with one leaf of silver foil, gave an increase of 1.4 milligrams in the tube containing the silver foil in the first two hours and a further increase of 0.4 milligrams in the second two: hours, thus agreeing exactly with the experiment in which one part of mercuric chloride had been added to 50,000 parts of explosive. On heating the silver as before, globules of mercury were easily recognised with the microscope.